Feature list

This page provides a complete, section-by-section list of all features available on ShopWired. It’s designed as a quick reference so you can check whether the platform supports specific functionality without having to search through multiple guides. The table below is divided into categories such as storefront, checkout, products, orders, integrations, and security, making it easy to see what’s included at a glance.

Dashboard

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Key information	Display turnover and allowance	Show the total qualifying turnover processed over the previous 365 days and the account's turnover allowance.
Key information	Display product count and allowance	Show the total number of products in the account and the product allowance limit.
Key information	Display next subscription payment	Show the date and amount of the next ShopWired subscription payment due.
Key information	Display accrued app charges	Show the total amount of app charges accrued on the account.
Key information	Display SEO warnings count	Show the total number of search engine optimisation warnings for the account.
Sales	Display sales summary	Show an overview of orders received excluding cancelled orders and adjusted for refunded amounts.
Sales	Display sales history	Show historical data of orders received excluding cancelled orders and adjusted for refunded amounts.
Recent orders	Display recent completed orders	Show the nine most recent completed orders received on the website.
Recent orders	Access order details	Allow selection of recent orders to view full details and manage them within the ShopWired account.
Visitor statistics	Display visitor summary	Show the total number of unique visitors to the website over the previous 15 days.
Visitor statistics	Link to visitor reports	Provide a link to view full visitor statistics reports for the website.
Visitor statistics	Set report period	Configure the time period for which visitor statistics are displayed, up to a maximum of 62 days.
Visitor statistics	View visitor statistics report	View basic visitor statistics for your website within a selectable report period.
Visitor statistics	Visit count	Track the number of visits, where each visit is a browsing session ending after 1 hour of inactivity.
Visitor statistics	Unique visitor count	Track the number of unique visitors, where each visitor is counted once per 30-day cookie period and per device/browser.
Visitor statistics	Page views count	Record the number of page views, including repeated views of the same page by a visitor.
Visitor statistics	Conversion metrics	Display conversion statistics based on visits, including proportions of visits that added products to basket, viewed the basket page, proceeded to checkout, and completed purchases.
Visitor statistics	Number of orders	Show the total number of completed orders during the report period.
Visitor statistics	Total order amount	Show the grand total value of all completed orders during the report period.
Visitor statistics	Best selling products	Display a summary of the products ordered in the highest quantities during the report period.
Visitor statistics	Most viewed products	Display a summary of the products with the highest number of views in the report period.
Visitor statistics	GDPR compliance	Visitor statistics do not collect or process personally identifiable information, so cookie consent is not required for this tracking.
Referral scheme	Invite friends via referral link	Allow users to invite others to create ShopWired accounts using a unique referral link.
Referral scheme	Referral commission tracking	Track and display 15% commission earned on subscription payments from referred accounts for their lifetime.
Notices	Display ShopWired update notices	Display notices about new ShopWired functionality or platform updates on the dashboard.
Notices	Email verification reminder	Display a notice reminding users to complete email verification for sending transactional emails if not yet verified.
Notices	Dismiss notices	Dismiss notices on the dashboard to hide them after reading.

Reports

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Report generation	Access reports	Access and download reporting tools from the Reports section in the ShopWired dashboard.
Report generation	Filter report data	Refine report outputs using filters such as number of data points, period start date, and period end date.
Sales by month report	Analyse sales by month	View order volumes and values for each month over a specified period.
Sales by month report	View monthly sales details	View month and year, number of orders, and total order value including VAT and shipping for each month.
Sales by month report	View sales percentage	View each month's total sales as a percentage of total sales in the report.
Sales by month report	Download CSV report	Download the sales by month report as a CSV file.
Sales by country report	Analyse sales by billing country	View order volumes and values by billing country over a specified period.
Sales by country report	View country sales details	View country name, highest order value, mean average order value, number of orders, and total order value including VAT and shipping.
Sales by country report	View sales percentage	View each country's total sales as a percentage of total sales in the report.
Sales by country report	Download CSV report	Download the sales by country report as a CSV file.
Transaction report	View daily transactions	View daily breakdown of orders and refunds processed during a specified period.
Transaction report	View refund details	View refund amounts processed on each day and associated order references.
Transaction report	Exclude cancelled orders	Cancelled orders are excluded from the transaction report.
Transaction report	Download CSV report	Download the transaction report as a CSV file.
Payment methods report	Analyse payment methods	View order volumes and values for each payment method over a specified period.
Payment methods report	View payment method details	View payment method name, highest order value, mean average order value, number of orders, and total order value including VAT and shipping.
Payment methods report	View sales percentage	View each payment method's total sales as a percentage of total sales in the report.
Payment methods report	Download CSV report	Download the payment methods report as a CSV file.
Sales by order report	View highest value orders	View highest value orders over a specified period.
Sales by order report	View order details	View order reference, shipping method, payment method, number of items, and total order value including VAT and shipping.
Sales by order report	View sales percentage	View each order's net sales as a percentage of total sales in the report.
Sales by order report	Download CSV report	Download the sales by order report as a CSV file.
Sales by customer report	View highest value customers	View customers ranked by highest value orders over a specified period.
Sales by customer report	View customer order details	View customer name, highest order value, mean average order value, number of orders, and grand total order value including VAT and shipping.
Sales by customer report	View sales percentage	View each customer's net sales as a percentage of total sales in the report.
Sales by customer report	Download CSV report	Download the sales by customer report as a CSV file.
Sales by brand report	View best-selling brands	View best-selling product brands over a specified period.
Sales by brand report	View brand sales details	View brand name, quantity of products sold, and total net sales value for each brand.
Sales by brand report	View sales percentage	View each brand's net sales as a percentage of total sales in the report.
Sales by brand report	Use current brand assignments	The report uses current brand assignments for products, not historical assignments at order time.
Sales by brand report	Download CSV report	Download the sales by brand report as a CSV file.
Sales by category report	View best-selling categories	View best-selling product categories over a specified period.
Sales by category report	View category sales details	View category name, quantity of products sold, and total net sales value for each category.
Sales by category report	View sales percentage	View each category's net sales as a percentage of total sales in the report.
Sales by category report	Handle multiple category assignments	When a product is assigned to multiple categories, only the first category is used in the report.
Sales by category report	Use current category assignments	The report uses current category assignments for products, not historical assignments at order time.
Sales by category report	Download CSV report	Download the sales by category report as a CSV file.
Sales by product report	View best-selling products	View best-selling products and product variations over a specified period.
Sales by product report	View product sales details	View SKU code, product name, variation details, quantity sold, and total net sales value for each product or variation.
Sales by product report	View sales percentage	View each product or variation's net sales as a percentage of total sales in the report.
Sales by product report	Filter by product brand	Filter the sales by product report to include only products assigned to a selected brand.
Sales by product report	Download CSV report	Download the sales by product report as a CSV file.

Orders

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Order CSV feed	Standardised CSV feed format	The orders CSV feed uses the same format as the order CSV export and cannot be customised.
Order CSV feed	View and change feed credentials	View and change the username and password used to protect the orders CSV feed.
Order CSV feed	Password protect CSV feed	Enable and configure username and password protection for the orders CSV feed.
Order CSV feed	Access real-time completed orders feed	Access a real-time CSV feed of completed orders created within the last 7 days, updated as new orders arrive.
Order CSV download	Price information excluding VAT	All price information in the CSV export is shown excluding VAT, except for the Grand total column.
Order CSV download	Export single page of orders	Export CSV files only for the currently displayed page of orders when selecting orders manually.
Order CSV download	Export selected orders	Export a CSV file containing only the orders selected via checkboxes on the orders page.
Order CSV download	Filter export by order status	Select to export only orders with a specific order status in the CSV file.
Order CSV download	Include products ordered in export	Include details about each product ordered in the CSV export, with each product on its own row.
Order CSV download	Export orders by date range	Export orders into a CSV file for a specified date range using the Date from and Date to options.
Order timeline	Exclude quote edits	Edits made to quotes are not recorded in the quote timeline.
Order timeline	Exclude order edits	Edits to orders such as changes to products, shipping method, or voucher codes are not recorded in the timeline.
Order timeline	Exclude refunds	Refunds added to an order are not recorded in the timeline.
Order timeline	Exclude custom field data changes	Additions or edits to custom field data on orders or quotes are not recorded in the timeline.
Order timeline	Exclude quote payment status changes	When a quote is marked as paid through admin, this is not recorded in the timeline.
Order timeline	Exclude customer detail edits	Edits to customer details on the order are not recorded in the timeline.
Order timeline	Exclude order active/inactive status changes	Changes when an order becomes active or inactive are not recorded in the timeline.
Order timeline	Exclude tracking URL changes	Changes to the tracking URL setting are not recorded in the timeline.
Order timeline	Record draft quote sent	The timeline records when a draft quote is sent to a customer.
Order timeline	Record quote creation	The timeline records the date and time when a quote is created.
Order timeline	Record quote admin comments	Admin and API comments added to quotes are recorded in the quote timeline.
Order timeline	Resend emails	Emails can be resent from the timeline as originally sent, with a maximum of five resends allowed per email.
Order timeline	View email contents	The timeline allows viewing the plain text and HTML content of emails sent related to the order or quote.
Order timeline	Record email address changes	The timeline records the original email address if the customer's email address is changed after emails have been sent.
Order timeline	Record product edits	When products in an order are edited, a new order is created and the original order is cancelled; the original order's timeline events are not copied to the new order.
Order timeline	Include quote timeline entries	When an order is created from a quote, the timeline includes entries from the original quote, including quote creation and draft quote sent.
Order timeline	Record API actions	Events triggered by API calls are recorded in the timeline and marked with the label "API".
Order timeline	Record admin comments	Admin comments added by users are recorded in the timeline with the name of the user who made the comment.
Order timeline	Record order status changes	The timeline records changes to order status, such as cancellations and pre-order ready for despatch.
Order timeline	Record payment information	The timeline records payment method details, transaction IDs, and changes related to payments.
Order timeline	Record emails sent	The timeline records all emails sent to the customer, including order confirmations and status updates, with both HTML and plain text versions.
Order timeline	Record order creation	The timeline records the date and time when an order is created, including incomplete orders.
Editing products and delivery	Link between original and new order	A link to the new version of the order is displayed when viewing the original cancelled order.
Editing products and delivery	New order confirmation email	A new order confirmation email is sent to the customer when the order is edited and recreated.
Editing products and delivery	Order status on edit	The new order retains the original order's status, and the original order is assigned the cancelled default status.
Editing products and delivery	Stock adjustment on order edit	Stock quantities from the original order are returned and new stock adjustments are made for the edited order.
Editing products and delivery	Order recreation on edit	When editing products or delivery rate, the original order is cancelled and a new order with the same reference is created.
Editing products and delivery	Edit products and delivery rate	Edit the products in an order and change the delivery rate by recreating the order and saving changes.
Editing customer comments	Edit customer comments	Edit existing customer comments on an order; new comments cannot be added if none exist.
Editing delivery date	Edit requested delivery date	Edit or add a customer's requested delivery date for an order.
Editing customer details	Edit billing and shipping details	Edit the customer's name, email address, telephone number, and billing and shipping address information within an order.
Payment gateway refunds	Refund notification	Display a notice in the refund section indicating whether adding a refund will refund the original payment transaction.
Payment gateway refunds	Refund transaction option	For some gateways, select the refund the transaction option to refund the customer's payment transaction when creating a refund.
Payment gateway refunds	Gateways with automatic refund	Refunds created in ShopWired automatically refund the original transaction for ShopWired Payments, Stripe, Opayo Direct (orders from 27/09/2023), and latest PayPal integrations.
Payment gateway refunds	Payment gateway refund integration	For most payment gateways, refunds created in ShopWired do not refund the original transaction; refunds must be processed separately in the gateway.
Refunding orders	Delete refunds	Delete refunds permanently from an order; deletion does not reverse refunds processed through payment gateways.
Refunding orders	Refund display in order	Display created refunds in the products ordered section and refunds section with date/time, amount, and comments.
Refunding orders	Refund amount inclusive of VAT	Refund amounts are inclusive of VAT/tax and affect the order grand total without recalculating VAT separately.
Refunding orders	Multiple refunds per order	Add multiple refunds to an order, ensuring total refunds do not exceed the order grand total.
Refunding orders	Create refunds	Create refunds for orders by entering refund amount and comments up to the order grand total.
Returning stock	Manual stock adjustment	Adjust stock quantities manually for SKU codes via the stock management page when partial returns are needed.
Returning stock	Return stock option conditions	Display the return stock option only if the product has a SKU, stock has not been returned, and the SKU matches a valid product variation or non-bundle product.
Returning stock	Return stock to SKU	Return all stock quantities for ordered products back to the SKU code's stock quantity from the order view.
Cancelling orders	Customise order status email content	Customise the contents of emails sent when an order status is updated.
Cancelling orders	Create custom order statuses	Create new order statuses, configure their colours, and assign them to orders.
Cancelling orders	Change order status	Change the status of an order to reflect cancellation or refund states.
Cancelling orders	Manage cancelled orders flexibly	Manage cancelled orders by creating refunds, changing order status, and archiving orders as needed.
Payment security	3D Secure MOTO exemption	Payment gateways request 3D Secure exemption for MOTO transactions during telephone or mail order payments.
Payment gateways	Supported gateways for payment capture	Take payments during order creation using ShopWired Payments, Barclaycard API, Opayo (Direct, Form, Hosted), Stripe, or Windcave.
Payment processing	Skip payment entry	Choose to proceed without taking payment during order creation if payment is received by other methods.
Payment processing	Take payment via payment gateway	Enter customer card details to take payment through supported payment gateways when creating an order.
Order creation	Finalise and create order	Create the order in the ShopWired account, displaying a confirmation and adding the order to the orders list.
Sales tax	Calculate US sales tax	Calculate applicable US sales tax on the order for accounts registered in the United States.
Payment status	Mark order as unpaid	Mark the order as unpaid, send the offline order confirmation email, and set status to awaiting payment.
Payment status	Mark order as paid	Mark the order as paid and send the standard order confirmation email to the customer.
VAT	Enable disability VAT relief	Enable VAT relief for eligible products and add comments to explain the VAT relief application.
VAT	Charge or remove VAT	Use options to charge VAT, not charge VAT, or enable VAT relief on eligible products in the order.
Discounts	Apply gift card code	Apply a gift card code to the order to reduce the order total.
Discounts	Apply voucher code	Apply a single voucher code to the order, subject to discount rules and product eligibility.
Custom fields	Add order custom field data	Enter data for order custom fields when the order custom fields app is enabled.
Comments	Add order comments	Add comments to the order that are displayed on the order confirmation email, invoice PDF, and customer account.
Delivery date	Specify requested delivery date	Enter a specific delivery date requested by the customer for the order.
Delivery	Apply wholesale delivery pricing	Automatically apply wholesale delivery pricing for trade customers when wholesale delivery is enabled.
Delivery	Restrict delivery rates by products	Only delivery rates applicable to the products in the order can be selected.
Delivery	Configure custom delivery rate	Configure a bespoke delivery rate for an individual order that is not saved to the account.
Delivery	Select delivery country and rate	Select the delivery country and applicable delivery rate when delivery is paid.
Delivery	Select delivery charge type	Choose whether delivery is free of charge or paid for the order.
Product pricing	Apply trade pricing	Automatically apply trade prices configured for trade customers and selected products or variations.
Product pricing	Edit product price	Edit the price of products in an order, with prices shown including or excluding VAT based on account settings.
Product quantity	Set product quantity	Specify the quantity of each product added to the order.
Product configuration	Select product variations	Select and configure product variations when adding products to an order.
Product selection	Exclude inactive products	Inactive products do not appear in the product selection list and cannot be added to orders.
Product selection	Add products to order	Select products to add to an order, including out-of-stock products with current stock quantity displayed.
Shipping details	Enter separate shipping address	Configure shipping details separately from billing details for an order.
Customer marketing preferences	Update marketing consent	Change the customer's marketing consent setting during order creation, updating their customer record.
Customer selection	Create new customer	Create a new customer record when entering details for a customer not already in the account.
Customer selection	Select existing customer	Search and select an existing customer by surname, postcode, or email address when creating an order.
Creating orders	Create orders manually	Create orders manually within your ShopWired account for telephone or in-person sales.
Bulk order status update app	Configure CSV columns	Use CSV columns for Order ID, Order Status, optional Tracking URL, and Send Email (yes/no) to control updates.
Bulk order status update app	Trigger order status emails in bulk	Send order status notification emails to customers for multiple orders based on CSV settings.
Bulk order status update app	Add tracking URLs in bulk	Add or update tracking URLs for multiple orders via the CSV file.
Bulk order status update app	Update order status in bulk	Change the order status for multiple orders simultaneously using the CSV upload.
Bulk order status update app	Bulk update orders via CSV	Update up to 1,000 orders at a time by uploading a CSV file to the bulk order status update app.
Duplicating orders	Duplicate an order	Create a copy of an existing order, edit details before creation, and assign a new order reference and date.
Order comments	Delete admin comments	Delete admin comments added to an order; comments cannot be edited once added.
Order comments	Add admin comments	Add internal admin comments to an order that are not visible to customers or on the website.
Order state	Change order state	Change an order's state between active and archived in the order management section.
Tracking URL	Display tracking URL on website and PDFs	Add tracking URL to order PDFs and customer account pages by custom coding with the tracking_url variable.
Tracking URL	Customise tracking URL display	Modify order status email code to dynamically generate full tracking URLs from simpler inputs.
Tracking URL	Save and update tracking URL	Save the tracking URL with the order and update it to resend tracking information to customers.
Tracking URL	Add tracking URL	Enter a shipping reference, tracking number, or full URL to include in the shipped order status email.
Order status	Customise order status emails	Customise the contents of order status emails before sending them to customers.
Order status	Change order status	Change the status of an order and optionally send a notification email to the customer.
Voiding transactions	Manage stock and status after void	Return stock to inventory and change order status to cancelled after voiding a transaction.
Voiding transactions	Void transaction	Void a payment transaction to prevent capture of funds; this action is irreversible.
Capturing transactions	Single capture only	Capture funds can only be performed once per transaction; remaining amount is released.
Capturing transactions	Capture authorised funds	Enter an amount and capture funds for transactions authorised but not yet captured.
Products ordered	View VAT calculation method	View whether VAT was calculated per unit or on total quantity via tooltip on VAT line total.
Products ordered	Toggle VAT display	Toggle price display to include or exclude VAT/tax; preference is saved for all orders viewed.
Products ordered	Edit products and delivery rate	Edit products and delivery rate for an order using the menu option.
Products ordered	View VAT and discounts	Display VAT/tax amounts and any voucher codes, offers, or discounts applied to the order.
Products ordered	View delivery rate chosen	Display the delivery rate selected by the customer for the order.
Products ordered	View specific delivery prices	Display any specific delivery prices applied to products in the order.
Products ordered	View products ordered	Display all products included in the order with selected options and customisation fields.
Payment details	View order grand total	Display the total amount originally paid by the customer.
Payment details	View transaction status	View the status of the payment transaction including settlement pending, settled, or voided.
Payment details	View transaction ID	Display the payment gateway's transaction ID if available.
Payment details	View payment method	Display the payment gateway used by the customer for the order.
Download orders	Download order as CSV	Download order information in CSV format, distinct from the orders CSV export.
Printing orders	Select invoice PDF theme	Choose from multiple configured order invoice PDF themes before generating the PDF.
Printing orders	Print order as PDF	Generate a PDF of the order using the configured order invoice PDF theme(s).
Additional information	Edit customer comments	Edit any comments entered by the customer when placing the order.
Additional information	Edit delivery date	Edit the customer's requested delivery date for an order.
Customer information	View customer's previous orders	View all previous orders placed by the customer from the order page.
Customer information	Access customer record	Open the customer record linked to the billing email address from the order page.
Customer information	Edit customer information	Edit customer information on an order without affecting other order details or triggering emails.
Customer information	View customer details	View customer information associated with an order in the Customer details section.
Managing orders	Delete orders	Delete an order permanently; deleted orders cannot be recovered.
Managing orders	Link to ShopWired Payments transaction	View full transaction information from the order page when using ShopWired Payments.
Managing orders	View individual order details	Open an individual order page by selecting an order from the orders list.
Managing orders	Bulk select orders	Select multiple orders using checkboxes to process them in bulk.
Managing orders	Search and filter orders	Use available search and filter options to find relevant orders.
Managing orders	View orders list	View all orders received on your ShopWired website and orders created manually in your account on the Orders page.
File uploads management	Include all uploaded files in order zip	Include all uploaded files from multiple products in the same order within a single zip file for download.
File uploads management	Access uploaded files on orders	Download uploaded files from the order view page, organised in folders by product ShopWired ID within a single zip file.
Pending orders	Pending order status definition	Recognise pending orders as those where payment completion status is unknown and visitors may see a pending or polling message after payment attempt.
Pending orders	Mark pending orders as paid	Mark pending orders as paid to transition them to complete status and send order confirmation emails.
Pending orders	View pending orders	View pending orders by applying the pending orders filter in the Orders section of your ShopWired account.
Order failed email	Order failed email triggers	Trigger the order failed email when visitors cancel payment or are declined on direct or hosted integration payment gateways and are returned to the checkout/failed page.
Order failed email	Customise order failed email	Customise the content and appearance of the order failed email via the Settings > Emails section.
Order failed email	Send order failed email	Automatically send an order failed email to visitors who fail to complete payment under specified conditions.
Payment gateway errors	Troubleshoot payment gateway errors	Follow steps to verify payment receipt, check gateway setup, obtain transaction logs, and contact support for unresolved payment gateway issues.
Payment gateway errors	Detect payment gateway communication failures	Identify orders where payment was made but ShopWired did not receive confirmation due to gateway communication errors or misconfiguration.
Incomplete orders	Automatic exclusion from complete orders	Incomplete orders are not marked as paid, do not appear as complete, and do not trigger order confirmation emails.
Incomplete orders	Edit customer details on incomplete orders	Edit customer details on incomplete orders, while product details remain uneditable.
Incomplete orders	Mark incomplete orders as paid	Mark an incomplete order as paid to transition it to complete status, send the order confirmation email to the customer, and receive a copy of the email.
Incomplete orders	View incomplete orders	View incomplete orders by applying the incomplete orders filter in the Orders section of your ShopWired account.
eBay courier details	Enter courier name and tracking number	Enter the courier name and tracking number used for dispatching eBay orders to update eBay with shipping details.
eBay order status update	Automatic eBay order status update	Automatically inform eBay when an order status changes to dispatched or the default shipped order status configured in ShopWired.
eBay order payment method	Label eBay orders payment method	Display the payment method as "eBay" for orders imported from eBay.
eBay order display	Display eBay orders in ShopWired orders list	Show orders imported from eBay alongside other standard orders on the ShopWired Orders page.
Predefined filters	Rename predefined filters	Change the names of predefined filters on the order settings page.
Additional predefined filters	Filter awaiting payment orders	View completed orders marked as not paid, including offline payment and manually created orders.
Additional predefined filters	Filter pre-order state orders	View orders currently in a pre-order state.
Additional predefined filters	Filter shipped orders	View orders with an order status corresponding to the default shipped status.
Predefined filters	Filter subscription orders	View all orders resulting from subscriptions, including initial and renewal orders.
Predefined filters	Filter pending orders	View orders where the payment status is uncertain.
Predefined filters	Filter unpaid orders	View orders where payment was not made or there was a payment error (incomplete orders).
Predefined filters	Filter all complete orders	View all orders that have been successfully completed, including paid, offline payment, created via ShopWired account or API.
Saved filters	Access saved filters	Access previously saved filters through the more filters option.
Saved filters	Save current search and filter parameters	Save the current search and filter settings with a custom title for later reuse.
Custom field filters	Filter by order custom fields	Filter orders based on selected values in order custom fields.
Pre-order filters	Filter by pre-order ships on date range	Filter orders containing pre-order products with a ships on date within a specified range (requires pre-orders app).
Delivery date filters	Filter orders without delivery date	Filter orders that do not have a requested delivery date specified.
Delivery date filters	Filter by delivery date within number of days	Filter orders with a requested delivery date within a specified number of days from today.
Delivery date filters	Filter by delivery date range	Filter orders with a requested delivery date within a specified from and to date range.
Additional filters	Filter by order status	Filter orders by the current order status.
Additional filters	Filter by payment method	Filter orders by the payment method used.
Additional filters	Filter by delivery country	Filter orders by the delivery country of the order.
Additional filters	Filter by billing country	Filter orders by the billing country of the customer.
Order filters	Filter by order state (active or archived)	Select to view only active or archived orders using the order state option.
Order filters	Filter by order date range	Filter orders by specifying a from and to order date range.
Order filters	Filter by product details	Filter orders by product name, SKU code, or brand.
Order search	Search by ShopWired order ID	Search orders by exact match of the ShopWired order ID.
Order search	Search by order reference and customer details	Search orders by order reference, customer surname, company name, email address, or postcode.
Bulk order processing	Delete orders in bulk	Delete multiple selected orders in a single action.
Bulk order processing	Send order status email when changing status	Optionally send an order status email to customers when changing order status in bulk.
Bulk order processing	Enter tracking URL when changing status	Optionally enter a tracking URL for each order when changing order status in bulk.
Bulk order processing	Change order status in bulk	Change the order status for multiple selected orders at once.
Bulk order processing	Send order status email when marking shipped	Optionally send an order status email to customers when marking orders as shipped in bulk.
Bulk order processing	Enter tracking URL when marking shipped	Optionally enter a tracking URL for each order when marking orders as shipped in bulk.
Bulk order processing	Mark orders as shipped in bulk	Mark selected orders as shipped by applying the shipped default order status.
Bulk order processing	Select PDF theme for bulk invoice printing	Choose from multiple defined PDF themes before generating bulk invoice PDFs.
Bulk order processing	Print/download order invoice PDFs in bulk	Generate and download merged invoice PDFs for up to 50 selected orders at once.
Bulk order processing	Select multiple orders for bulk actions	Select multiple orders on the orders page to perform bulk actions.
API & webhooks	Provide customs & duties data in order API and webhooks	Include a `customsAndDuties` object with amount, upliftAmount, and totalAmount properties in order API responses and webhooks.
Order exports	Include customs & duties data in CSV exports and feeds	Add columns for customs & duties amount, uplift, DDP/PDDP status, and ShopWired LCC fee in order CSV exports and feeds.
Customs & duties display	Show customs & duties section on order page	Display customs & duties amount and calculation details on the order page in the admin area.

Pre-orders

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
App installation	Install pre-order app	Install the pre-order products app to enable pre-order functionality on your ShopWired account.
Product configuration	Mark product as pre-order	Mark a product as a pre-order by selecting the pre-order option in the Stock & delivery section.
Product configuration	Configure release date/time	Set a release date and time to hide the pre-order product from category, brand, and search pages until the specified date/time has passed.
Product configuration	Configure ships-on date	Set a ships-on date for a pre-order product to indicate when it is expected to be shipped.
Product visibility	Hide unreleased pre-order products	Automatically hide pre-order products from category, brand, and search pages until their release date/time.
Product visibility	Disable add to basket before release	Disable the add to basket button on pre-order product pages until the release date/time has passed.
Product display	Show ships-on date on product page	Display the configured ships-on date on the product page with accompanying text for customers.
Theme integration	product.is_pre_order variable	Use the variable to determine if a product is a pre-order product in themes.
Theme integration	product.shipping_date variable	Access the pre-order product’s ships-on date in UTC for display or logic in themes.
Theme integration	product.release_date variable	Access the pre-order product’s release date and time in UTC for display or logic in themes.
Theme integration	product.is_released variable	Use the variable to check if the current time is after the product's release date/time.
Checkout	Display delivery date at checkout	Show customers the latest ships-on date for pre-order products in their order at checkout.
Checkout	Require customer account for pre-orders	Disable guest checkout for orders containing pre-order products, requiring customers to log in or create an account.
Order creation	Orders with pre-order products behave as standard orders	Orders created manually with pre-order products behave as standard orders unless manually assigned pre-order status.
Order creation	Pre-orders cannot be created manually	Prevent creating pre-orders directly through the ShopWired account interface.
Order management	Separate pre-order orders	Orders containing at least one pre-order product are marked as pre-orders and managed separately from standard orders.
Order management	Identify pre-orders in orders list	Display a 'P' indicator next to the order total for orders containing pre-order products.
Order management	Display ships-on date column	Enable a ships-on date column in the orders table showing the latest ships-on date for each pre-order.
Order management	Permanently show ships-on date column	Configure the orders table to permanently display the ships-on date column.
Order management	Filter orders by pre-order status	Use order filters to display only pre-orders in the orders list.
Order management	Filter pre-orders by ships-on date	Filter pre-orders with ships-on dates within a specified period.
Order view	Pre-order actions section	Display a dedicated pre-order actions section when viewing a pre-order.
Order status	Assign default pre-order status	Automatically assign a default pre-order status to orders containing at least one pre-order product.
Order status	Map order statuses to default pre-order status	Map one of your order statuses to the default pre-order status to manage workflows.
Payment processing	Immediate charging for pre-orders with ShopWired Payments	Charge customers' cards immediately when placing a pre-order using ShopWired Payments.
Payment processing	Defer charging for pre-orders with ShopWired Payments	Defer charging customers' cards until the order is ready for dispatch when using ShopWired Payments.
Payment processing	Immediate charging for pre-orders with Stripe	Charge customers' cards immediately when placing a pre-order using Stripe.
Payment processing	Defer charging for pre-orders with Stripe	Defer charging customers' cards until the order is ready for dispatch when using Stripe.
Payment processing	Immediate charging for pre-orders with other gateways	Pre-orders paid via other payment gateways are charged immediately when the order is created.
Payment restrictions	Charge amount fixed to original order value	Prevent charging a customer's card for more or less than the original pre-order amount.
Payment restrictions	Single charge per pre-order	Allow only one charge attempt against a customer's card for a pre-order.
Payment failures	Retry charging card after failure	Allow retrying to charge the customer's card if the initial charge attempt fails.
Payment failures	Preserve pre-order status on failed charge	Maintain pre-order and order status if charging the customer's card fails.
Failed charges	Update order status on failed charge	Change the order status and send an order status email if a card charge fails, when configured.
Failed charges	Retain pre-order status on failed charge	Maintain pre-order status if the customer's card charge fails.
Payment	Delay payment capture	Choose to delay charging customers' cards until the order is dispatched when using ShopWired Payments or Stripe.
Order processing	Mark pre-order as ready for dispatch and charge card	For deferred payments, charge the customer's card and mark the order as ready for dispatch.
Order processing	Mark pre-order as ready for dispatch without charging card	For deferred payments, mark the order as ready for dispatch without charging the card.
Order processing	Mark pre-order as ready for dispatch (charged immediately)	For pre-orders charged immediately, mark the order as ready for dispatch, changing its status and removing the pre-order indicator.
Order editing	Editing customer details preserves pre-order status	Editing customer details on a pre-order does not affect its pre-order status.
Order editing	Editing products removes pre-order status	Editing products in a pre-order creates a new order without pre-order status that cannot process card charges.
Product release	Release pre-order products	Initiate release of a pre-order product to process applicable orders and attempt to charge customers.
Product release	Release order filtering	Identify orders for release processing based on pre-order and order statuses, product inclusion, and order dates relative to last release.
Product release	Automatic charging on release	Automatically attempt to charge customers' stored cards when the released product is the only pre-order product in an order.
Product release	Deferred charging for multiple pre-order products	Delay charging until all pre-order products in an order are released, marking released products accordingly.
Product release	Cancel a product release	Cancel an initiated product release before completion from the Previous releases section.
Product release	View product release information	View the product's current ships-on date, number of orders since last release, and last release date/time.
Product release	Search products for release	Search pre-order products by name or SKU code to prepare for release.
Product release status	Release status indicators	Track release status as Pending, In progress, Completed, Expired, or Cancelled.
Product release status	View release history and status	Display previous product releases with product name, creation date/time, status, and number of processed orders.
Product release status	Retry expired releases	Retry processing product releases that expired after not completing within one hour.
Product release limits	Release processing time limit	Product releases must complete within one hour or they are marked as expired.
Product release limits	Release processing capacity	The app can process approximately 1,500 orders per hour during product release.
App settings	Send order status emails on charge outcomes	Enable sending order status emails to customers upon successful or failed card charges during pre-order release.
App settings	Configure order status for successful charges	Select the order status to assign to pre-orders when the card is charged successfully during product release.
App settings	Configure order status for failed charges	Select the order status to assign to pre-orders when the card charge is declined during product release.
Shipping integrations	Export pre-orders to Click & Drop based on status	Export pre-orders to Click & Drop only when their order status changes to one that triggers export.
Shipping integrations	Export pre-orders to ShipStation with on hold status	Export pre-orders to ShipStation with an on hold status by mapping ShopWired pre-order status accordingly.
Shipping integrations	Update ShipStation status on pre-order transition	Update ShipStation order status to awaiting shipment when pre-orders transition to paid standard orders.

Quotes

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Quote creation	Create quotes	Create quotes by entering customer and product details similarly to creating an order.
Quote creation	Quote status selection	Set the quote status to draft or ready to send when creating a quote.
Quote creation	Restrict out-of-stock products	Prevent adding out-of-stock products to quotes unless the products are eligible for back order.
Quote creation	Disable voucher codes and gift cards	Voucher codes and gift cards cannot be applied to quotes.
Quote creation	Disable bespoke delivery rates	Bespoke delivery rates cannot be created on quotes.
Sending and access	Send quotes by email	Email quotes to customers with a link to complete payment on the website.
Sending and access	Display quotes in customer accounts	Show sent quotes in registered customers’ account areas on the website (draft quotes are excluded).
Quote management	Edit draft quotes	Make unlimited changes to draft quotes before sending them to customers.
Quote management	Edit customer details	Edit customer details on quotes before they are sent; product and delivery details cannot be edited after sending.
Quote management	Copy quotes	Duplicate an existing quote to create a new quote for the same or a different customer.
Quote management	Resend quote emails	Resend the quote email to customers from the quote management interface.
Quote management	Archive quotes	Change quote status between active and inactive by archiving or unarchiving quotes.
Quote management	Filter quotes by status	Filter the quotes list to show only active or archived quotes.
Quote management	Mark quotes as paid	Manually mark quotes as paid if payment is received outside the website or if a payment gateway error occurs.
Payment processing	Convert quote to order on payment	Automatically convert a paid quote into an order when the customer completes payment on the website.
Payment processing	Migrate data to order on payment	Migrate custom field data and admin comments from the quote to the order when payment is completed.
Emails	Quote created email	Automatically send a quote created email when a quote is sent to a customer.
Emails	Quote paid email	Automatically send a quote paid email when a quote is paid by the customer or marked as paid.
Emails	Customise quote emails	Customise the content and appearance of quote created and quote paid emails in email settings.
Invoice PDFs	Generate invoice PDFs for quotes	Generate, view, and download invoice PDFs for quotes.
Invoice PDFs	Separate invoice PDF theme for quotes	Create and designate a separate invoice PDF theme specifically for quotes.
Custom fields	Add custom fields to quotes	Add custom field data to quotes in the same way as for orders.
Custom fields	Use custom fields in emails and PDFs	Include quote custom field data in quote emails and invoice PDFs.

Subscriptions

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Theme integration	Preconfigured subscription support in themes	Subscription app is preconfigured on ShopWired Version 3, 4, and 5 themes.
Theme integration	Enhanced subscriptions support	Enhanced subscription features available on later Version 5 theme versions.
Subscription product setup	Mark product as subscription	Mark an existing product as a subscription product in the product pricing section.
Subscription product setup	Enable one-off purchase option	Configure a subscription product to also be available as a one-off purchase.
Subscription intervals	Configure subscription intervals	Select and configure one or more subscription billing intervals such as daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly.
Subscription intervals	Add multiple intervals	Add multiple subscription intervals to a single subscription product for visitor selection.
Subscription intervals	Set interval discount	Apply a percentage discount off the normal product price for each subscription interval.
Subscription intervals	Set total intervals	Define a fixed number of subscription intervals after which the subscription automatically cancels, or leave indefinite for ongoing subscriptions.
Pricing	Apply subscription discount to variations	Subscription interval discounts apply to the standard price of product variations.
Pricing	Apply subscription discount to sale prices	Subscription discounts are applied to sale prices configured for products or variations.
Pricing	Exclude subscription discount on extras and choices	Subscription discounts do not apply to product extras or product choices.
Checkout restrictions	Disable guest checkout for subscriptions	Disable guest checkout when the basket contains subscription products.
Checkout restrictions	Limit payment methods for subscriptions	Allow only ShopWired Payments, Stripe, and Offline Payment Method for subscription product purchases.
Checkout restrictions	Disable PayPal Express Checkout for subscriptions	Remove PayPal Express Checkout option when purchasing subscription products.
Order restrictions	Restrict basket to one subscription interval	Prevent mixing subscriptions with different subscription intervals in the same basket.
Order restrictions	Restrict basket to one purchase type	Prevent mixing one-off and subscription products in the same basket.
Website display	Display subscription options	Show subscription and one-off purchase options to visitors when both are available for a product.
Website display	Display multiple subscription intervals	Allow visitors to select from multiple subscription intervals configured for a product.
Website display	Show subscription discounts as sale prices	Display subscription discounts as custom sale prices on product and variation prices.
Subscription settings	Set monthly subscriptions billing day	Configure a preferred day of the month to process all monthly subscription payments on the same day.
Subscription settings	Prevent stock deduction for free trial subscription orders	Enable setting to avoid reducing stock levels for items in free trial subscription initial orders.
Subscription settings	Enable automatic refund for free trial subscription orders	Automatically add a refund equal to the order total for free trial subscription initial orders to keep reports accurate.
Skip logic days	Apply free trial period for subscriptions created before billing day	Subscriptions created before the next billing day start with a free trial lasting until the billing day.
Creating subscription orders	Create subscription orders manually	Create subscription orders through the ShopWired account by adding customer details and products with matching billing intervals.
Creating subscription orders	Assign default unpaid order status to manual subscription renewals	Subscription orders created through ShopWired account renewals are assigned the default unpaid order status.
Creating subscription orders	Send order confirmation email on manual subscription order	An order confirmation email is sent to the customer when a subscription order is created manually.
Subscription orders	Create subscription on order with subscription products	When an order contains subscription products, a subscription is created and linked to the order.
Subscription orders	Send order confirmation email on subscription order	Customers receive an order confirmation email when an order containing subscription products is created.
Subscription orders	View and manage subscriptions in customer account	Customers can view and manage their subscriptions within their account on the website.
Subscription orders	View and manage subscriptions in ShopWired account	Subscriptions created from orders can be viewed and managed within the ShopWired account.
Managing subscriptions	Edit customer details on subscription	Edit billing and shipping names, addresses, email, and telephone number on a subscription.
Managing subscriptions	Add internal notes to subscriptions	Add internal notes or comments to subscriptions that are not visible to customers.
Managing subscriptions	Archive subscriptions	Mark subscriptions as inactive by selecting the archived checkbox.
Managing subscriptions	Display subscription status and state	View subscription status (subscribed or cancelled) and state (active or archived).
Managing subscriptions	Display subscription amount and total amount	View the grand total of the subscription and the total amount of all orders from the subscription.
Managing subscriptions	Filter subscriptions by state	Filter subscriptions by state, either active or archived, for internal organisation.
Managing subscriptions	Filter subscriptions by subscription status	Filter subscriptions by status, either subscribed or cancelled.
Managing subscriptions	Filter subscriptions by product SKU or name	Filter subscriptions by product SKU code or product name.
Managing subscriptions	Search subscriptions by ID, customer surname, email or postcode	Use search to find subscriptions by subscription ID, customer surname, email address, or postcode.
Cancelling subscriptions	Allow customers to cancel subscriptions via website	Customers can cancel their subscriptions by logging into their account and selecting cancel on the subscription.
Cancelling subscriptions	Cancel subscriptions on behalf of customers	Cancel subscriptions from the ShopWired account, changing status to cancelled and stopping further recurring payments.
Cancelling subscriptions	Prevent reactivation of cancelled subscriptions	Cancelled subscriptions cannot be reactivated once cancelled.
Cancelling subscriptions	No notification on customer-initiated cancellations	ShopWired account users are not notified when customers cancel subscriptions themselves.
Renewals	Create new order on successful subscription renewal	A new order is created replicating subscription products each time a subscription renews and payment is successful.
Renewals	Process renewals for Stripe and ShopWired Payments subscriptions	Renewals for Stripe and ShopWired Payments subscriptions are processed at the same time as the original order creation.
Renewals	Process renewals for offline payment subscriptions	Renewals for offline payment subscriptions are processed daily between 4:00am and 5:00am GMT.
Renewals	Process renewals for free trial subscriptions	Renewals for subscriptions created during a free trial period are processed at 5:00am GMT.
Renewals	Send order confirmation email on each subscription renewal	Enable sending of order confirmation emails to customer and admin each time a subscription renews via order settings.
Renewals	Display subscription label on payment method in orders	Orders created from subscriptions show the word "subscription" after the payment method name.
Failed billing	Send subscription payment failed email to admin	An email notification is sent to the admin when a subscription payment fails; customers do not receive this email.
Failed billing	Customise subscription payment failed email	The subscription payment failed email content can be customised in the ShopWired email settings.
Failed billing	Automatic retry of failed payments with ShopWired Payments	ShopWired Payments automatically retries failed card payments up to 8 times over 2 weeks using Stripe smart retries.
Failed billing	Automatic retry of failed payments with Stripe	Stripe retries failed payments according to the retry settings configured in the Stripe account.
Failed billing	Prevent order creation on failed subscription payment	No new order is created if a subscription payment fails due to card decline.

Invoices

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
PDF themes	Choose from three PDF theme templates	Select from Formal, Standard or Basic PDF theme templates to install and customise.
PDF themes	Create multiple PDF themes	Create and install multiple PDF themes for invoices and quotes.
PDF themes	Designate live PDF theme	Set one PDF theme as the default for orders and quotes.
PDF themes	Enable additional PDF themes	Make additional PDF themes available for selection on orders and quotes.
PDF themes	Preview PDF theme changes	Preview how the PDF will look before saving changes.
PDF themes	Edit PDF theme sections	Choose and edit specific sections of the PDF theme in the editor.
PDF themes	Customise layout and styling	Adjust layout, colours and font size to personalise invoice PDFs.
PDF themes	Upload invoice logo	Upload a PNG or JPG logo to display on invoice PDFs.
PDF themes	Adjust footer height	Change the footer height to accommodate additional information.
PDF template settings	Customise PDF margins	Enter custom margin sizes (top, bottom, left and right) in millimetres.
PDF template settings	Customise PDF size	Enter custom width and height in millimetres for the PDF.
Product display	Change product sort order on PDFs	Adjust the order in which items appear in the product table on PDFs.
Product display	Display product images on PDFs	Include product images on invoice and quote PDFs.
Product display	Show bundle constituents on PDFs	Display constituent products of product bundles on PDFs.
Pricing and tax	Configure price display	Choose to show product and shipping prices including or excluding VAT.
Order and company information	Display order information on PDFs	Show delivery date, payment method, transaction ID, SKU codes, HS codes, VAT percentages and VAT totals.
Order and company information	Add company information to PDFs	Include company details such as phone number, email address, company number, VAT number and IOSS number.
Quotes	Differentiate quotes and orders in PDFs	Configure PDFs to show different content for quotes versus orders.
PDF generation	Generate PDF for individual orders or quotes	Generate a PDF from within the order or quote view using a selected theme.
PDF generation	Generate PDFs for multiple orders	Generate up to 50 PDF invoices at once using a chosen theme.
Email integration	Include PDF link in emails	Add links to invoice or quote PDFs in order confirmation and quote emails.
Email integration	Specify PDF theme in email links	Choose which PDF theme a PDF link uses in emails.
Customer access	Customer download of PDFs	Allow customers to download invoice or quote PDFs from their account area.

Order status

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Basic functionality	Assign order status on creation	Orders are assigned a status automatically when they are created.
Basic functionality	Change order status	Change the status of an order as it progresses through fulfilment stages such as preparing for shipment, shipped, delivered, and complete.
Default statuses	Use default order statuses	ShopWired provides predefined default order statuses that cannot be customised but must be mapped to custom statuses.
Default statuses	Default order status categories	Includes Paid Orders, Unpaid Orders, Cancelled Orders, Shipped Orders, Completed Orders, Pre-orders, and Unpaid (incomplete orders).
Default statuses	Map custom statuses to default statuses	Match each custom order status to one of ShopWired's default order statuses to maintain system visibility of order states.
Status management	Create new order statuses	Add new custom order statuses to the system for use in order management.
Status management	Customise order status names	Edit the name of each order status to match your business terminology.
Status management	Customise order status colours	Set a colour for each order status to visually identify orders by status in the orders table.
Status management	Delete order statuses	Delete order statuses that are not assigned to any orders.
Email notifications	Send order status emails	Optionally send an email to the customer when changing an order’s status, including relevant information like tracking details.
Email notifications	Edit order status email content	Customise the content of the email sent to customers for each order status, including plain text and HTML versions.
Email notifications	Enable pre-send email customisation	Allow editing of an order status email’s content before it is sent.
Email notifications	Enable or disable HTML emails	Choose to send order status emails as HTML or plain text.
Email notifications	Preview order status emails	Preview customised order status emails using sample content before sending to customers.
Email notifications	Configure separate sender, CC, and BCC addresses	Set different sender, CC, and BCC email addresses for each order status email, with support for multiple addresses separated by commas.
Email notifications	Send emails from configured address	Order status emails are sent from the email address configured in the ShopWired email addresses settings.
Email notifications	Use fallback email settings	The Order Status Changed email settings act as a fallback if specific order status email settings are not configured.
Integrations	Use order statuses with third-party apps	Order statuses are used by apps like Click & Drop and ShipStation to determine when orders should be exported.

Abandoned baskets

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Abandoned basket eligibility	Determine abandoned basket eligibility	Automatically determine if an incomplete order qualifies as an abandoned basket based on factors such as subsequent completed orders, product availability, and reward points usage.
Abandoned basket URLs	Generate unique abandoned basket URL	Generate a unique recovery URL for each abandoned basket that visitors can use to return to their basket and complete checkout.
Abandoned basket URLs	View abandoned basket URL	View and copy the recovery URL for an incomplete order from your ShopWired account.
Abandoned basket emails	Email recipient address	Send abandoned basket emails to the billing email address entered during checkout.
Abandoned basket emails	Send emails to visitors without marketing consent	Choose whether abandoned basket emails are sent to visitors who have not granted marketing consent.
Abandoned basket emails	Send initial abandoned basket email	Send an initial abandoned basket email 1, 2, or 3 hours after the basket is abandoned.
Abandoned basket emails	Send follow-up abandoned basket email	Send a follow-up abandoned basket email 6, 24, or 48 hours after the basket is abandoned.
Email content	Customise abandoned basket email content	Configure the content of both initial and follow-up abandoned basket emails via the email settings page.
Voucher codes	Prevent reapplication of voucher codes on recovered baskets	Prevent voucher codes, including automatic discounts, from being reapplied when visitors recover abandoned baskets, except shipping discount voucher codes which can be reapplied to shipping costs.
Voucher codes	Reflect voucher code discounts in abandoned basket emails	Display discounted prices in abandoned basket emails when a voucher code was applied before abandonment.

Warehouse notes

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Product configuration	Warehouse notes per product	Enter internal notes for each product in the Stock & delivery management section; these notes are not visible on the website or to customers.
Reports and exports	Included in bulk order exports and documents	Warehouse notes appear in bulk order exports, order PDFs, stock reports, picking lists, and order CSV feeds.
Reports and exports	Included in order XML feeds	Warehouse notes can be included in order XML feeds.
Reports and exports	Excluded from individual order CSV export	Warehouse notes are not included when exporting a CSV for a single order.

CSV order exporter

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
CSV file generation	Export on demand	Generate a CSV file on demand for multiple orders over a specified date or order reference range.
CSV file generation	Generate daily CSV file	Generate a single CSV file containing all orders from the previous day.
CSV file generation	Generate one CSV per order	Generate a separate CSV file for each individual order.
CSV file generation	Export cancelled orders by date	Include cancelled orders when exporting by date range.
CSV file generation	Exclude cancelled orders by reference	Exclude cancelled orders when exporting by order reference range.
CSV file delivery	FTP/SFTP protocol selection	Choose between FTP or SFTP protocol for CSV file upload.
CSV file delivery	FTP/SFTP connection settings	Configure host, port, username, password, and path for FTP/SFTP upload.
CSV file delivery	Test FTP/SFTP connection	Test the FTP/SFTP connection settings to verify successful server connection.
CSV file delivery	Upload daily CSV file	Upload a single CSV file daily at 8.00am UTC via FTP/SFTP.
CSV file delivery	Upload separate file per order	Upload a separate CSV file for each order via FTP/SFTP.
CSV file delivery	Configure email recipient	Set the email address to receive exported CSV files.
CSV file delivery	Email daily CSV file	Send a single CSV file by email daily at 8.00am UTC.
CSV file delivery	Email separate file per order	Send a separate CSV file by email for each order.
CSV file configuration	Select columns to include	Choose which columns to include or exclude in the exported CSV file.
CSV file configuration	Change column order	Rearrange the order in which columns appear in the CSV export.
CSV file configuration	Customise CSV column headings	Set custom headings for each column in the exported CSV file.
CSV file configuration	Add blank columns	Add empty columns to the CSV export.
CSV file configuration	Do not send/upload if empty	Skip sending or uploading CSV files if the generated file is completely empty.
CSV file configuration	Advanced configuration mode	Enable advanced mode to fully customise CSV output using Liquid templating.
CSV row formatting	Repeat order information setting	Enable or disable repetition of general order information on each product row in the CSV.
Export history	Export history retention	Access previous export files in the export history section.
Column definitions	Order ID	Export the unique ShopWired order ID.
Column definitions	Order reference	Export the ShopWired order reference number.
Column definitions	Order subtotal	Export the subtotal of products in the order.
Column definitions	Order discount total	Export the total discounts applied to the order.
Column definitions	Order total	Export the total payable for the order including tax/VAT.
Column definitions	Order comments	Export any comments entered for the order.
Column definitions	Order archived status	Export whether the order has been archived (true/false).
Column definitions	Order created date	Export the date the order was created.

Order custom fields

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Custom field creation	Create custom fields for orders and quotes	Create custom fields that can be used to add data to orders and quotes for internal use or display.
Data entry	Add or edit custom field data on orders and quotes	Enter or amend custom field data on orders and quotes within your ShopWired account.
Data persistence	Carry custom field data from quotes to orders	Custom field data entered on a quote is transferred to the corresponding order when the quote is marked as paid.
Order object integration	Access custom fields on the order object	Custom fields on the order object are available to emails, PDFs, the order XML feed, and order/quote pages on the website.
Checkout display	Display custom fields on checkout for visitor input	Show selected custom fields at checkout so visitors can enter data.
Checkout restrictions	Limitations on checkout field types	Product list, value list, and date & time picker custom fields are not displayed at checkout.
Website display	Use custom fields on order and quote pages on the website	Display custom field data on order and quote pages on the front-end website.
Email and PDF customisation	Use custom fields to customise invoice PDFs and emails	Include custom field data in invoice PDFs, quote emails, and order status emails.
XML feed	Include custom field data in order XML feed	Add custom field data about orders to the order XML feed for external integrations.
Export	Include custom field data in order CSV export	Export custom field data attached to orders within the order CSV export file.
Searching	Search orders and quotes by text custom field data	Search orders and quotes using text-based custom field data.
Filtering	Filter orders by custom field values	Filter the orders list using values from order custom fields.
Filtering	Save custom field filters for reuse	Save configured filters based on custom field values for later use in order filtering.

Order settings

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Orders table filters	Use predefined order filters	Use built‑in filters such as complete orders, shipped orders, pre‑orders, awaiting payment, incomplete, and pending.
Orders table filters	Rename order filters	Edit the names of predefined and custom order filters used on the orders page.
Orders table filters	Reorder order filters	Change the order in which predefined and custom order filters appear on the orders page.
Orders table filters	Remove custom order filters	Delete custom order filters from the list of available filters on the orders page.
Orders table columns	Display delivery date column	Show the customer’s selected delivery date as a column on the orders page.
Orders table columns	Display ships on date column	Show the ‘ships on’ date for pre‑order products as a column on the orders page, using the latest date if multiple pre‑order items exist.
Stock management	Automatically return stock for cancelled orders	Automatically return stock for eligible items when an order is moved to a cancelled status or when a ShopWired Payments transaction is voided.
Order emails	Enable customisation of order status emails	Allow editing of order status email contents before sending them to customers.
Order emails	Send order confirmation email on subscription renewal	Choose whether an order confirmation email is sent each time a subscription renews.
Order references	Set next order reference	Set the reference number for the next complete order (must be equal to or higher than the current setting).

Customers

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Website account pages	Theme customisation for customer pages	Customise the appearance of customer account pages using theme settings on ShopWired Version 3, 4, and 5 themes.
Website account pages	Customer account page types	Provide pages for account registration, login, password reset, order viewing, subscription management, address management, reward points, and favourites.
Website account pages	Customer account page URLs	Access customer account pages at standard URLs such as /account/create, /account/login, /account/orders, and /account/edit.
Customer record creation	Automatic customer record creation	Customer records are created automatically when a visitor creates an account, places an order via guest checkout, an order is created in the ShopWired account, or a customer account is created in the ShopWired account.
Customer types	View customer type	Identify whether a customer is Registered (created account on website) or Not registered (record created via guest checkout or admin order).
Customer record identification	Unique email address per customer	Each customer record is identified by a unique email address; no two customer records can share the same email.
Customer record identification	Order assignment by billing email	Orders are assigned to customer records based on the order’s billing email address.
Customer record merging	Orders linked to email on account creation	Orders placed via guest checkout are linked to the customer record with the same email when the customer later creates an account.
Customer creation	Create customer account in ShopWired	Create a customer account manually by entering first name, last name, email address, and password.
Customer creation	Password reset and edit	Edit or reset a customer’s password from within the ShopWired account.
Customer creation	Customer account creation email	Automatically send the customer account creation email when a customer account is created in ShopWired.
Customer creation	Custom fields for customers	Add and manage custom fields on customer records to store additional data.
Customer creation	Internal notes	Add internal notes to customer records that are not visible to customers.
Customer creation	Marketing consent setting	Mark a customer as accepting marketing communications and add them to the newsletter subscribers list.
Customer management	Edit customer details	Edit customer details, including custom field data.
Customer management	Search customers	Search customers by name, email address, or postcode within the ShopWired account.
Customer management	Filter customers by order count	Filter customers by the number of orders they have placed.
Customer management	Download customer data	Download stored customer information for GDPR data requests or other purposes.
Customer management	Delete customers	Delete customer records without affecting any orders they have placed.
Order history	View customer order history	View all orders assigned to a customer record in the Order history section.
Customer import/export	Export customers to CSV	Export customer data to a CSV file for backup or editing.
Customer import/export	Select export customer type	Choose to export all customers, only those who accept marketing, or only those who do not accept marketing.
Customer import/export	Import new customers	Upload a CSV file to create new customer accounts in bulk without sending notification emails.
Customer import/export	Import updated customer data	Upload a CSV file to update existing customer records.
Customer import/export	Maintain unique customer ID	Use the unique customer ID column to identify and update existing records during import.
Customer import/export	Import customer passwords	Import initial passwords for customers when creating accounts.
Customer import/export	Assign custom field data	Include custom field data for customers in CSV import/export to create or update custom fields.
Customer import/export	Include reward points balance	Import or export customers’ reward points balances when using the reward points app.
Customer import/export	Include customer source data	Import or export customer source information when using the How You Heard About Us app.
Customer import/export	Import internal customer notes	Include internal notes for customers in import/export files (not visible to customers).
Customer import/export	Use import template	Download a CSV import template with fixed column headings to prepare customer data for import.

Reward points

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Earning settings	Configure reward points on products	Set the number of reward points earned for purchasing specific products, with up to 2 decimal places.
Earning settings	Configure reward points on product variations	Set the number of reward points earned for each product variation combination, overriding the parent product setting if specified.
Earning settings	Configure reward points based on order value	Set reward points earned per £1 spent on the order grand total, with up to 2 decimal places.
Redemption settings	Set reward point to GBP conversion rate	Configure the monetary value of each reward point when redeemed for a cash discount.
Redemption settings	Set minimum redeemable reward points	Define the minimum number of reward points a visitor must have to redeem points for a discount.
Redemption settings	Set redemption increment	Establish the increment in which reward points can be redeemed, requiring redemption in multiples of this value.
Redemption settings	Allow fractional reward point redemption	Enable or disable visitors redeeming fractions of reward points.
Redemption settings	Apply reward point discounts to delivery costs	Allow reward points to be used to discount shipping costs after applying discounts to products.
Discount application order	Apply reward points redemption last	Apply reward points redemption discounts after vouchers.
Customer account and checkout display	Display reward points balance	Show customers their reward points balance and points earned on orders within their account pages.
Customer account and checkout display	Show reward points redemption option in basket	Display an option to redeem reward points on the basket page for logged-in customers with sufficient points.
Customer account and checkout display	Show reward points earned on product page	Display the number of reward points earned when a product or variation is added to the basket on the product page.
Order display and emails	Show reward points earned on order	Display the number of reward points earned in the products ordered section of the order.
Order display and emails	Show reward points redemption as discount	Display the value of reward points redeemed as a discount in the products ordered section of the order.
Order display and emails	Show reward points earned in emails	Display the number of reward points earned on an order in order confirmation emails.
Order display and emails	Show reward points redemption in emails	Include the reward points discount value in order confirmation emails.
Customer management	View and edit reward points balance	View and manually edit a customer's reward points balance within their customer record.
Import and export	Import/export reward points balance	Use the REWARD POINTS BALANCE column to view or edit customer reward points balances during import/export.
Import and export	Import/export reward points for products	Use the Reward Points Earned With Purchase column to set reward points for products during import/export.
Import and export	Import/export reward points for product variations	Use the Variant Reward Points Earned With Purchase column to set reward points for product variations during import/export.
Import and export	Include reward points discount in CSV	Include the value of reward points redeemed in the Total discounts column of order CSV files and feeds.

Referral scheme

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Referral links	Generate unique referral link	Provide a unique referral URL for each customer to share with potential new customers.
Referral links	Display referral link in customer account	Show each customer's referral link within their account (for example, on a Referred Friends page).
Tracking and cookies	Set referral cookie expiry time	Configure how many days the referral cookie remains valid on the referred visitor’s device.
Tracking and cookies	Remove referral cookie after first purchase	Option to clear the referral cookie after the first order to limit rewards to the first purchase.
Tracking and cookies	Track referrals via cookies	Track visits from referral links with cookies and attribute resulting orders to the referrer.
Tracking and cookies	Record referred customers	Automatically record customers acquired through referral links in your account.
Eligibility and application rules	Set number of orders eligible for referral discount	Choose whether the referred customer’s discount applies to their first order only or to multiple orders.
Eligibility and application rules	Restrict referral discount by visitor type	Decide whether the referred customer must register an account or can use guest checkout to receive the discount.
Eligibility and application rules	Set minimum order value for referral	Set a minimum order value the referred customer must meet for the discount to apply and for rewards to be issued.
Referred customer discount	Select discount type for referred customer	Choose a fixed amount or percentage discount for the referred customer’s order.
Referred customer discount	Set discount value for referred customer	Enter the discount value (fixed amount or percentage), supporting up to two decimal places.
Referrer rewards	Select referrer reward type	Choose a fixed reward points amount or a variable amount based on the referred order’s value.
Referrer rewards	Set referrer reward points	Define the number of reward points awarded per £1 spent when using variable rewards.

Reviews

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Product reviews	Display review form on product pages	Show a review form on product pages so visitors can submit their name, comment, and a rating from 1 to 5.
Product reviews	Display published reviews on product pages	Show published reviews on the relevant product pages in date order, most recent first.
Product reviews	Assign reviews to multiple products	Assign a single review to display on up to 50 different products.
Review moderation	Review moderation interface	View new reviews in your account for moderation before publishing.
Review moderation	Publish product reviews	Manually approve and publish selected reviews to appear on product pages.
Review moderation	Edit product reviews	Edit the reviewer’s name, rating, review content, and assigned products.
Review moderation	Delete product reviews	Permanently remove unwanted reviews from your account.
Review search and filters	Search reviews	Search reviews by product name or customer name.
Review search and filters	Filter reviews by display status	Filter to show all reviews, only published, or only unpublished.
Review import	Bulk import product reviews	Import reviews in bulk via CSV with fields such as product handle, state, rating, title, author, body, and created date/time.
Review import	Define review rating on import	Set a rating between 1 and 5 for each imported review.
Review import	Specify review creation date on import	Set the creation date and time for imported reviews using a CSV field.
Review import	Set review display state on import	Choose whether imported reviews are published or unpublished in the CSV.
Reviews.io integration	Enter Reviews.io store ID	Enter your Reviews.io store ID in app settings to link your account.
Reviews.io integration	Display service reviews	Display service reviews collected via Reviews.io on your website.
Feefo integration	Enter Feefo merchant identifier	Enter your Feefo merchant identifier in app settings to connect your account.
Feefo integration	Send new order data to Feefo	Send information about new orders to Feefo to trigger feedback invitations.
Feefo integration	Display product reviews	Display Feefo product reviews on individual product pages.
Feefo integration	Display service reviews	Display Feefo service reviews on your website.
Feefo orders feed	Provide Feefo XML orders feed	Generate an XML orders feed in Feefo’s required format for daily updates.
Feefo orders feed	Enable password protection on feed	Protect the Feefo XML feed with a password to meet data protection requirements.
Feefo orders feed	Require SKU codes for products in feed	Include only products or variations with assigned SKU codes in the Feefo feed.
Feefo orders feed	Include order and product details in feed	Include required order and product data (e.g. order reference, customer details, product details, URLs) in the feed.
Feefo orders feed	Send orders to Feefo automatically	Automatically send orders to Feefo when orders reach the completed default status.
Feefo orders feed	Send orders to Feefo manually	Manually send individual orders to Feefo from order management.

Customer sources

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Configuration	Add customer sources	Add new customer sources to present as options on account registration and checkout pages.
Configuration	Edit customer sources	Rename existing customer sources in the configured list.
Configuration	Delete customer sources	Remove customer sources from the configured list without affecting existing orders or customer accounts already associated with those sources.
Website display	Display sources on account registration	Show configured customer sources as selectable options on the customer account registration page.
Website display	Display sources on trade account registration	Show configured customer sources as selectable options on the trade account registration page.
Website display	Display sources on checkout payment method page	Show configured customer sources as selectable options on the payment method selection page during checkout.
Customer accounts	View customer source in account	View the customer source selected by a visitor when creating a customer or trade account within the customer record.
Customer accounts	Export customer source data	Include the selected customer source when exporting customer data.
Reporting	Generate how heard report	Generate a report of customer sources selected on completed orders.
Reporting	Filter how heard report by date	Filter the how heard report by selecting a start and end date for the reporting period.
Reporting	Report metrics	View customer source name, highest order value, average order value, number of completed orders, and total order value including VAT in the how heard report.
Reporting	Export how heard report	Export the how heard report data in tabular form.

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Category management	View categories list	View all existing categories in a table on the Products > Categories page.
Category management	Create categories individually	Create new categories one by one through the Products > Categories section in your ShopWired account.
Category management	Delete categories	Permanently delete categories from your ShopWired account; deletion does not affect assigned products or subcategories.
Category creation	Create categories via product import	Automatically create new categories when importing products if the assigned category does not already exist.
Category creation	Create categories via category import	Create multiple categories in bulk using the category import system.
Category structure	Define parent categories	Assign categories as parent categories that contain other subcategories.
Category structure	Define subcategories	Assign categories as subcategories by linking them to one or more parent categories.
Category structure	Assign multiple parent categories	Assign a single category to multiple parent categories.
Category structure	Categories as parent and subcategory	Configure categories to act as both parent categories and subcategories simultaneously.
Category structure	Restrict products in parent categories	Prevent parent categories that have subcategories from containing products directly.
Category structure	Assign products to multiple categories	Assign individual products to more than one category.
Trade-only categories	Assign trade-only category	Designate a category as trade-only to restrict its visibility to trade customer accounts.
Trade-only categories	Trade-only category indicator	Display a (T) next to trade-only categories in the ShopWired account category list.
Featured categories	Assign as featured category	Mark a category as a featured category to highlight it on your website.
Category information	Set category title/name	Enter a unique name for each category to identify it on your ShopWired account and website.
Category information	Add category description	Enter a description for the category that is displayed on the category page and can improve SEO.
Category images	Upload category image	Upload an image to represent the category on your website, such as on the homepage or category listings.
Category images	Edit category image	Edit uploaded category images using ShopWired’s built-in image editor.
Category images	Set image ALT tag	Specify ALT text for category images to describe the image for accessibility and when images fail to load.
Category pages	Display subcategories or products	Category pages display either subcategories or products assigned to the category, depending on configuration.
Category pages	Customise category page design	Adjust the design and layout of category pages through theme customisation settings.
Website menus	Display category menus	Display a menu on the website showing product categories based on the theme design.
Website menus	Show top-level parent categories	Display only top-level parent categories in the first layer of the category menu.
Website menus	Show subcategories in menus	Display one further level of subcategories by default when a parent category is selected in the menu.
Website menus	Show multiple category menu layers	Configure category menus to show additional layers of subcategories (e.g. third level).
Website menus	Customise category menu appearance	Customise the appearance and layout of category menus through theme settings or support.
Sort orders	Set category sort order	Assign a numeric sort order to categories to control their display order in menus, parent category pages, and content blocks.
Sort orders	Edit sort order in categories table	Change a category’s sort order directly in the categories table by selecting or entering a new number.
Sort orders	Configure sort orders via import/export	Set category sort orders in bulk using the category import/export system by entering numbers in the Sort Order column.
Sort orders	Save sort order automatically	Sort order changes are saved automatically when clicking outside the input field.
Sort orders	Sort order precedence	Categories with lower sort order numbers appear before those with higher numbers; categories without sort orders are sorted alphabetically.
Sort orders	Handle duplicate or missing sort orders	Categories sharing the same sort order or without a sort order are sorted alphabetically.
Deactivating categories	Set category active/inactive	Toggle the active setting to make a category active or inactive on the website.
Deactivating categories	Effect of inactive categories	Inactive categories are hidden from category menus and parent category pages but remain accessible via direct URL and search engines.
SEO tags	Automatic SEO tag generation	Automatically generate SEO tags for categories including title tag, page URL, and meta description based on category name and description.
SEO tags	Override SEO tags	Manually enter custom values for the category’s title tag, page URL, and meta description to override automatic tags.
Bulk import/export	Import categories from CSV	Import categories in bulk by uploading a CSV file formatted according to ShopWired's category import template.
Bulk import/export	Export categories to CSV	Export all categories in your ShopWired account to a CSV file for backup or editing.
Bulk import/export	Download category import template	Download a CSV template with required column headings to prepare category import files.
Bulk import/export	Use fixed column headings in import files	Use ShopWired's exact column headings in CSV import files to ensure correct category data processing.
Bulk import/export	Create new categories via import	Create new categories by uploading a CSV file with category details, leaving the Category ID field empty.
Bulk import/export	Update existing categories via import	Update existing categories by exporting current categories, editing the CSV file without changing Category IDs, and re-importing it.
Bulk import/export	Import category active/inactive status	Set categories as inactive by entering 'Yes' in the Inactive column during import; leave blank for active categories.
Bulk import/export	Import category URLs	Set custom URLs for categories by entering the desired URL slug in the URL column during import.
Bulk import/export	Import category SEO title tags	Specify the title tag for category pages by entering text in the Title Tag column during import.
Bulk import/export	Import category meta descriptions	Add meta descriptions for categories by entering text up to 160 characters in the Meta Description column during import.
Bulk import/export	Import category meta keywords	Enter up to six comma-separated meta keywords or phrases in the Meta Keywords column during import (deprecated usage).
Bulk import/export	Assign parent categories via import	Assign one or more parent categories to a category by entering their names or IDs in Parent Category columns during import.
Bulk import/export	Import category sort order	Define the display order of categories by entering numeric values in the Sort Order column during import.
Bulk import/export	Import featured category status	Mark categories as featured on the home page by entering 'Yes' in the Is This A Featured Category? column during import.
Bulk import/export	Import trade category status	Mark categories as trade-only by entering 'Yes' in the Trade Category column when using the trade accounts app.
Bulk import/export	Import second category descriptions	Add a second description for categories by entering HTML or text in the Category Description 2 column when enabled.
Bulk import/export	Import category image URLs	Import category images by including image URLs in the Category Image File/URL column of the import CSV.
Bulk import/export	Import category image ALT tags	Specify ALT tags for category images in the import CSV to support accessibility and SEO.
Bulk import/export	Use ShopWired image hosting for category images	Upload category images to ShopWired's image hosting service to generate URLs for use in category import files.
Bulk import/export	Host category images via URL	Add category images in import files by specifying publicly accessible image URLs.

Brands

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Brand creation and details	Create a new brand	Create a brand by entering a name/title and description in the Brands section.
Brand creation and details	Upload brand image	Upload an image to represent the brand and edit it with ShopWired’s image editor.
Brand creation and details	Set image ALT tag	Specify ALT text for the brand image for accessibility and SEO.
Brand creation and details	Configure SEO tags	Manually set the brand page’s title tag, URL, and meta description.
Brand creation and details	Automatic SEO defaults	ShopWired can auto-generate the brand page’s title tag, URL, and meta description from the brand name and description.
Brand creation and details	Meta keywords field (deprecated)	An optional legacy meta keywords field is available but not auto-populated and generally deprecated by search engines.
Brand assignment	Assign brand to products	Link products to a selected brand to associate them with a manufacturer or label.
Brand assignment	Create brands via product import	New brands are created automatically when importing products if the specified brand does not already exist.
Brand visibility and status	Deactivate brands	Mark a brand as inactive to remove it from brand menus while keeping the brand page accessible.
Brand visibility and status	Brand page visibility when inactive	Inactive brand pages remain accessible via URL and can appear in search results but are excluded from sitemap.xml.
Brand management	View existing brands	View all brands in a table within the Brands management area.
Brand management	Delete brands	Permanently delete brands from the account.
Website display	Display brands on website	Show brand listings on the website so visitors can browse products by brand.
Website display	Customise brand appearance	Customise how brand listings and pages appear using theme settings.
Website display	Set brand sort order	Set a numeric sort order to control how brands are displayed on the website and in brand content blocks.
Website display	Sort order behaviour	Lower sort order numbers appear first; brands without a sort order or with the same value are sorted alphabetically.
Integrations	Brand information in third-party feeds	Include brand data in feeds sent to platforms such as Google Shopping and eBay.

Filters

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Filter groups	Create filter groups	Create filter groups (e.g. Colour, Style) to categorise product attributes for use across your website and in your account.
Filter groups	Limit filter groups per account	Use up to 15 filter groups per ShopWired account.
Filter groups	Configure filter group page types	Choose where each filter group appears: all pages, all categories, all brands, search page, specific categories, or specific brands.
Filter groups	Set filter group sort order	Control the display order of filter groups; lower numbers appear first, with alphabetical order used for ties or missing values.
Filters	Add filters to filter groups	Add individual filters (attributes) within a filter group to represent product characteristics such as colours or styles.
Price filters	Create price filter group	Add a dedicated price filter group so visitors can filter products by price range.
Price filters	Configure price ranges	Define the ranges for the price filter group; the first range must start at 0 and the last range has no upper limit (set the upper bound to 0).
Price filters	Limit to one price filter group	Each account can have only one price filter group.
Filter logic	Filter selection logic across groups	Selecting filters from different groups uses AND logic, showing products matching all selected groups.
Filter logic	Filter selection logic within groups	Selecting multiple filters within the same group uses OR logic, showing products matching any selected filters in that group.
Filter display	Theme-dependent filter display	The presentation of filter groups, filters, and price filters on category, brand, and search pages is controlled by your website theme.
Filter sort order	Customise filter order within filter groups	Reorder filters inside a filter group using drag and drop in Filter sort order settings.
Filter sort order	Limit on filter sort order customisation	Custom sort order is available only for groups with 60 or fewer filters; groups with more than 60 filters cannot be custom ordered.
Product filter assignment	Assign filters to products via product editor	Assign filters on each product by selecting applicable filters within each filter group in the product’s Filters tab.
Product filter assignment	Assign filters via product import/export	Bulk-assign filters using product import/export by entering filter values in the Option columns corresponding to filter groups.
Product filter assignment	Assign multiple filters per filter group	Apply multiple filters from the same group to a product by separating filter names with commas during import.
Product filter assignment	Leave filter group blank if not applicable	Leave a filter group empty on a product when none of its filters apply.
Filter/variation syncing app	Enable filter/variation syncing app	Enable the app to automatically create and manage filter groups and filters from product variations.
Filter/variation syncing app	Automatic filter group creation	When a new variation option is added and no matching filter group exists, a new filter group is created automatically.
Filter/variation syncing app	Automatic filter creation	When new variation values are added within a variation option, corresponding filters are added automatically.
Filter/variation syncing app	Remove filters when out of stock	Filters linked to variation values are automatically removed when those values go out of stock.
Filter/variation syncing app	Reapply filters when variation back in stock	Filters are automatically reapplied when previously out-of-stock variation values return to stock.
Filter/variation syncing app	Remove filter groups when all variations out of stock	If all values within a variation option go out of stock, the corresponding filter group is automatically removed.
Filter/variation syncing app	Sync existing product variations	Run a manual sync on first enablement to create filter groups and filters for existing variations.
Filter/variation syncing app	Report email setting	Specify an email address to receive reports about the app’s syncing operations.

Products

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Product status	Deactivate products	Make a product inactive by deselecting its active setting.
Product status	Effects of deactivating products	Inactive products do not appear as featured products, in embedded sections, category/brand pages, or search results but their product pages remain accessible via URL.
Product status	Sitemap exclusion for inactive products	Inactive products are excluded from the website's sitemap.xml file.
Product status	Inactive product add to basket behaviour	Visitors see the add to basket button on inactive product pages but receive an error when attempting to add the product to the basket unless the theme is modified.
Product deletion	Permanent product deletion	Deleting a product permanently removes it and its images from the ShopWired account and CDN.
Product deletion	301 redirect recommendation	Recommend configuring a 301 redirect for each deleted product to forward visitors to a different page.
Bulk actions	Delete selected products	Permanently delete selected products from the ShopWired account; this action is irreversible.
Bulk actions	Delete all products on page	Permanently delete all products displayed on the current page; this action is irreversible.
Bulk actions	Bulk edit products	Use the bulk editor to make changes to multiple selected products simultaneously.
Bulk actions	Change categories and brands	Change the categories and brands assigned to selected products.
Bulk actions	Change stock quantities	Change stock quantities for selected products and their variations.
Bulk actions	Export selected products to CSV	Export selected products into a CSV file following the standard product export format.
Bulk editing	Select products for bulk edit	Choose specific products from the products table to include in a bulk edit operation.
Bulk editing	Bulk edit multiple products	Select up to 100 products to edit multiple product properties simultaneously using the bulk editor.
Bulk editing	Edit product properties in bulk	Modify product properties by entering new data or selecting from predefined options within the bulk editor.
Bulk editing	Configure bulk editor columns	Select which product properties (columns) to display and edit in the bulk editor interface.
Bulk editing	Save or discard changes when changing columns	Choose to save changes, discard changes, or cancel when adjusting the columns displayed in the bulk editor.
Bulk editing	Save bulk edits	Save all changes made to selected products in the bulk editor and refresh the page to apply updates.
Bulk editing	Edit product name	Edit the name of products in bulk.
Bulk editing	Edit product brand	Assign or change the brand name for products (requires Brands app).
Bulk editing	Edit product categories	Assign or change product categories from existing categories in bulk.
Bulk editing	Edit product price	Edit the regular selling price of products in bulk.
Bulk editing	Edit sale price	Edit the discounted sale price of products in bulk.
Bulk editing	Edit compare price	Edit the original price used for price comparison in bulk.
Bulk editing	Edit cost price	Enter or update the cost price used for gross profit calculations (requires Gross profit report).
Bulk editing	Edit SKU	Edit the stock keeping unit code for products in bulk.
Bulk editing	Edit stock quantity	Update the available stock quantity for products in bulk.
Bulk editing	Edit stock alert settings	Set stock alert thresholds and values for products in bulk.
Bulk editing	Edit warehouse notes	Add or update internal warehouse notes for products (requires Warehouse notes app).
Bulk editing	Edit HS tariff code	Enter or update the Harmonised System tariff code for international shipping.
Bulk editing	Edit product weight	Set or update product weight in kilograms or grams in bulk.
Bulk editing	Edit delivery address requirement	Indicate if a delivery address is not required for the product.
Bulk editing	Edit out of stock purchase settings	Configure purchase settings for out-of-stock products (requires Stock on back order app).
Bulk editing	Edit out of stock quantity limit	Set the maximum quantity allowed for purchase of out-of-stock products (requires Stock on back order app).
Bulk editing	Edit pre-order status	Mark products as available for pre-order (requires Pre-order app).
Bulk editing	Edit pre-order release date	Set the date and time when pre-order products become available (requires Pre-order app).
Bulk editing	Edit pre-order ships-on date	Set the expected shipping date for pre-order products (requires Pre-order app).
Bulk editing	Edit GTIN	Enter or update the Global Trade Item Number for products.
Bulk editing	Edit MPN	Enter or update the Manufacturer's Part Number for products.
Bulk editing	Edit search keywords	Add or modify specific search keywords or phrases for products (requires Product search keywords).
Bulk editing	Edit new product status	Indicate if a product is marked as new.
Bulk editing	Edit eBay primary category	Set the primary eBay category ID for products (requires eBay app).
Bulk editing	Edit eBay secondary category	Set the secondary eBay category ID for products (requires eBay app).
Bulk editing	Edit eBay own category	Set the custom eBay store category ID for products (requires eBay app).
Bulk editing	Edit eBay secondary own category	Set the secondary custom eBay store category ID (requires eBay app).
Bulk editing	Edit eBay condition	Set the product condition as recognised by eBay (requires eBay app).
Bulk editing	Edit eBay charity ID	Assign a charity ID linked to the eBay listing (requires eBay app).
Bulk editing	Edit eBay charity percentage	Set the percentage of sale donated to the selected charity on eBay (requires eBay app).
Bulk editing	Edit eBay global shipping eligibility	Indicate if the product is eligible for eBay's Global Shipping Programme (requires eBay app).
Bulk editing	Edit Google Shopping category	Set the Google product category ID for products (requires Google Shopping app).
Bulk editing	Edit Google Shopping condition	Set the product condition for Google Shopping listings (requires Google Shopping app).
Bulk editing	Edit Google Shopping no identifier flag	Indicate if the product lacks GTIN or MPN for Google Shopping (requires Google Shopping app).
Bulk editing	Edit Google Shopping bundle status	Specify if the product is part of a bundle for Google Shopping (requires Google Shopping app).
Trade-only product definition	Create trade-only products	Assign products exclusively to trade-only categories to restrict their visibility to trade customers.
Trade discount exclusions	Exclude products from global price discounts	Mark individual products to be excluded from global price discounts so trade customers pay normal pricing for those products.
Trade discount exclusions	Configure trade discount exclusion per product	Enable the `exclude the product from trade discounts` option in the product's Additional information section under the Other data tab.
Trade discount exclusions	Import/export trade discount exclusions	Use the `Trade Discount Exclusion` column in the product import/export system to bulk configure product exclusions from global price discounts.
Name & description	Enter product title/name	Enter a required title or name that describes the product being listed for sale.
Name & description	Enter product description	Enter a detailed product description using the text editor to format and style the text.
Additional descriptions	Configure multiple product descriptions	Configure up to 5 separate descriptions for a product to display on product pages.
Additional descriptions	Use product description fields 2 to 5	Enter content into Product description 2, 3, 4, and 5 fields within the Product details section for tabbed display.
Additional descriptions	Enter multiple product descriptions	Enter up to five segmented product descriptions (description 2 to 5) visible as tabs on the product page, available with the Tabbed product descriptions app.
Tabbed product descriptions	Tab headings configuration in themes	Configure tab heading titles for each tabbed description via theme settings in Version 4 and Version 5 themes.
Tabbed product descriptions	Specify tab titles per product	Use custom fields named product_tab_2, product_tab_3, product_tab_4, and product_tab_5 to set individual tab titles per product.
Tabbed product descriptions	Default tab titles fallback	Use theme tab title settings as default when individual product tab titles are not specified.
Tabbed product descriptions	Import/export tabbed descriptions	Import and export tabbed descriptions using the product import/export system with columns Item Description 2, 3, 4, and 5.
Tabbed product descriptions	Use HTML in tabbed descriptions	Enter HTML formatted content in tabbed description fields to control text formatting.
Prices	Set product price	Set the normal selling price for the product.
Prices	Set product sale price	Set a custom sale price for the product.
Prices	Set product RRP	Set a recommended retail price (RRP) for display purposes only.
Prices	Set product cost price	Enter the product's cost price, available when the gross profit app is installed.
Bulk pricing	Configure bulk pricing rules	Configure bulk pricing rules for the product using the Bulk pricing app when installed.
Reward points	Set reward points earned	Set the number of reward points earned when ordering the product, available with the Reward points app and if not using automatic calculation.
Sales tax	Select sales tax code	Select a sales tax code for the product from a list provided by TaxJar.
Sales tax	Mark product exempt from sales tax	Mark the product as exempt from sales tax in all US states, available for US ShopWired users.
VAT	Mark product as zero-rated/exempt	Mark the product as zero-rated or exempt from VAT; this setting affects all variations, choices, and extras.
VAT	Mark product eligible for VAT relief	Mark the product as eligible for VAT relief, available with the VAT features app installed.
VAT	Set custom VAT rate	Enter a custom VAT rate as a percentage for the product, available with the VAT features app installed.
Stock management	Enter SKU code	Enter a SKU code to track stock for the product.
Stock management	Enter stock quantity	Enter the current stock quantity available for the product, including negative values.
Stock management	Configure stock alerts	Enable and set stock alert levels for the product using the Stock alerts app.
Stock management	Add warehouse notes	Enter internal warehouse notes for the product using the Warehouse notes app.
Stock on back order	Configure back order options	Configure stock on back order settings for the product using the Stock on back order app.
Stock management	Enter product weight	Enter the product weight with up to 4 decimal places for weight-based delivery rates.
Delivery	Mark product as not requiring delivery address	Mark the product as digital, service, or otherwise not requiring a delivery address at checkout.
Delivery	Configure specific delivery pricing	Set specific delivery pricing for the product, including free delivery, which overrides checkout delivery rate calculations.
Pre-order options	Mark product as pre-order	Mark the product as a pre-order product using the Pre-order products app.
Pre-order options	Set ships-on date	Set an informational ships-on date displayed on the product page for pre-order products.
Pre-order options	Set release on website date/time	Set the date and time when the product becomes available on the website (requires Pre-order app).
Subscriptions	Mark product as subscription	Mark the product as a subscription product and configure subscription options using the Subscriptions app.
Multi-buy offers	Include product in multi-buy offers	Include the product in site-wide 2 for 1 or 3 for 2 multi-buy offers using the Multi-buy offers app.
Offline payment only products	Set product as offline payment only	Mark a product so it can only be ordered using the offline payment method.
Offline payment only products	Enforce offline payment when basket contains offline-only products	Restrict checkout payment options to offline payment only if the basket contains at least one offline payment only product.
Filters	Assign product filters	Assign filters from created filter groups to the product using the Product filters app when installed.
Brands	Assign product brand	Assign a brand to the product using the Brands app when installed.
Categories	Assign product categories	Assign products to leaf categories using the category selection setting, with a default limit of 3 categories adjustable via account settings.
Product filters	Filter products by category	Filter products based on their assigned categories.
Product filters	Filter products by stock status	Filter products that are in stock (at least one variation in stock) or out of stock (all variations out of stock).
Product filters	Filter products by subscription status	Filter products configured as subscription products.
Product filters	Filter products by pre-order status	Filter products configured as pre-order products.
Product filters	Filter products by eBay listing status	Filter products listed on eBay or not listed/expired listings.
Product filters	Filter products by active or inactive status	Filter products based on whether they are active or inactive.
Product search	Search products by name, SKU, GTIN, or warehouse notes	Search products using product name, SKU, GTIN, or warehouse notes.
Product import	Import HS code and country of origin	Use the `HS Tariff Code` and `Country Of Origin` columns to import product identifiers in bulk.
Product identifiers	Enter HS code for products	Enter the Harmonised System (HS) code for each product to identify the type of goods for customs duty calculation.
Product identifiers	Select country of origin for products	Select the country of origin for each product to determine applicable customs duty rates.
Video	Add product video embedding code	Add a single video embedding code from hosting sites like YouTube or Vimeo to the product; multiple videos require the multiple product videos app.
Images	Upload product images	Upload up to 5 images per product by default, with an option to increase the limit via account settings.
Images	Drag and drop image upload	Upload images by dragging and dropping files or browsing device storage.
Images	Edit product images	Crop, resize, or rotate uploaded images using ShopWired's image editor.
Images	Add ALT tags to images	Add ALT tags to product images to improve accessibility and SEO.
Images	Reorder product images	Rearrange the order of product images by dragging and dropping using the compass icon after saving the product.
Images	Image upload limits	Upload images must be JPG, PNG, or GIF format, less than 6000px in height and width, and under 4MB in file size.
Add to basket via URL	Add product to basket using URL parameter	Add a product to the basket by including the `add-to-basket` parameter in a product URL.
Add to basket via URL	Specify quantity in URL	Set the quantity of the product to add to the basket using the `quantity` parameter in the URL.
Add to basket via URL	Preselect product choices in URL	Preselect product choices by including `choice[choice-name]=choice-selected` parameters in the URL.
Add to basket via URL	Preselect multiple product choices	Preselect multiple product choices by including multiple `choice[choice-name]=choice-selected` parameters separated by `&` in the URL.
Add to basket via URL	Preselect product variations in URL	Preselect product variations by including `variation[variation-name]=variation-selected` parameters in the URL.
Add to basket via URL	Preselect multiple product variations	Preselect multiple product variations by including multiple `variation[variation-name]=variation-selected` parameters separated by `&` in the URL.
Add to basket via URL	Preselect product extras in URL	Preselect product extras by including the `extras` parameter with one or more product extra IDs separated by commas in the URL.

Product variations

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Configuration	Enable product variations	Turn on variations for a product to offer selectable options.
Configuration	Configure variations per product	Set up to three variation options (e.g. Size, Colour) per product.
Variation options	Add variation options	Create option names (e.g. Size, Colour) for a product.
Variation options	Reorder variation options	Change the display order of variation options.
Variation option values	Add option values	Add values for each option (e.g. Small, Blue).
Variation option values	Add multiple option values	Enter multiple values at once using comma-separated input.
Variation option values	Reorder option values	Change the display order of option values.
Variation combinations	Generate variation combinations	Automatically build all possible combinations and set their attributes.
Variation limits	Maximum options per product	Use up to three variation options per product.
Variation limits	Maximum option values per option	Limits vary by number of options: 1 option up to 300 values; 2 options up to 40 each; 3 options up to 13 each.
Variation limits	Maximum variation combinations	Total combinations per product cannot exceed 2,197.
Variation limits	Automatic limit enforcement	Limits are recalculated and enforced as options and values change.
Variation attributes	Attribute inheritance	Variations inherit the parent product’s attributes unless overridden.
Variation attributes	Configure price and sale price	Set a price and (optional) sale price for each variation.
Variation attributes	Configure SKU and stock quantity	Assign a SKU and stock level per variation.
Variation attributes	Configure weight	Set a weight per variation for delivery calculations.
Variation attributes	Configure GTIN and MPN	Store GTIN and MPN identifiers per variation.
Variation attributes	Configure custom VAT rate	Set a custom VAT rate or mark a variation as VAT exempt.
Variation attributes	Configure reward points value	Set reward points earned per variation (requires Reward Points app).
Variation attributes	Configure cost price	Record a cost price per variation (for Gross Profit Report app).
Variation attributes	Assign variation image	Link a specific product image to show when a variation is selected.
Stock management	Track stock per variation	Manage inventory quantities individually for each variation.
SKU management	Automatic SKU code generation	Auto-generate SKUs for variations using a chosen prefix and option values.
SKU management	Manual SKU override/removal	Manually edit or remove auto-generated SKU codes on variations.
Variation editing	Bulk edit multiple variations	Update selected attributes for many published variations at once.
Variation editing	Edit single variation attributes	Edit an individual variation’s attributes in a dedicated editor.
Variation status	Publish variations	Make selected variations visible on the website.
Variation status	Unpublish variations	Hide selected variations from the website.
Website display	Variation options as dropdowns	Display variation selectors as dropdown menus by default.
Website display	Variation options as buttons	Switch variation selectors to button-style presentation.
Website behaviour	Require variation selection	Force selection of required options before adding to basket.
Variation URLs	Unique variation URLs	Each variation has a unique URL that pre-selects its options and shows specific attributes.
Variation URLs	Google Merchant Center integration	Variation URLs are included in product data sent via the Google Shopping app.

Product choices

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Overview	Create product choice sets	Create global product choice sets that group related options, such as Colour or Size.
Overview	Create product choice options	Add individual options within a choice set (e.g. Blue, Large) for customers to select.
Configuration	Unlimited choice sets and options	Create and assign an unlimited number of product choice sets and options.
Configuration	Assign product choice sets to products	Attach one or more product choice sets to individual products during creation or editing.
Configuration	Reorder choice options within sets	Reorder options within a choice set globally using drag and drop.
Configuration	Enable or disable specific choice options per product	Control availability of individual choice options on a per‑product basis.
Configuration	Customise option prices per product	Override the default additional cost and cost price of choice options for a specific product without changing the global set.
Pricing	Configure additional cost for options	Add an extra cost for selected choice options which is added to the product’s base price.
Pricing	Set cost price for options	Enter a cost price for choice options to support gross profit reporting.
Website display	Display product choices on product pages	Show assigned product choice options on product pages for selection before adding to basket.
Website display	Default display as drop‑down lists	Product choices are displayed as drop‑down select lists by default on the website.
Website display	Customise display type	Configure product choices to display as radio buttons or checkboxes (theme dependent).
Website display	Combine with other product options	Use product choices alongside customisation fields, file uploads, or conditional logic on product pages.
Website behaviour	Optional choice selection	Product choices are optional by default; customers are not required to select an option.
Stock management	No stock tracking for choices	Product choice options do not support stock tracking.
Orders	Display product choices on orders	Selected product choice options appear on order confirmations, customer accounts, admin orders, invoice PDFs, and order exports/feeds.
Import/export	Manage product choices via import/export	Create, assign, edit, and remove choice sets, options, and prices using the product import/export system.
Attributes	No additional attributes for choices	Product choices do not support extra attributes such as sale price or weight.

Product extras

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Installation & setup	Install Product extras app	Install the Product extras app from Apps to enable optional extras on products.
Installation & setup	Create or edit product extras	For each product, add extras by entering a name and (optionally) a price; the extra appears on the product page and its price is added to the parent product when selected.
Installation & setup	Bulk import product extras	Configure product extras in bulk using product import columns Optional Extra Name X, Optional Extra Price X, Optional Extra Cost Price X, and Optional Extra SKU X.
Configuration & limits	Optional extra selection	Extras are optional; customers can select or ignore them on the product page.
Configuration & limits	Unlimited product extras	Add any number of extras to a product.
Configuration & limits	No additional attributes for extras	Extras do not support additional attributes such as sale price or weight.
Pricing	Set product extra price	Enter a price for each extra; if left blank the extra is free and only the parent product price is charged.
Linking & stock management	Link extra to stand‑alone product	Link an extra to a separate product with a SKU to enable stock control and automatic stock reduction.
Linking & stock management	Linked product variation limitation	Extras can be linked only to whole products, not to specific product variations.
Linking & stock management	Stock tracking via linked products	When an extra is linked to a single‑variant product, stock levels are tracked using that product.
Linking & stock management	Reduce linked product stock on order	When an order includes an extra, the linked product’s stock is reduced by the quantity of the extra ordered.
Linking & stock management	Allow adding out‑of‑stock linked products	Customers can add an extra even if its linked product is out of stock.
Linking & stock management	Stock not returned automatically on returns	Using the Return stock feature on orders does not automatically return stock for linked products used as extras.
Delivery & weights	Include linked product weight in basket	The weight of a linked product is added to the basket total for delivery cost calculations.
Digital products	Automatic digital file delivery	If an extra links to a product that delivers a digital file, the customer is automatically emailed the download link after purchase.
Reporting & costs	Enter cost price for extras	If the Gross Profit Report app is installed, you can set a cost price for each extra for profitability reporting.

Product sort orders

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Default sort order	Set default product sort order for category and brand pages	Choose the default sort order in Products > Settings from: Name (A to Z), Name (Z to A), Price (high to low), Price (low to high), or Manual.
Visitor sorting	Allow visitors to change product sort order	Customers can use the storefront sort-by control to change the listing order independently of the default.
Manual sort order settings	Enable manual product sort order	Select the Manual option to control product listing order by entering sort order numbers in your ShopWired admin.
Manual sort order settings	Choose manual sort order scope	Apply one global manual sort order for all listings or set separate manual sort orders for each category and each brand.
Manual sort order rules	Manual sort order behaviour	Lower numbers appear first; products with the same number are sorted alphabetically; products without a number are sorted alphabetically.
Global manual sort order	Set global manual sort order per product	Enter a Sort order value on each product to apply the same position across all category and brand pages.
Global manual sort order	Import/export global product sort orders	Use product import/export with the Sort Order column to set or update global sort orders in bulk; leave blank to omit.
Category/brand manual sort order	Import manual sort orders per category and brand	Upload a CSV with Product ID, Item Type (Category or Brand), Item ID, and Sort Order to set positions for individual categories and brands.
Category/brand manual sort order	Export manual sort orders per category and brand	Download a CSV of all configured manual sort orders by category and brand from the Product sort order import/export section.
Category/brand manual sort order	Update or delete manual sort orders via import	Update existing positions or remove them by entering [delete] in the Sort Order column for the relevant product and category/brand.

Product customisation

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Customisation text	Activate customisation text feature	Enable the custom text input feature for products in Products > Settings.
Customisation text	Add customisation fields to products	Configure customisation fields per product in the Product options area (Customisation fields tab).
Customisation text	Add multiple customisation fields	Add unlimited customisation fields to a single product.
Customisation text	Set customisation field label	Specify the label shown above each input on the product page.
Customisation text	Select customisation field type	Choose a single-line text field or a multi-line text area.
Customisation text	Set maximum input length	Define a character limit for each field or leave unlimited.
Customisation text	Enable required customisation fields	Mark customisation fields as mandatory (including via product import).
Customisation text	Conditional display of fields by product options	Show or hide fields based on selected product options (theme-dependent).
Customisation text	Display customisation fields on product pages	Show configured fields on product pages and quick view (theme-dependent).
Basket	Separate basket items by customisation values	Treat the same product with different customisation inputs as separate basket lines.
Basket	Show customisation field values in basket	Display field labels and entered text on the basket page before checkout.
Orders	Display customisation text on orders	Include customer-entered customisation text in order emails, customer accounts, order view pages, PDFs, and CSV exports.
Orders	Edit customisation comments on orders	Edit or add to customisation comments on the order’s product line items.
Import/export	Configure customisation fields via import/export	Set field labels, types, and maximum lengths through product import/export columns.
Import/export	Configure file uploads via import/export	Set the number of allowed file uploads for products using the File Uploads column.
File uploads	Activate product file uploads feature	Enable file uploads for products in Products > Settings under Customisation text & file uploads.
File uploads	Set number of file upload fields per product	Define how many files a customer can upload per product.
File uploads	Limit file upload size	Restrict each uploaded file to a maximum of 10 MB.
File uploads	Enable required file uploads	Make file uploads mandatory for specific products.
File uploads	Conditional display of file upload fields	Show or hide upload fields based on selected product options (theme-dependent).
File uploads	Display file upload fields on product pages	Show upload fields on product pages and quick view (theme-dependent).

Product bundles

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Overview	Create product bundles	Group multiple existing products into a single combined product offering.
Product creation	Enable bundle product type	Mark a product as a bundle/package to configure it as a product bundle.
Product creation	Configure constituent products and quantities	Select constituent products and set their quantities within the bundle.
Product creation	SKU code for bundles	Assign a SKU code to a bundle; stock quantity is not set on the bundle itself.
Product creation	Trade pricing for bundles	Use the bundle’s SKU to configure trade pricing.
Product creation	Set bundle/package title	Enter a title to display when the bundle is shown on constituent product pages.
Product creation	Set bundle/package image	Upload an image to display when the bundle is shown on constituent product pages.
Product creation	Set image ALT tag	Configure an ALT tag for the bundle/package image for accessibility and SEO.
Website display	Display bundles as standard products	Bundles appear like standard products across the site, including in categories and search results.
Website display	Show bundle advert on constituent product pages	Display the bundle’s title, image and price as an advert on pages of constituent products.
Basket and checkout	Add bundles to basket	Visitors add bundles to their basket in the same way as other products.
Orders	Bundle shown as single line item	Orders show the bundle as one product line; constituent products are not itemised separately.
Stock and inventory	Automatic stock deduction	Purchasing a bundle automatically deducts stock from each constituent product.
Stock and inventory	In‑stock rule (all constituents tracked)	The bundle is in stock only when all constituent products are in stock.
Stock and inventory	In‑stock rule (any constituent untracked)	If any constituent product does not have stock tracking enabled, the bundle is always considered in stock.
Stock and inventory	Back order compatibility	Bundle stock status respects each constituent product’s stock on back order setting.
Constituent products	No options selection for constituents	Buyers cannot select product choices or extras for constituent products within a bundle.
Constituent products	Variations not permitted as constituents	Product variations cannot be used as constituent products in a bundle.
Import and export	Create bundles via import	Create product bundles using product import with columns for Bundle, Bundle Products, Bundle Title and Bundle Image.
Import and export	Specify constituents and quantities in import	Provide SKU codes and quantities for constituent products in the Bundle Products column.
Import and export	Import percentage price contribution	Include each constituent’s percentage price contribution in the Bundle Products column (SKU, quantity, percentage).
Customs & duties	Set percentage price contribution per constituent	Specify the percentage of the bundle price attributed to each constituent to improve customs and duties calculations.
Customs & duties	Calculate customs & duties for bundles	Customs and duties are calculated by treating each constituent separately, using HS codes, country of origin and percentage price contribution.

Digital products

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Product creation	Mark product as digital	Mark a product as a digital product when creating or editing it.
Product creation	Attach digital files to product	Attach one or more digital files to a digital product.
Product creation	Delivery address not required	For digital-only products, configure checkout so a delivery address is not required.
Product creation	Free delivery for digital products	Set a free specific delivery price for digital products to avoid delivery fees.
File management	Upload files or enter URL	Add digital files by uploading from your device or by entering an external file URL.
File management	Name digital files	Set a display name for each digital file (used in customer communications); defaults to the uploaded file name if left blank.
File management	Edit file names	Rename existing digital files on the digital downloads page.
File management	Tag digital files	Assign optional tags to categorise files on the digital downloads page.
File management	Search and filter files	Find files by name or filter by tag.
File management	Unique file IDs	Each uploaded digital file is given a unique, unchangeable ID not visible to customers.
File management	View total storage used	See the total storage used by all uploaded digital files in your account.
File management	Delete digital files	Permanently delete digital files from your account.
File name customisation	Customise download file names	Define a custom format for download file names using placeholders such as product title, SKU and brand.
Download settings	Configure link lifetime	Set how many days a digital download link remains valid after order creation.
Download settings	Configure download limit	Set the maximum number of times a customer can use a digital download link.
Download settings	Redirect expired or exceeded downloads	Customers are redirected to the website home page if a link has expired or the download limit has been reached.
Customer account downloads	Customer downloads in account	Allow customers to download purchased digital products from their account area.
Customer account downloads	Access digital files via API	Access a customer’s order digital files via the API for display in their account.
Customer account downloads	Digital file metadata	Retrieve file details via the API (e.g., title, product ID, creation date, expiry, limits, downloads used, download URL).
External hosting	Use external file hosting	Host digital files externally by linking to their URLs instead of uploading to ShopWired.
External hosting	Amazon S3 integration	Host files on Amazon S3 by uploading to a public bucket and entering the file URLs in ShopWired.
External hosting	URL masking for downloads	Externally hosted file URLs are masked and one-time use links are generated for customer downloads.
Storage limits	500MB storage limit	Store up to 500MB of digital files within your ShopWired account.
Product import/export	Attach digital files via import	Attach digital files to products using the import tool, including multiple files per product (IDs or external URLs separated by commas).
Digital downloads app	Automatic download email	Automatically send customers an email with download links when an order containing digital products is created.
Digital downloads app	Customise download email content	Customise the content of the digital download confirmation email sent to customers.

Product import/export

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Import products	Download import template	Download a CSV template with the required product import format.
Import products	Add product data to template	Enter product information into the import template using spreadsheet software.
Import products	Upload product import file	Upload a completed CSV import file to create or update products.
Import products	Process product import	Process the uploaded CSV file to create new products or update existing ones.
Import products	Support for product variations and choices	Import product variations and choices using the appropriate import guidance.
Import products	Support for image uploads	Upload product images by first uploading them to ShopWired's image hosting service.
Import products	Email notification for large imports	Receive an email notification when an import of over 500 products has completed.
Import progress	Monitor product import progress	View the progress of product imports to track completion status.
Import error handling	Contact support for stuck imports	Contact ShopWired support if an import has not progressed for more than one hour.
Import file size	No hard product limit on import	ShopWired does not impose a strict limit on the number of products in an import file.
Import file size	Recommended import size limit	It is recommended to keep import files to a maximum of 25,000 products for optimal performance.
Image import	Image URL requirements	Ensure image URLs are accessible online, do not redirect, do not contain query strings, and use correct HTTP/HTTPS protocols.
Image import	Image host accessibility	Ensure the image host does not block ShopWired from accessing the image URLs.
Image import	Image format restrictions	Import product images only in JPG, PNG, or GIF formats; WebP and other next-generation formats are not supported.
Image import	Image size limits	Product images must not exceed 6000px in height or width and 4MB in file size.
Image import	Image upload timing	Allow at least one hour after import file upload for product images to be downloaded and processed.
Update products	Export existing products for editing	Export existing products to a CSV file for editing specific data fields.
Update products	Re-import updated CSV file	Upload and process the edited CSV file to update existing products.
Update products	Preserve product ID during update	Keep the product ID column unchanged when updating product information via import.
Product identification	Use Item ID for product updates	Use the unique Item ID to update existing products without changing the ID; leave blank to create new products.
Export products	Export product data to CSV	Export product information into a CSV file for backup or editing purposes.
Export products	Prepare and download export	Generate the export file and download it once ready.
Export products	Filter products by category or brand	Export products assigned to a specific category or brand.
Export products	Filter products by status	Export all products, only active products, or only inactive products using a status filter.
Export products	Select export columns	Choose specific columns of product data to include in the export file.
Data deletion	Delete individual products	Delete newly created products individually from the Products page.
Data deletion	Delete all products	Delete all products from the ShopWired account using the Delete Data feature in account settings.
Import reversal	Backup retention period	ShopWired stores backups for a maximum of two weeks.
Import reversal	Use own product data backup	Restore product data using backups exported by the user prior to import.
Import reversal	Request product data restoration service	Use a paid service from ShopWired to restore product data from backups if an import mistake occurs.
Product details	Import product name	Enter the product name without HTML formatting.
Product details	Import product description	Enter product description using HTML or plain text in a single spreadsheet row.
Product details	Import tabbed descriptions	Import additional product descriptions using multiple fields (requires Tabbed descriptions app).
Product images	Import product image URLs	Add product images using URLs or file names; supports .jpg, .jpeg, .png, and .gif formats only.
Product images	Import ALT tags for images	Specify ALT text for each product image for accessibility and fallback display.
Product videos	Import product video URL	Add embedded video code from video-sharing platforms like YouTube or Vimeo.
Product categorisation	Assign product categories	Assign products to categories by exact name or category ID for parent and subcategories.
Brands	Assign product brand	Assign a brand to the product by entering the exact brand name (requires Brands app).
Product filters	Assign product filters	Assign filter values for each filter group; multiple filters can be entered separated by commas (requires Product filters app).
Pricing	Import regular price	Enter the standard selling price or the lowest price if product has variations.
Pricing	Import sale price	Enter a discounted sale price for the product.
Pricing	Import recommended retail price (RRP)	Enter the recommended retail price for the product.
Cost and profit	Import cost price	Enter the product cost price for gross profit reporting (requires Gross profit report app).
Product extras	Import optional extra name	Enter the name of an optional extra displayed on the website.
Product extras	Import optional extra SKU	Enter SKU for an optional extra linked to a product.
Product extras	Import optional extra price	Enter the price for an optional extra; leave blank if free.
Product extras	Import optional extra cost price	Enter the cost price for an optional extra for profit tracking.
Stock management	Import SKU	Enter the stock keeping unit for stock tracking and out-of-stock messaging.
Stock management	Import opening stock quantity	Enter initial stock quantity; ignored if SKU is not provided.
Stock management	Configure purchasable when out of stock	Allow or disallow purchase of out-of-stock products to enable back orders (requires Stock on back order app).
Stock management	Set out of stock purchase limit	Limit the maximum quantity of out-of-stock items that can be purchased (requires Stock on back order app).
Shipping	Import product weight	Enter product weight in kilograms or grams using numeric values.
Shipping	Import specific delivery price	Enter a specific delivery charge or free delivery; use 'remove' to delete previous delivery price.
Shipping	Import delivery price per zone	Enter delivery prices for multiple zones using country: price format (requires Shipping on checkout configuration).
Shipping	Configure single delivery cost	Specify if delivery cost applies once or per item using Yes/No or 1/0 values.
Shipping	Specify if delivery address is required	Indicate if a delivery address is not required using Yes/No or 1/0 values.
VAT	Import custom VAT rate	Enter a custom VAT rate as a numeric value without the percent symbol (requires VAT features app).
VAT	Set VAT exemption status	Mark product as VAT exempt or standard VAT using Yes/No or 1/0 values (requires VAT registered setting).
VAT	Set VAT relief eligibility	Mark product as eligible for VAT relief using Yes/No or 1/0 values (requires VAT features app).
SEO	Import meta title	Enter a custom meta title up to 70 characters (requires SEO Control app).
SEO	Import meta description	Enter a meta description up to 160 characters (requires SEO Control app).
SEO	Import meta keywords	Enter up to 6 meta keywords separated by commas, not exceeding 70 characters (requires SEO Control app).
SEO	Import custom product URL	Enter a custom URL string using letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores only.
SEO	Import custom search keywords	Enter keywords or keyphrases separated by commas for product search enhancement (requires Product search keywords app).
Warehouse notes	Import warehouse notes	Enter internal notes for warehouse use; not visible to customers (requires Warehouse notes app).
Reward points	Import reward points earned	Enter the number of reward points customers earn when purchasing the product (requires Reward points app).
Related products	Import related product IDs	Enter multiple related product IDs separated by commas.

Product settings

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Back order settings	Set default out of stock behaviour	Define whether out of stock products are purchasable by default when no product-specific setting is applied.
Back order settings	Set global out of stock quantity limit	Set a global limit for how far out of stock a product can be sold when purchasable out of stock is enabled.
Out of stock products	Hide out of stock products	Hide out of stock products from brand, category and search results pages while allowing direct URL access.
Reserving visitor stock during checkout	Reserve stock for basket items	Reserve stock quantities for products added to a visitor’s basket during the order process.
Reserving visitor stock during checkout	Set stock reservation time	Specify the duration (in minutes) that reserved stock remains allocated to a basket.
Min/max order quantities	Set global minimum order quantity	Set a global minimum order quantity that overrides product-level settings.
Min/max order quantities	Set global maximum order quantity	Set a global maximum order quantity that overrides product-level settings.
Min/max order quantities	Restrict visitor types by order quantities	Choose which visitor types are subject to the minimum and maximum order quantity rules.
Visitor types	Configure visitor access to multi-buy offers	Specify which visitor types can view and receive multi-buy offer discounts.
Customisation text & file uploads	Activate customisation text feature	Allow visitors to enter custom text when adding a product to the basket, with configurable fields and labels.
Customisation text & file uploads	Activate file uploads feature	Allow visitors to upload files when adding a product to the basket, with configurable upload fields.
Miscellaneous settings	Activate product Q&A on all products	Enable the Product Q&A app to display question forms and previous answers on all product pages.
Miscellaneous settings	Charge product choice prices per quantity	Charge the prices of product choices/extras per unit when multiple quantities are added to the basket.
Miscellaneous settings	Generate random related products	Automatically show random related products where no manual related products are configured.
Product sort order	Set default product sort order	Set the default sort order for products on category and brand pages, with an option for visitors to change it.
Product sort order	Configure manual/custom sort order	Choose a global sort order or set custom sort orders per category and brand; supports import/export of sort orders.
Custom sale price	Set custom sale price	Set a sale price on a product or variation to adjust the base price used on product and listing pages.
Base price determination	Use sale price as base price	When a sale price exists (and no custom price is applied), use it as the base price for calculations.

Product search

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
App installation	Install product search keywords app	Install the Product Search Keywords app to enable enhanced product search features.
Keyword management	Add custom search keywords to products	Add custom search keywords to individual products to improve search result matching.
Keyword management	Enter multiple search keywords	Enter multiple keywords separated by commas within the search keywords field.
Keyword management	Search keywords character limit	Up to 5,000 characters of custom search keywords can be saved per product.
Bulk management	Import search keywords in bulk	Add search keywords to multiple products using the product import system’s Custom Search Keywords column.
Search settings	Set match logic	Choose between ‘and’ logic (all keywords must match) or ‘or’ logic (any keyword can match).
Search settings	Set minimum keyword match percentage	With ‘or’ logic, set the minimum percentage of a visitor’s keywords that must match for a product to appear.
Search settings	Adjust keyword relevance boost	Configure how strongly keyword matches influence a product’s ranking in results.
Search settings	Enable partial identifier matching	Allow partial matches on product identifiers (SKU, GTIN, MPN).
Search data sources	Use custom search keywords	Include each product’s custom search keywords as searchable data.
Search data sources	Use product title keywords	Include product titles as searchable keywords.
Search data sources	Use product description keywords	Include product descriptions as searchable keywords.
Search data sources	Use category name keywords	Include assigned category names as searchable keywords.
Search data sources	Use brand name keywords	Include assigned brand names as searchable keywords.
Search data sources	Use filter value keywords	Include assigned filter names as searchable keywords.
Identifier search	Enable SKU code search	Include product SKU codes so visitors can search by SKU.
Identifier search	Enable variation SKU search	Include variation SKU codes so visitors can search by variation SKU.
Identifier search	Enable MPN search	Include product and variation MPNs so visitors can search by MPN.
Identifier search	Enable GTIN search	Include product and variation GTINs so visitors can search by GTIN.
Search behaviour and ranking	Order results by relevance	Display matching products ordered by relevance score.
Search behaviour and ranking	Boost product/variation code matches	Increase ranking when a search term matches a product or variation code.
Search behaviour and ranking	Additional boost for SKU code matches	Apply an extra boost so a single SKU match can surface the product prominently.
Keyword matching rules	Match any keyword in identifiers field	Only one visitor keyword needs to match a product’s identifiers for relevance.
Keyword matching rules	Match all keywords in keywords field	All visitor keywords must match a product’s keyword data for relevance.
Keyword matching rules	Minimum 3 characters per keyword	Enforce a minimum length of three characters for search terms.
Reporting and optimisation	Access failed search report	View a report of visitor search terms that returned no matching products.
Reporting and optimisation	Add keywords from failed searches	Use failed search terms to add relevant keywords to products for improved results.

Gift cards

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
General	Sell gift cards on website	Offer gift cards for sale via a dedicated gift cards page.
General	Redeem gift card credit	Customers can redeem gift card balance in full or part across multiple orders.
Values and pricing	Configure gift card value options	Choose whether buyers can enter any amount, select a single fixed amount, or pick from multiple preset values.
Values and pricing	Set gift card values	Define preset gift card values available for purchase.
Values and pricing	Use visitor-selected value as base price	Set the product price to the amount selected by the buyer.
Gift card types	Create multiple gift card types	Define delivery types (e.g. by email, by post) with their own additional costs.
Gift card types	Exclude gift cards from delivery rate calculations	Exclude gift cards from standard delivery rate rules so only configured additional costs apply.
Code generation and delivery	Enable automatic gift card code generation	Automatically generate gift card codes when orders containing gift cards are received.
Code generation and delivery	Send gift cards by email automatically	Automatically email generated gift card codes to the order’s delivery email address.
Code generation and delivery	Customise gift card email	Customise the content of the automatic gift card email sent to customers.
Payments and discounts	Allow offline payment for gift cards	Permit offline payment methods when purchasing gift cards.
Payments and discounts	Allow voucher codes on gift card purchases	Allow discount codes to be applied to gift card purchases.
Tax	Configure VAT on gift cards	Choose whether gift card sales are zero rated or VAT liable.
Page customisation	Add gift cards page to navigation	Add a link to the gift cards page in website menus automatically or via link lists.
Page customisation	Customise gift cards page	Customise the design and text of the gift cards page using the theme customiser.
Page customisation	Upload gift card image	Upload an image to represent the gift card in the basket, checkout and order confirmation email.
Management	Create gift cards manually	Create gift cards by entering a code and initial value in the admin.
Management	Edit existing gift cards	Edit a gift card’s code, initial amount and amount used.
Management	Delete all gift cards	Delete all gift cards in the account.
Bulk import and export	Export gift cards for bulk editing	Export gift card data to CSV for bulk editing and re-import.
Bulk import and export	Edit gift cards in bulk	Edit multiple gift cards by updating a CSV and re-importing.
Bulk import and export	Import gift cards in bulk	Import multiple gift cards at once using a CSV template.
Orders and reporting	Display gift card partial payment on orders	Record gift card usage as a partial payment with the gift card code on order details, confirmation emails and PDFs.
Orders and reporting	Include gift card code in order CSV export	Include the gift card code used on an order in the Gift Voucher Code column of order CSV exports and feeds.

Min/max order quantities

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Global settings	Configure global minimum order quantity	Set a global minimum order quantity that applies to all products in the ShopWired account.
Global settings	Configure global maximum order quantity	Set a global maximum order quantity that applies to all products in the ShopWired account.
Product level settings	Set minimum order quantity per product	Configure a minimum order quantity for individual products in the Stock & delivery section under the Min & max quantities tab.
Product level settings	Set maximum order quantity per product	Configure a maximum order quantity for individual products in the Stock & delivery section under the Min & max quantities tab.
Product variations	Apply quantity restrictions at variation level	Enforce minimum and maximum order quantities separately for each product variation, requiring visitors to meet quantity limits per variation.
Visitor restrictions	Select visitor types for quantity restrictions	Choose which visitor types the minimum and maximum order quantity restrictions apply to via the product settings page.
Product import/export	Import minimum order quantity	Set minimum order quantities for products using the product import/export system with the Minimum Order Quantity column.
Product import/export	Import maximum order quantity	Set maximum order quantities for products using the product import/export system with the Maximum Order Quantity column.

Product videos

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Video display	Product video rendering	Embedded product videos are displayed on the product page according to the active theme’s design.
Theme compatibility	Vivify 5.3.0+ multiple video support	Vivify themes version 5.3.0 and later natively support displaying multiple product videos.
Single product video	Add a video to a product	Add one video embed code from a hosting platform to a product when creating or editing.
Single product video	Import/export single video field	Add or update a single product video via the product import/export system.
Multiple product videos app	Install app to enable multiple videos	Install the Multiple product videos app to allow more than one video per product.
Multiple product videos app	Add multiple videos per product	Add multiple video embed codes to a product when creating or editing.
Multiple product videos app	Add videos via Product media > Videos tab	Use the Videos tab in Product media to add additional videos to a product.
Multiple product videos app	Import/export supports one video only	The product import/export system supports a single video field; additional videos must be added in the admin.

Product XML feed

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Product feed app	Create product XML feed	Create an XML feed containing product details from your ShopWired account using the Product feed app.
Product feed app	Manual feed regeneration	Regenerate the product feed manually to update it immediately.
Product feed app	Overnight feed updates	The product feed updates automatically every 24 hours overnight.
Feed code	Feed code entry	Enter custom Twig code in the Feed code setting to generate the product feed.
Feed code	Customise feed with Twig	Use the Twig templating language with logic, conditionals, and loops to customise the product feed output.
Data access	Access product data objects	Output data from products, product reviews, product questions/answers, and product reward points objects in the feed.
Data access	Include custom fields	Include custom fields data in the product feed output.
Feed URL management	View product feed URL	View and copy the product feed URL from the Feeds > Feed URLs page.
Feed URL management	Password protect feed	Enable password protection for the product feed and access it using a username and password.
Feed validation	Twig error handling	If the Twig code contains errors, feed generation fails and the feed will not update until the errors are corrected.

Product multi-channel feed

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Feed types	Multiple XML feeds in Google format	Three separate XML feeds are provided in Google Shopping format, suitable for submission to Google, Facebook, Instagram, Pinterest, Snapchat and TikTok.
Feed access	Feed URL for scheduled fetch	A persistent feed URL is provided for third-party platforms to fetch on a schedule.
Feed access	Download XML file	Download the feed as an XML file at any time.
Feed generation	On-demand generation	Generate an XML file snapshot of current product data on demand.
Product selection	Include/exclude products	Choose to include selected products (via the Include in feed option), only published products, or all products (active and inactive).
Variations	Variations listed separately	Each product variation is output as a separate item in the feed.
Variations	Use SKU as variation identifier	Use SKU codes as the identifiers for variations to keep IDs consistent after product edits.
Variations	Internal variation ID behaviour	System-assigned variation IDs can change when a product is edited; using SKUs ensures stable identifiers in the feed.
Detailed attributes	Configure detailed product attributes	Enable and configure attributes such as age group, gender, material, pattern, size type, colour, size, and ships from country for inclusion in the feed.
Detailed attributes	Attribute entry per product	Enter attribute values on product create/edit screens or via product import/export.
Shipping information	Shipping data in feed	The g:shipping attribute is included with delivery rates for all configured delivery zones.
Feed update	Daily feed refresh	The feed URL content updates automatically every 24 hours (between 5am and 7am UTC) to reflect product changes.

Stock management

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Stock tracking	Stock quantity determines stock status	A product or variation is out of stock if its stock quantity is 0 or less.
Stock tracking	Out of stock products cannot be added to basket by default	Prevent visitors from adding out of stock products or variations to the basket unless enabled by an app.
Stock tracking	Enable back order sales	Use the Stock On Back Order app to allow out of stock products to be added to the basket.
Stock tracking	Variation stock inheritance	Variations inherit stock quantity and status from the parent product unless configured separately.
Out of stock product visibility	Hide out of stock products from search and category pages	Enable a setting to hide out of stock products from search results and category pages on the website.
Out of stock product visibility	Out of stock products remain accessible by direct URL	Hidden out of stock products can still be accessed if visitors have the direct URL.
Stock reservation	Configure stock reservation timing	Choose when stock is reserved for visitors: not reserved, reserved at payment submission, or reserved when added to basket.
Stock reservation	Set stock reservation duration	Configure the length of time in minutes that stock is reserved for a visitor.
Stock reservation	Stock reserved only on completed orders by default	Stock is only reserved when an order is successfully completed unless reservation settings are enabled.
Stock reservation	Expired reservations do not remove items from basket	Expired stock reservations do not automatically remove products from visitor baskets but prevent checkout if out of stock.
Stock management page	View and edit SKU stock quantities	View all SKUs with current stock quantities and edit quantities directly in the stock management table.
Stock management page	Display stock alert levels	Show stock alert levels for SKUs when the Stock Alerts app is enabled.
Stock quantity updates	Update stock quantity via product editing	Change SKU stock quantities when creating or editing products in the admin system.
Stock quantity updates	Update stock quantity via API	Change stock quantities programmatically using the ShopWired API.
Importing stock	CSV identifier requirement	Use SKU codes as unique identifiers in the CSV file to ensure proper processing of stock imports.
Importing stock	Import stock quantities	Import a CSV file to update stock quantities for SKUs in bulk on the stock management page.
Importing stock	Cannot create new SKUs via import	The stock import system cannot create new SKU codes or products, only update existing stock quantities.
Exporting stock	Export stock quantities	Export a CSV file containing SKU and quantity columns for all SKUs in the ShopWired account.
Exporting stock	Include stock alert column	Include an additional Alert column in the stock export CSV if the Stock Alerts app is enabled.
SKU codes	Configure SKU codes via admin, import/export, or API	Set SKU codes when creating or editing products through the admin system, product import/export, or API.
SKU codes	SKU code length restrictions	SKU codes must be between 1 and 128 characters in length.
SKU codes	SKU code inheritance for variations	Variations inherit the SKU code of the parent product if no SKU code is set for the variation.
eBay stock updates	Send stock quantity updates to eBay	Send updated absolute stock quantities to eBay when stock is returned or changed for products linked to eBay listings, if stock updates to eBay are enabled.

Back in stock notifications

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Compatibility	Theme version support	Compatible with Version 3+ themes without manual setup; Version 1–2 themes require manual integration.
Visitor notification requests	Enable back in stock request form	Allow visitors to submit their name and email to receive an email when a product or variation is back in stock.
Notification request settings	Notification request lifetime	Configure how long a request remains valid before expiring (up to 365 days).
Notification sending	Daily send time	Set the daily time when the system checks requests and sends back‑in‑stock emails.
Notification request management	View requests	View a list of all requests, including visitor details, product/SKU, date/time, and status.
Notification request management	Bulk update request status	Bulk change request statuses to Not notified, Notified, or Expired.
Notification request management	Export requests	Export back in stock notification requests to a CSV file.

Stock on back order

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Global settings	Global out of stock quantity limit	Define a global limit for how far stock can go negative before the item can no longer be added to the basket.
Global settings	Default purchasability of out of stock products	Set the default for whether out of stock products are purchasable across the catalogue.
Product settings	Per-product out of stock quantity limit	Override the global limit by setting a specific negative stock limit for an individual product.
Product settings	Per-product purchasability when out of stock	Choose whether an individual product is purchasable when out of stock, or inherit the global default.
Product import/export	Import out of stock quantity limit	Use the Out Of Stock Quantity Limit column in product imports to set each product’s negative stock limit.
Product import/export	Import purchasability when out of stock	Use the Purchasable When Out Of Stock column in product imports to set each product’s status to Default, Yes, or No.

Stock alerts

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
App installation	Install stock alerts app	Install the Stock alerts app from the Apps section to enable stock alert functionality.
SKU requirement	Require SKU for stock alerts	A SKU must be set for a product or at least one of its variations to configure a stock alert.
Stock alert configuration	Configure stock alert level per product	Set a stock alert level individually for each product to trigger alerts when stock falls below the specified level.
Stock alert configuration	Configure stock alert level via Stock management page	Edit the alert level directly on the Stock management page for each product.
Stock alert configuration	Configure stock alert level via stock import	Include alert levels in the Alert column when importing stock levels.
Stock alert scope	Stock alert level applies to all variations	A product’s configured alert level applies to all of its variations.
Stock alert email	Daily stock alert email	Receive a daily email listing products and variations with stock below their configured alert levels.
Stock alert email	Configure stock alert email recipient	Set the email address that receives the daily stock alert email in notification settings.
Stock alert email	Customise stock alert email content	Customise the content of the stock alert email using the Stock alert email template in Website emails.
Stock alert email	Use product data in email template	Include product details (e.g., title, SKU, stock quantity, recent sales metrics) in the stock alert email template.
Stock alert email	Exclude inactive products from alerts	Inactive products are excluded from the stock alert email and do not trigger alerts.

Stock & price sync

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Sync configuration	Sync stock and price updates	Choose to sync stock quantities, prices, or both for products and product variations.
Sync timing	Automatic hourly sync	Automatically download and process CSV files from configured sources approximately every 60 minutes.
Manual upload	Upload CSV file for sync	Upload a CSV file from your device to perform a one‑off stock and price sync at any time.
Manual upload	Specify CSV column headings for upload	Enter the column headings for SKU codes, quantities and prices when uploading a CSV file manually.
HTTP settings	Enable HTTP source	Activate the HTTP source to start automatic syncing from the configured URL.
HTTP settings	Enter HTTP CSV file URL	Provide the URL of the CSV file to sync stock and price data via HTTP.
HTTP settings	Specify CSV column headings	Enter the column headings for SKU codes, quantities and prices in the HTTP CSV file.
HTTP settings	Test HTTP source connection	Test access to the HTTP CSV file and verify the column heading configuration.
FTP/SFTP settings	Enable FTP/SFTP source	Activate the FTP or SFTP source to start automatic syncing from the configured server.
FTP/SFTP settings	Configure FTP/SFTP connection	Enter host, port, username, password and file path to connect to an FTP or SFTP server for syncing.
FTP/SFTP settings	Specify CSV column headings	Enter the column headings for SKU codes, quantities and prices in the CSV file to map data correctly.
FTP/SFTP settings	Enable file deletion after download	Delete the CSV file from the server automatically after it has been downloaded.
FTP/SFTP settings	Test FTP/SFTP source connection	Test the FTP or SFTP connection and verify access to the CSV file and column heading configuration.
CSV file requirements	Use CSV files only	Only CSV files are supported for syncing; other file formats are not supported.
SKU configuration	Require SKU codes for syncing	Products and variations must have SKU codes configured to be included in stock or price syncs.
Cache management	Cache SKU stock and price values	Cache SKU stock quantities and prices to reduce API calls during syncing.
Cache management	Cache expiry	Cached stock and price values expire 24 hours after creation.
Cache management	Remove cached app data	Manually clear all cached SKU stock and price values once every 24 hours.
Cache management	Ignore cache on manual upload	Manual CSV uploads bypass the cache and update SKUs immediately.

Inter-account stock sync

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account roles	Define controller account	Designate one ShopWired account as the controller account where stock adjustments are made.
Account roles	Define replica accounts	Configure one or more ShopWired accounts as replica accounts that receive stock updates from the controller account.
App installation	Controller-only installation	Install and enable the inter-account stock sync app only on the controller ShopWired account; do not install it on replica accounts.
Replica account configuration	Enter API credentials for replica accounts	Configure replica accounts by entering their API key, API secret, and webhook secret into the controller account app settings.
Stock sync triggers	Adjust stock on controller account from replica orders	Automatically adjust stock levels on the controller account when an order is created on a replica account for matching SKUs.
Stock sync triggers	Adjust stock on replicas from completed orders	Automatically update stock levels on replica accounts when an order is completed on the controller account or a replica account.
Stock sync triggers	Adjust stock on replicas from controller edits	Automatically update stock levels on replica accounts when SKU quantities are edited on the controller account via product editing or stock management.
Stock sync triggers	Adjust stock on replicas from stock imports	Automatically update stock levels on replica accounts when a stock import is completed on the controller account.
Stock sync limitations	Exclude product import SKU quantity changes	Changes to SKU quantities made by product imports on the controller account are not synced to replica accounts.

Voucher codes

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Voucher code creation	Create voucher codes individually	Create new voucher codes one at a time with configurable settings.
Voucher code management	Edit existing voucher codes	Modify the settings and details of existing voucher codes.
Voucher code management	Delete voucher codes	Permanently delete voucher codes from the system.
Voucher code management	Activate or deactivate voucher codes	Enable or disable voucher codes to control their availability for use.
Voucher code management	Search voucher codes by code	Search voucher codes using the voucher code text.
Voucher code management	Filter voucher codes by date	Filter voucher codes by their valid from and valid to dates.
Voucher code management	Filter voucher codes by tag	Filter voucher codes by assigned tags.
Voucher code import/export	Import voucher codes in bulk	Import multiple voucher codes by uploading a CSV file.
Voucher code import/export	Export voucher codes for bulk editing	Export existing voucher codes to a CSV file for bulk editing.
Voucher code import/export	Bulk update voucher codes via CSV	Update multiple voucher codes by editing and re-importing a CSV file.
Voucher code import/export	Download voucher code import template	Download a CSV template for creating or editing voucher codes.
Voucher code organisation	Assign tags to voucher codes	Assign one or more tags to voucher codes for organisation and filtering.
Voucher code organisation	Add internal notes	Enter internal notes for voucher codes not visible to customers.
Voucher code usage limits	Set maximum uses per customer	Limit how many times an individual logged-in customer can use a voucher code.
Voucher code usage limits	Set maximum total uses	Limit the total number of times a voucher code can be used by all customers combined.
Voucher code validity	Set valid from date	Specify the start date and time from which the voucher code can be used.
Voucher code validity	Set expiry date	Specify the end date and time after which the voucher code cannot be used.
Voucher code application	Enable automatic application	Configure voucher codes to be applied automatically to the basket without manual entry.
Voucher code application	Single voucher code usage per basket	Restrict the basket to only one voucher code at a time.
Voucher code application	Display discount in basket totals	Show the voucher code discount in the discounts line total on the basket page.
Voucher code application	Voucher code entry on basket page	Allow visitors to enter voucher codes on the shopping basket page.
Voucher code application	Restrict voucher code entry by visitor type	Specify which visitor types may enter voucher codes on the website.
Voucher code targets	Set voucher code target to all orders	Apply voucher codes to any basket regardless of contents or value.
Voucher code targets	Set voucher code target to orders over a value	Apply voucher codes only to baskets with a grand total over a specified amount.
Voucher code targets	Set voucher code target to specific categories	Apply voucher codes only to baskets containing products in selected categories.
Voucher code targets	Set voucher code target to specific brands	Apply voucher codes only to baskets containing products from selected brands.
Voucher code targets	Set voucher code target to specific products	Apply voucher codes only to baskets containing selected products.
Voucher code targets	Apply discount to single quantity	Apply the discount once per product regardless of quantity in basket.
Voucher code targets	Apply discount to multiple quantities	Apply discount repeatedly for each unit of a product in the basket.
Voucher code exclusions	Exclude specific categories	Exclude selected leaf categories from voucher code applicability.
Voucher code exclusions	Exclude specific products	Exclude selected products from voucher code applicability when the target is not individual products.
Voucher code discount types	Create percentage discount voucher codes	Voucher codes that give a percentage discount on the order grand total applied to product base price.
Voucher code discount types	Create monetary discount voucher codes	Voucher codes that give a fixed monetary discount applied to the product base price.
Voucher code discount types	Create shipping discount voucher codes	Voucher codes that provide discounts on shipping costs, including free shipping or discounts on specific rates.
Voucher code discount application order	Apply vouchers sixth	Apply voucher discounts after multi-buy offers.
Voucher code import settings	Set voucher code	Specify the unique code customers enter at checkout.
Voucher code import settings	Use Voucher ID to update codes	Use Voucher ID in CSV to update existing codes.
Voucher code import settings	Leave Voucher ID blank for new codes	Leave Voucher ID empty in CSV to create new codes.
Voucher code import settings	Define discount type	Specify discount type as percent, amount, or shipping.
Voucher code import settings	Set discount value	Enter discount value according to discount type.
Voucher code import settings	Define target type	Specify target type such as all orders, orders over value, category, product or product SKU.
Voucher code import settings	Define target value	Enter the value related to the target type (e.g., min order value, category ID).
Voucher code import settings	Set active status	Mark voucher codes as active or inactive using Yes or No.
Voucher code import settings	Configure validity start date	Set voucher's valid from date (DD/MM/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY).
Voucher code import settings	Configure expiry date	Set voucher's expiry date or leave blank for no expiry.
Voucher code import settings	Set maximum uses	Specify maximum total uses of the voucher code.
Voucher code import settings	Set maximum uses per customer	Specify maximum uses per customer.
Voucher code import settings	Add internal tags	Add tags for internal reference, separated by commas.
Voucher code import settings	Add internal comments	Add internal notes not visible to customers.
Voucher code import settings	Enable dynamic amount	Enable voucher to apply to multiple quantities of the same product for amount discounts.
Voucher code import settings	Restrict to specific delivery rates	Specify delivery rate IDs to restrict voucher code applicability to certain delivery rates.
Voucher code import settings	Exclude specific categories	Specify category IDs to exclude from voucher applicability.
Voucher code import settings	Exclude specific products	Specify product IDs to exclude from voucher applicability.

Offers

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Offer management	Create new offers	Create new product offers within your ShopWired account.
Offer management	Edit existing offers	Edit existing offers from the offers table.
Offer management	Activate or deactivate offers	Temporarily enable or disable offers using the active setting.
Scheduling	Configure offer start date	Set the date and time from which the offer becomes available.
Scheduling	Configure offer end date	Set the date and time when the offer expires.
Scheduling	Create offers with indefinite duration	Run offers indefinitely without a set expiry date.
Settings	Set offer title and description	Enter a title and description for the offer for display on the website.
Conditions and targets	Define offer targets	Specify products, categories, or brands as targets with required minimum and maximum quantities.
Conditions and targets	Set minimum quantity per target	Set the minimum quantity of each target required in the basket to qualify.
Conditions and targets	Set maximum quantity per target	Limit the maximum quantity of each target that the offer can apply to.
Conditions and targets	Set product count requirement	Define the total number of qualifying products required to activate the offer.
Conditions and targets	Define product quantity offers	Create offers based on buying a specified quantity of the same product.
Conditions and targets	Define product type combination offers	Create offers requiring one item from each of multiple specified product types or categories.
Conditions and targets	Define mixed product and product type offers	Create offers requiring a mix of specific products and items from specified product types.
Conditions and targets	Define any product combination offers	Create offers based on purchasing any specified number of products from chosen product types.
Exclusions	Exclude specific products	Exclude selected individual products from an offer.
Exclusions	Exclude pre-order products	Exclude all or date-range pre-order products from an offer using ships-on date filters.
Discount types	Select discount type	Choose fixed price, percentage, or monetary discount for the offer.
Discount types	Configure fixed price discount	Set a fixed price for the qualifying combination of products.
Discount types	Configure percentage discount	Set a percentage discount, optionally with a maximum discount cap.
Discount types	Configure monetary discount	Set a fixed monetary amount to discount from the qualifying items.
Product consumption	Set product consumption order	Choose whether the offer consumes lowest- or highest-priced products first.
Multiple offers and restrictions	Allow products to be eligible for multiple offers	Permit products to qualify for multiple offers, but only one offer applies per basket item.
Multiple offers and restrictions	Apply earliest created offer when multiple apply	When multiple offers could apply, the earliest created offer is applied.
Multiple offers and restrictions	Restrict products to a single discount	Prevent a product from receiving more than one discount at a time (offer, multi-buy, or voucher).
Application and website display	Automatic offer application	Automatically apply offers to the basket when qualifying conditions are met.
Application and website display	Built-in offer display on Version 4 and 5 themes	Offers are automatically displayed on Version 4 and Version 5 themes.
Application and website display	Display offer information on product pages	Show offer titles and descriptions on individual product pages.
Application and website display	Display offer information on product listings	Show offer details wherever the product appears (e.g. category and search pages).
Application and website display	Display applied offer information in basket	Show details of the offer applied to products within the basket.
Admin order display	Show discounted product prices	Display product prices on orders inclusive of applied offer discounts.
Admin order display	Show applied offers on orders	Display applied offer titles and discount amounts beneath the order grand total in the admin.
Limits	Maximum excluded products	Exclude up to 50 individual products from a single offer.
Limits	Maximum offer targets	Assign up to 50 targets of the same type per offer.
Limits	Maximum active offers checked	Only the first 40 active offers are checked for applicability to a basket.
Discount calculation rules	Inject bulk pricing and bulk discounts into base price	Bulk pricing and bulk discounts are injected into the base price for subsequent calculations.
Discount calculation rules	Include subscription and multi-buy discounts in price calculation	Subscription and multi-buy discounts are incorporated into the price calculation.
Discount calculation rules	Apply other discounts separately	Vouchers, referral discounts, and reward points are applied separately without modifying the base price.
Discount application order	Apply product bulk pricing first	Product bulk pricing is applied before other discounts.
Discount application order	Apply product bulk discounts second	Product bulk discounts are applied after bulk pricing but before other discounts.
Discount application order	Apply offers third	Offers are applied after bulk pricing and bulk discounts.

Sales

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Sales management	View sales	View all existing sales in a list on the sales management page.
Sales management	Activate or deactivate sale	Toggle a sale’s active status to start or pause it without deleting.
Sale creation	Set sale start date/time	Schedule when a sale begins, or start it immediately.
Sale creation	Set sale expiry date/time	Schedule when a sale ends, or set it to never expire.
Sale creation	Select sale target type	Choose to apply a sale to all products, a single category, a brand, or a single product.
Sale targeting rules	Single target per sale	Each sale can target only one category, brand, or product; use multiple sales for multiple targets.
Discount configuration	Percentage discount	Define a percentage reduction applied to product and product variation prices.
Pricing configuration	Custom sale price per product or variation	Set a fixed sale price on individual products or variations to override normal pricing.
Pricing rules	Custom sale price precedence	A custom sale price takes precedence and is not further reduced by percentage sales.
Display	Sale price display on storefront	Sale prices are shown wherever the product appears; presentation follows the website theme.

Multi-buy offers

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Offer types	2for1 offers	Enable 2for1 offers where the cheapest product is free when two are purchased.
Offer types	3for2 offers	Enable 3for2 offers where the cheapest product is free when three are purchased.
Product eligibility	Mark product as 2for1 eligible	Mark a product as eligible for 2for1 offers in the product pricing multi-buy offers tab.
Product eligibility	Mark product as 3for2 eligible	Mark a product as eligible for 3for2 offers in the product pricing multi-buy offers tab.
Product import/export	Import/export multi-buy eligibility	Set 2for1 and 3for2 eligibility for products in bulk via product import/export.
Offer application	Apply offers across eligible products	Multi-buy offers apply across all products marked as eligible for the offer type.
Offer application	2for1 and 3for2 operate independently	Products can be eligible for both 2for1 and 3for2 offers simultaneously.
Offer application	3for2 precedence over 2for1	When both apply to the same basket, 3for2 takes precedence over 2for1.
Discount application order	Apply after referral discounts	Multi-buy discounts are applied after referral system discounts.
Visitor restrictions	Restrict multi-buy offers by visitor type	Choose which visitor types have access to multi-buy offers in product settings.
Frontend display	Multi-buy offer indicator	Show an indicator on category/search results pages, product pages and the shopping basket for products with multi-buy offers; styling follows the website theme.

Product bulk pricing & bulk discounts

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Bulk discounts	Configure bulk discount rules	Create discount rules that apply across all products, specific products, brands, or categories based on basket quantity.
Bulk discounts	Quantity range options	Define quantity thresholds using exact numbers, ranges, or “+” values (e.g. 3, 3–5, 3+).
Bulk discounts	Percentage discount setting	Set a percentage discount to apply when quantity conditions are met.
Bulk discounts	Multiple of same product rule	Restrict discounts to purchases of multiple quantities of the same product or variation.
Bulk discounts	Variation-specific discounts	Require the same variation combination in the basket for the discount to apply.
Bulk discounts	Apply by visitor type	Choose which visitor types (e.g. trade or retail) bulk discount rules apply to in B2B settings.
Bulk discounts	Activate/deactivate rules	Enable or disable individual bulk discount rules without deleting them.
Bulk discounts	Theme display support	Display bulk discount tables on Version 3+ themes using built‑in theme settings.
Bulk pricing	Configure product-level pricing rules	Set per‑unit prices based on basket quantities for individual products.
Bulk pricing	Variation-level rules	Configure bulk pricing for specific product variations individually.
Bulk pricing	Product editor rules	Add quantity and price‑per‑unit rules directly in the product editor.
Bulk pricing	Bulk pricing import/export	Manage bulk pricing rules via CSV import/export using SKU, quantity, and price.
Bulk pricing	Visitor type restrictions	Control which visitor groups bulk pricing rules apply to through B2B settings.
Bulk pricing	Display bulk pricing tables	Enable bulk pricing tables on Version 3+ themes without additional code.

Checkout customisation

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Checkout delivery configuration	Specific delivery prices per country	Configure distinct delivery prices for each delivery country when using shipping on checkout.
Checkout delivery configuration	Switch between shipping on basket and shipping on checkout	Choose whether customers select delivery rates on the basket page or after entering a shipping address at checkout.
Checkout delivery configuration	Prompt delivery rate selection after address entry	Require customers to choose a delivery rate on the checkout page after providing their shipping address.
Checkout delivery configuration	Shipping on checkout configuration	Enable customers to select a delivery rate during checkout, post address entry.
Checkout delivery configuration	Shipping on basket configuration	Enable customers to select a delivery rate on the shopping basket page before entering their shipping address.
Checkout delivery configuration	Postcode entry with shipping on basket	Prompt postcode entry after delivery country selection on the basket page when using the postcode shipping app.
Checkout delivery configuration	UK postcode delivery app integration with shipping on checkout	Automatically determine available delivery rates using the visitor’s shipping postcode with the UK postcode delivery app during checkout.
Checkout delivery display	Display shipping and taxes calculated at checkout message	Show a message on the basket page indicating shipping and taxes are calculated at checkout.
Buttons customisation	Configure post-checkout account creation button text	Set the text prompting guests to create an account after checkout.
Buttons customisation	Configure proceed to next step button text	Set the text for buttons moving customers to the next checkout step.
Buttons customisation	Configure save address button text	Set the text displayed when visitors save a new address.
Buttons customisation	Configure create new address button text	Set the text for logged-in visitors creating a new address.
Buttons customisation	Configure forgotten password link text	Set the text for password assistance links.
Buttons customisation	Configure account creation button text	Set the text prompting account creation during checkout.
Buttons customisation	Configure guest checkout button text	Set the text on the guest checkout button when guest checkout is enabled.
Buttons customisation	Configure account login button text	Set the text on the login form button during checkout.
Fonts customisation	Select checkout font	Choose the font used on checkout pages from a curated list of Google Fonts.
Colour customisation	Set primary button background colour	Configure the background colour of primary buttons on checkout pages.
Colour customisation	Set primary button text colour	Configure the text colour of primary buttons on checkout pages.
Colour customisation	Set secondary button background colour	Configure the background colour of secondary buttons on checkout pages.
Colour customisation	Set secondary button text colour	Configure the text colour of secondary buttons on checkout pages.
Colour customisation	Set field border colour	Configure the border colour of all checkout fields.
Colour customisation	Set field text colour	Configure the text colour within checkout input fields.
Colour customisation	Set field label colour	Configure the colour of all checkout field labels.
Colour customisation	Set failed validation border colour	Configure the border colour of checkout fields that fail validation.
Colour customisation	Set checkbox background colour	Configure the background colour of all checkboxes on checkout pages.
Colour customisation	Set checkbox tick colour	Configure the tick icon colour within checkboxes.
Colour customisation	Set box borders and lines colour	Configure the colour of borders around boxes in checkout steps.
Colour customisation	Set form box background colour	Configure the background colour of boxes containing form fields on checkout pages.
Colour customisation	Set content background colour	Configure the background colour of the main checkout content area.
Colour customisation	Set header background colour	Configure the background colour of the checkout header.
Colour customisation	Set order confirmation social icon colour	Configure the colour of social media sharing icons on the order confirmation page.
Colour customisation	Set order confirmation social text colour	Configure the colour of social media sharing text on the order confirmation page.
Colour customisation	Set payment gateway name colour	Configure the display name colour of payment gateways.
Colour customisation	Set payment gateway box background colour	Configure the background colour of the box containing payment gateway options.
Colour customisation	Set edit address link colour	Configure the colour of the link and icon used to edit stored addresses.
Colour customisation	Set instruction text colour	Configure the colour of additional instructional text on checkout pages.
Colour customisation	Set section title colour	Configure the colour of section titles on checkout pages.
Colour customisation	Set inactive step number colour	Configure the colour of inactive step numbers in the progress indicator.
Colour customisation	Set inactive step text colour	Configure the colour of inactive step text in the progress indicator.
Colour customisation	Set active step number colour	Configure the colour of the active step number in the progress indicator.
Colour customisation	Set active step text colour	Configure the colour of the active step text in the progress indicator.
Colour customisation	Set progress indicator border colour	Configure the border colour around step numbers in the progress indicator.
Colour customisation	Set phone number colour	Configure the colour of the phone number text in the header.
Colour customisation	Set phone icon colour	Configure the colour of the phone icon displayed in the header alongside the phone number.
Colour customisation	Set "Need Help?" text colour	Configure the colour of the "Need Help?" text in the header when a phone number is displayed.
Colour customisation	Set company name colour in header	Configure the colour of the company name in the header if no logo is uploaded.
Colour customisation	Set secure checkout text colour	Configure the colour of the "secure checkout" text in the header.
Colour customisation	Set secure checkout icon colour	Configure the colour of the secure checkout padlock icon in the header.
Header design	Display company logo or name	Upload and display a company logo or name in the checkout header.
Header design	Upload separate checkout header logo	Upload a logo specifically for display in the checkout header, distinct from the main site logo.
Header design	Display telephone number in header	Configure and display a telephone number in the checkout header section.
Header design	Display secure checkout message	Enable display of a "secure checkout" message with padlock icon in the checkout header.
Checkout design	Minimal checkout header	Display a minimal header combining secure checkout mark, company logo or name, optional phone number, and return to basket link.
Checkout design	No footer in checkout	No footer is displayed on the checkout pages to minimise distractions.
Forms	Labelled form fields	Display clearly labelled form fields with required fields marked by an asterisk.
Progress indicator	Display progress indicator	Show a progress indicator during checkout highlighting the current step.
Order summary	Display order summary	Show a summary of the customer’s order including products and totals at each checkout stage.
Checkout steps	Shipping address entry	Collect or select the shipping address during checkout.
Checkout steps	Billing address entry	Collect or select the billing address during checkout.
Checkout steps	Optional account login step	Enable or disable the account login, registration, or guest checkout step during checkout.
Checkout steps	Payment step	Collect payment information during checkout.
Checkout steps	Order confirmation step	Display order confirmation page after payment completion.
Express checkout	Enable Apple Pay & Google Pay express checkout	Offer Apple Pay and Google Pay as express checkout options when using ShopWired Payments.
Express checkout	Restrict to single address selection	Limit express checkout customers to one address for both billing and delivery.
Express checkout	Use wallet-stored address for orders	Allow express checkout customers to select an address saved in their Apple Pay or Google Pay wallet.
Express checkout	Display digital wallet option on address selection page	Show Apple Pay and Google Pay options on the address selection or entry page for logged-in customers.
Express checkout	Display digital wallet option under guest checkout	Show Apple Pay and Google Pay options beneath guest checkout when login is requested during checkout.
Express checkout	Click & collect integration with express checkout	Require selection of a click & collect location before continuing with express checkout using Apple Pay or Google Pay.
Standard checkout	Enable Apple Pay & Google Pay on payment page	Display Apple Pay and Google Pay options on the payment method page when ShopWired Payments or Stripe is selected.
Standard checkout	Use wallet-stored payment method	Allow customers to select a saved card from Apple Pay or Google Pay wallets during standard checkout payment.
Text customisation for duties	Customise text when duties are optional and prepayable	Display custom text with checkbox allowing customers to prepay customs and duties.
Text customisation for duties	Customise text when duties cannot be calculated	Display custom text with mandatory acknowledgement checkbox when customs & duties cannot be calculated.
Text customisation for duties	Customise text when duties are display only	Display custom text with mandatory acknowledgement checkbox when duties cannot be prepaid.
Text customisation for duties	Customise text when duties are mandatory and included	Display custom text without a checkbox when customs & duties are always included in order total.
Advanced customisation	Add custom CSS	Add custom CSS code to the checkout for advanced visual customisations.
Advanced customisation	Add custom JavaScript	Add custom JavaScript code to the checkout to enhance functionality.
Behaviour customisation	Customise checkout questions and prompts	Configure which questions customers are asked and whether login prompts appear during checkout.
Browser compatibility	Support recent major browsers	Checkout supports recent versions of Google Chrome, Firefox, Safari (macOS/iOS), Microsoft Edge, and Opera.

Delivery zones

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Delivery zone types	Multi-country delivery zones	Configure delivery zones that cover multiple countries, including Rest of the World, EU VAT zone, European Countries, and Royal Mail zones.
Delivery zone types	Royal Mail delivery zones	Use six predefined delivery zones named according to Royal Mail's system, corresponding to specific country groups.
Delivery zone management	Create delivery zone	Create a new delivery zone by selecting from predefined zones and configuring VAT charging options if applicable.
Delivery zone management	Bulk create delivery zones	Create multiple delivery zones in bulk using the delivery rates import/export system.
Delivery zone management	Delete delivery zone	Delete a delivery zone and all associated delivery rates permanently.
Delivery zone precedence	Delivery zone order of precedence	Determine which delivery zone applies when a country is included in multiple zones, prioritising specific country zones first, then EU VAT zone, European Countries, Royal Mail zones, and Rest of the World last.
Multi-country zones	EU VAT zone countries	Configure delivery rates for all countries within the EU VAT zone.
Multi-country zones	European Countries zone countries	Configure delivery rates for all countries on the European continent included in the European Countries delivery zone.
Multi-country zones	Royal Mail Europe Zone 1 countries	Configure delivery rates for countries in Royal Mail Europe Zone 1.
Multi-country zones	Royal Mail Europe Zone 2 countries	Configure delivery rates for countries in Royal Mail Europe Zone 2.
Multi-country zones	Royal Mail Europe Zone 3 countries	Configure delivery rates for countries in Royal Mail Europe Zone 3.
Multi-country zones	Royal Mail World Zone 1 countries	Configure delivery rates for countries in Royal Mail World Zone 1.
Multi-country zones	Royal Mail World Zone 2 countries	Configure delivery rates for countries in Royal Mail World Zone 2.
Multi-country zones	Royal Mail World Zone 3 country	Configure delivery rates for the United States in Royal Mail World Zone 3.
Multi-country zones	Channel Islands zone countries	Configure delivery rates for Jersey and Guernsey in the Channel Islands delivery zone.
Multi-country zones	Multi-country delivery zone rate display options	Choose whether multi-country delivery zone rates display only when no specific country rates exist or always display alongside specific country rates.
Rest of the World zone	Configure Rest of the World countries	Edit the list of countries included in the Rest of the World delivery zone by selecting all countries or specified countries only.
VAT settings	Configure VAT charging per delivery zone	Set whether visitors from a delivery zone are charged VAT, with individual VAT settings per zone.
VAT settings	Set VAT rate per delivery zone	Configure the VAT rate applied to customers from a specific delivery zone.
VAT settings	Set VAT threshold per delivery zone	Define a VAT threshold for a delivery zone to control when VAT is charged.
Default delivery country	Set default delivery country	Specify a default delivery country for the shopping basket when using the shipping on basket checkout configuration.

Delivery rates

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Delivery zones	Create delivery zones	Define countries or territories where delivery is offered.
Delivery zones	Auto-create delivery zones on import	Automatically create delivery zones during delivery rate import if not already configured.
Delivery rates	Create and manage delivery rates	Create, edit, and manage delivery rates within delivery zones.
Delivery rates	Unlimited delivery rates per zone	Configure unlimited delivery rates for each delivery zone.
Delivery rates	Create delivery rates	Specify delivery charges and options for each delivery zone.
Delivery rates	Delivery rate name	Set the display name for the delivery rate shown on the website and in the account.
Delivery rates	Delivery cost	Enter the cost of the delivery rate including or excluding VAT according to account settings.
Delivery rates	Zero rated for VAT	Mark delivery rate as zero rated or exempt from VAT for tax purposes.
Delivery rates	Package weight	Define package weight added to basket weight for weight-based delivery rates.
Delivery rates	Criteria selection	Choose if the delivery rate applies based on basket total value or basket total weight.
Delivery rates	Basket value/weight from	Set minimum basket value or weight for the delivery rate to apply.
Delivery rates	Basket value/weight to	Set maximum basket value or weight for the delivery rate, or select unlimited.
Delivery rates	Enable maximum value for weight based rates	Enable setting a maximum basket value for weight-based delivery rates.
Delivery rates	Enable maximum weight for value based rates	Enable setting a maximum basket weight for value-based delivery rates.
Delivery rate selection	Visitor selects delivery rate	Allow visitors to select preferred delivery rate on basket page or at checkout.
Default rates	Set default delivery rate per zone	Pre-select a single default delivery rate after delivery zone selection.
Default rates	Fallback to cheapest rate	Automatically select cheapest delivery rate if default is not applicable.
Delivery rate availability	Configure delivery rates unavailable with products	Make delivery rates unavailable when specific products are in the basket.
Delivery rate availability	Configure delivery rates for trade customers only	Restrict delivery rates to logged-in trade customers only.
Visitor types	Configure visitor access	Select visitor types (not logged in, standard, trade) that can access each delivery rate.
Wholesale delivery	Configure wholesale delivery rates	Set separate delivery rates specifically for trade customers.
Multiple rates	Configure multiple delivery rates per zone	Create multiple delivery rates for the same delivery zone, including overlapping basket scenarios.
Multiple rates	Include only specified products for delivery rates	Delivery rates available only when all basket products are specified for that rate.
Multiple rates	Exclude products from delivery rates	Make delivery rates unavailable if specified excluded products are in the basket.
Delivery rate exceptions	Include or exclude products from delivery rates	Exclude or include specific products from particular delivery rates.
Product delivery charges	Exclude products from delivery calculations	Use ‘no delivery address required’ to exclude products (e.g. digital goods) from delivery charges.
Product delivery charges	Configure free delivery for products	Mark products as eligible for free delivery to exclude from delivery rate calculations.
Product delivery charges	Configure specific delivery charges for products	Assign specific delivery charges to individual products overriding standard rates.
Location-based delivery	Configure delivery rates by UK postcode	Restrict delivery rates using the UK postcode shipping app to specific UK postcodes.
Location-based delivery	Configure delivery rates by US state	Restrict delivery rates to specific US states.
US delivery rates	Select applicable US states	Choose one or more US states for which a delivery rate applies.
US delivery rates	Select all US states	Configure delivery rate to cover all US states, Washington D.C., and overseas territories.
US delivery rates	Select contiguous states	Configure delivery rate available only to contiguous US states.
US delivery rates	Select all other states	Configure delivery rate for any US state not covered by other rates.
UK postcode shipping	UK Mainland postcode support	Support delivery rates for a wide range of UK Mainland postcode areas and districts.
UK postcode shipping	Channel Islands postcode support	Support delivery rates for Channel Islands postcode areas "G" and "JE".
UK postcode shipping	Isle of Man postcode support	Support delivery rates for Isle of Man postcode districts "IM1" to "IM99".
UK postcode shipping	Isle of Wight postcode support	Support delivery rates for Isle of Wight postcode districts "PO30" to "PO41".
UK postcode shipping	Scottish Highlands and Islands postcode support	Support delivery rates for specified Scottish Highlands and Islands postcode areas.
UK postcode shipping	Northern Ireland postcode support	Support delivery rates using the Northern Ireland "BT" postcode area.
UK postcode shipping	Postcode area or district matching	Specify postcode area (e.g. "AA") or district (e.g. "AA9A") for delivery rates.
UK postcode shipping	Postcode entry for delivery rates	Enter multiple UK postcodes separated by commas when creating or editing rates.
UK postcode shipping	Create delivery rates for specific UK postcodes	Create delivery rates applying only to specified UK postcodes within the UK delivery zone.
UK postcode shipping	Use ALL postcode value	Use "ALL" to make rate available for any UK postcode entered.
UK postcode shipping	Use ALLEXCEPT postcode value	Use "ALLEXCEPT" to make rate available for any UK postcode not assigned to other rates.
UK postcode shipping	Postcode matching logic	Match visitor postcode outward code with postcode area or district configured for the rate.
UK postcode shipping	Postcode configuration limited to UK zone	Restrict postcode configuration to the United Kingdom delivery zone only.
UK postcode shipping	London postcode configuration	Configure delivery rates for London by full postcode area or district (e.g. "A" or "A9A"), not partial districts.
UK postcode shipping	Restriction on ALL and ALLEXCEPT	Prevent configuring a delivery rate with both "ALL" and "ALLEXCEPT" simultaneously.
UK postcode shipping	Shipping on checkout postcode matching	Automatically derive available delivery rates from visitor’s UK postcode entered at checkout.
UK postcode shipping	Shipping on basket postcode entry	Prompt visitors to enter postcode on basket page to select matching delivery rates.
Import and export	Import and export delivery rates	Use the import/export system to manage large numbers of delivery rates via CSV files.
Import file format	CSV file import	Import delivery rates using CSV files saved from spreadsheet software.
Import template	Use CSV import template	Download and use a CSV template to prepare delivery rates for bulk import.
Bulk editing	Edit delivery rates in bulk via CSV	Export delivery rates to CSV, modify, and re-import to update multiple rates.
Bulk export	Export delivery rates in bulk	Export existing delivery rates to a CSV file for bulk editing or backup.
Bulk import	Import delivery rates in bulk	Import multiple delivery rates at once via CSV to create new rates in the account.
Import columns	Set delivery rate ID for updates	Use ID column in CSV to update existing delivery rates; leave blank to create new rates.
Import columns	Set delivery rate name	Enter display name for each delivery rate.
Import columns	Define delivery zone name	Specify exact delivery zone name for the rate in CSV import.
Import columns	Set delivery cost	Enter cost of the delivery rate according to VAT settings.
Import columns	Define price/weight range	Set 'From' and 'To' values for delivery rate price or weight range.
Import columns	Set criteria type	Define delivery rate criteria as "By Price" or "By Weight".
Import columns	Include package weight	Specify package weight for weight-based delivery rates.
Import columns	Set maximum value	For price-based rates enter maximum weight; for weight-based rates enter maximum price.
Import columns	Enable or disable rates	Mark delivery rates active or inactive by entering "Yes" or "No".
Import columns	Specify product IDs	Enter product IDs to qualify or exclude products from delivery rates when using Delivery Rate Exceptions.
Import columns	Include or exclude products	Use Included/Excluded column to specify product qualification for delivery rates in CSV.
Import columns	Enter applicable US states	Specify US states for delivery rates where applicable.
Import columns	Enter applicable postcodes	Specify UK postcodes for delivery rates when using UK postcode shipping feature.
Duty prepayment method	Configure delivery rate duty prepayment method	Set delivery rate to support DDP, PDDP, or no duty prepayment for customs & duties calculation.
Duty prepayment method	Use duty prepayment method in delivery rate import	Specify DDP, PDDP, or No in Duty Prepayment Method column when importing delivery rates in bulk.
Delivery settings	Apply price based delivery rates on subtotal excluding discounts	Base price-based delivery rates on product subtotal excluding discounts.
Delivery settings	Apply price based delivery rates on subtotal including discounts	Base price-based delivery rates on product subtotal including discounts.

Delivery rate import

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Delivery rate import	Bulk create delivery rates	Use a CSV import to create multiple delivery rates at once.
Delivery rate import	Bulk edit delivery rates	Export existing delivery rates, update them in a CSV file, and re-import to apply changes.
Delivery rate import	Auto-create delivery zones	Automatically create delivery zones during import if they do not already exist.
Delivery rate import	Price or weight criteria	Define delivery rate rules using either price-based or weight-based criteria.
Delivery rate import	Range configuration	Set start and end ranges for price or weight, including support for open-ended ranges.
Delivery rate import	Maximum constraint	For price-based rates, set a maximum weight; for weight-based rates, set a maximum price.
Delivery rate import	Package weight	Specify package weight to determine eligibility for weight-based delivery rates.
Delivery rate import	Postcode restrictions	Specify UK postcodes to restrict where a delivery rate applies.
Delivery rate import	State restrictions	Specify US states to restrict where a delivery rate applies.
Delivery rate import	Cost configuration	Set the delivery rate cost, respecting the store’s VAT settings.
Delivery rate import	Zero-rated VAT option	Mark a delivery rate as VAT exempt during import.
Delivery rate import	Enable/disable rates	Set delivery rates as active or inactive during import.
Delivery rate import	Include/exclude products	With the Delivery Rate Exceptions app, specify products included in or excluded from a rate.
Delivery rate import	Product ID mapping	Assign product IDs to delivery rates for inclusion or exclusion rules.

Specific delivery prices

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
General	Specific delivery price per product	Set a specific delivery price or free delivery for individual products.
Shipping on checkout configuration	Per‑zone specific delivery pricing	Configure specific delivery prices separately for each delivery country/zone when using shipping on checkout.
Shipping on checkout configuration	Free delivery per zone	Mark a product as free delivery within selected delivery zones.
Shipping on checkout configuration	Catch‑all zone price	Set a fallback specific delivery price for any delivery zones not individually configured.
Shipping on checkout configuration	Charge once per product per zone	Option to charge the product’s specific delivery price only once per order (not per quantity) within each applicable zone.
Shipping on basket configuration	Single specific price for all zones	Set one specific delivery price that applies to all delivery destinations when using shipping on basket.
Shipping on basket configuration	Free delivery (basket mode)	Mark a product as free delivery when using shipping on basket.
Shipping on basket configuration	Charge once per product	Option to charge the product’s specific delivery price only once per order (not per quantity).
Basket behaviour	Exclude specific‑price products from delivery rate options	Delivery rates shown exclude products that have specific delivery prices configured.
Basket behaviour	Require delivery rate selection for mixed baskets	If a basket contains items with and without specific delivery prices, the customer must select a delivery rate for the non‑specific items.
Basket behaviour	Skip delivery rate selection for specific‑price‑only baskets	If all items have specific delivery prices, the customer is not asked to choose a delivery rate.
Product import/export	Import per‑zone specific prices (checkout mode)	Import specific delivery prices for multiple delivery zones using the dedicated per‑zone columns when shipping on checkout is enabled.
Product import/export	Import single specific price (basket mode)	Import one specific delivery price for products when using shipping on basket.
Product import/export	Import free delivery values	Import free delivery by entering “Free” in the specific delivery price column(s).
Product import/export	Import single‑delivery‑cost flag	Import the flag that determines whether to charge a product’s specific delivery price once per order or per quantity.

UK postcode shipping

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
UK postcode shipping	Restrict delivery rates by postcode	Configure delivery rates that apply only to specified UK postcodes within the UK delivery zone.
UK postcode shipping	Configure postcodes	Enter multiple postcodes separated by commas, using postcode areas (e.g. AB) or districts (e.g. AB10).
UK postcode shipping	Postcode matching	Match customer postcodes by area or district to determine applicable delivery rates.
UK postcode shipping	ALL parameter	Set a delivery rate to apply to all UK postcodes using the ALL parameter.
UK postcode shipping	ALLEXCEPT parameter	Set a delivery rate to apply to all UK postcodes except those already assigned to another delivery rate using the ALLEXCEPT parameter.
UK postcode shipping	Regional postcode support	Configure delivery rates for specific UK regions such as Northern Ireland, Scottish Highlands, Isle of Wight, Isle of Man, and Channel Islands.
UK postcode shipping	London postcode handling	Configure delivery rates for London by postcode area or full district.

Delivery rate inclusions and exclusions

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Delivery rate inclusions	Include products for a delivery rate	Make a delivery rate available only when the basket contains only the selected included products.
Delivery rate inclusions	Inclusion limit per rate	Include up to 50 products per delivery rate.
Delivery rate exclusions	Exclude products from a delivery rate	Make a delivery rate unavailable when any excluded product is in the basket.
Delivery rate exclusions	Exclusion limit per rate	Exclude up to 50 products per delivery rate.
Bulk configuration	CSV import for inclusions and exclusions	Bulk-manage delivery rate product inclusions or exclusions using a CSV with Included/Excluded and Product IDs columns.
Bulk configuration	CSV product ID format	List multiple product IDs separated by commas in the Product IDs column.
Bulk configuration	CSV value for inclusion status	Set the Included/Excluded status in the CSV to define whether products are included or excluded for the rate.

Wholesale delivery

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Requirements	Require Trade accounts app for wholesale delivery	Wholesale delivery is available only when the Trade accounts app is installed on the ShopWired account.
Setup	Activate wholesale delivery feature	Enable wholesale delivery to apply specific delivery charging rules for trade customers.
Scope	Apply wholesale delivery to all trade customers and orders	Wholesale delivery rules apply to all trade customers and to orders placed on the website or created through the ShopWired account.
Charging rules	Set fixed delivery cost for trade customers	Specify a fixed delivery charge that applies to all trade customers regardless of basket contents or weight.
Charging rules	Set free delivery order value threshold	Set a basket value threshold above which trade customers receive free delivery.

Click & collect

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Activation	Enable click & collect feature	Enable the click & collect option on your checkout via Delivery & billing settings in the checkout design and display area.
Delivery zones	Add click & collect delivery zone	Add a dedicated Click & collect delivery zone to activate and scope click & collect on your website.
Delivery rates	Configure delivery rates for click & collect	Create and assign one or more delivery rates to the Click & collect delivery zone for use at checkout.
Locations	Add click & collect locations	Add one or more click & collect locations with a name and address (1st line, town/city, postcode).
Locations	Assign locations to delivery rates	Configure each click & collect location to be available for all delivery rates or only specified click & collect delivery rates.
Activation	Enable location search	Allow visitors to search for their nearest click & collect location by postcode, town, or city on the checkout page.
Delivery integration	Prompt location selection by delivery option	Prompt customers to select a click & collect location only when they choose the click & collect delivery option.
Location selection	Postcode or town entry	Allow customers to enter their postcode or town/city to find nearby click & collect locations.
Location selection	Display click & collect locations	Show available click & collect locations ordered by distance for selection.
Location selection	Display location list without search	When location search is disabled, display a list of all click & collect locations for visitors to select from.
Location selection	Preselect single location	When search is disabled and only one location exists, automatically preselect that location for visitors.
Location selection	Populate shipping address from location	Automatically populate the order’s shipping address with the address of the selected click & collect location.

Transaction fees

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
App installation	Install transaction fees app	Enable charging transaction fees at checkout by installing the Transaction Fees app.
Configuration	Configure transaction fee per payment gateway	Set a percentage transaction fee for each enabled payment gateway in your ShopWired account.
Configuration	Configure transaction fee for offline payment	Set a percentage transaction fee specifically for the Offline Payment method.
Configuration	Configure transaction fee decimal precision	Enter percentage fees with up to two decimal places.
Calculation	Transaction fee calculation method	Calculate the fee by applying the configured percentage to the order grand total.
Restrictions	Payment gateways restricted from transaction fees	Transaction fees cannot be applied to PayPal, Klarna, or ShopWired Payments.
Messaging	Display transaction fee instruction text	Show checkout instruction text to inform customers about transaction fees before payment.
Order confirmation	Display transaction fee in order confirmation email	Order confirmation emails can include an itemised transaction fee.
Invoice PDF	Display transaction fee in order invoice PDF	Order invoice PDFs can include the transaction fee.

Basket rules

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Rule creation and management	Create basket rules	Create rules to automatically add products to a visitor's basket based on the current basket contents.
Rule creation and management	Activate or deactivate rules	Temporarily switch a basket rule on or off without deleting it.
Rule creation and management	Delete basket rules	Permanently remove an existing basket rule.
Scheduling	Set rule start date	Set the date from which a basket rule becomes active.
Scheduling	Set rule end date	Set the date after which a basket rule is inactive.
Condition basis	Use grand total including VAT	Use the basket grand total including VAT, including shipping and after discounts, as the basis for rule conditions.
Condition basis	Use grand total excluding VAT	Use the basket grand total excluding VAT, including shipping and after discounts, as the basis for rule conditions.
Condition basis	Use subtotal including VAT	Use the basket subtotal including VAT, after discounts, as the basis for rule conditions.
Condition basis	Use subtotal excluding VAT	Use the basket subtotal excluding VAT, after discounts, as the basis for rule conditions.
Conditions	Set amount threshold	Set the monetary threshold used by under/over amount conditions.
Conditions	Apply to all baskets	Apply default products to all visitor baskets regardless of basket value.
Conditions	Apply to baskets over a fixed amount	Apply default products only when the basket total is over a specified amount.
Conditions	Apply to baskets under a fixed amount	Apply default products only when the basket total is under a specified amount.
Default products	Select default products	Select one or more products to be automatically added to the basket when a rule matches.
Default products	Add multiple default products	Add multiple default products within a single basket rule.
Default products	Set custom price for default products	Assign a custom price, including free, for default products added by a rule.
Default products	Exclude products with variations	Products with variations cannot be selected as default products in basket rules.
Order calculations	Default product custom pricing excluded from order discount total	Custom pricing on default products added by a basket rule is excluded from the order's discount total calculation.

Customs & duties (landed cost calculator)

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Setup	Enable landed cost calculator	Activate or deactivate landed cost calculations for deliveries to the US, Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands.
Duty collection settings	Duty prepayment methods	Choose DDP, PDDP or no prepayment, configurable per delivery rate.
Duty collection settings	Collection requirement	Set duties as mandatory, optional with a checkbox, or display-only with acknowledgement at checkout.
Duty collection settings	Other delivery charges	Control how duties apply when using specific delivery prices or wholesale delivery rates.
Duty collection settings	Uplift adjustments	Add percentage or fixed uplifts to duty totals to recover handling or overhead costs.
Product data requirements	HS code requirement	Require HS tariff codes on products for duty calculation.
Product data requirements	Country of origin requirement	Require country of origin on products for duty calculation.
Product coverage	Product extras support	Include extras in duty calculations when HS codes and origins are set for both parent products and extras.
Product coverage	Product bundles support	Calculate duties for bundles by allocating prices to component products using percentage contributions.
Product coverage	Excluded products	Automatically exclude digital products and gift vouchers from duty calculations.
Calculation rules	PDDP tariff table	Use predefined tariff percentages by country of origin for PDDP calculations.
Calculation rules	PDDP product exemptions	Exclude specified HS codes (e.g. books, antiques, steel products) from PDDP duty calculations.
Calculation rules	Calculation limits	Skip duty calculation when required product data (HS code, origin, bundle percentages) is missing or invalid.
Checkout & display	Checkout display	Show customs and duties at checkout with configurable text, optional checkbox and order summary placement.
Orders & admin	Admin order support	Include duties when creating or editing orders in the admin.
Orders & admin	Order view breakdown	Display calculated duties, applied uplifts and collection status on order pages.
Data outputs & integrations	Order exports	Include duties, uplifts and DDP/PDDP indicators in CSV exports and feeds.
Data outputs & integrations	API & webhooks	Provide customs and duties data in order API responses and webhooks.
Data outputs & integrations	Invoice display	Show customs and duties amounts on PDF invoices.

ShopWired Payments

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Payout adjustments	Automatic resolution of adjustments	Adjustment entries are resolved automatically on the next payout when all fee and refund information is processed.
Payout adjustments	ShopWired Payments Adjustment entry	Automatic adjustment entries are added to payout reports to reconcile delayed fees or refunds with the payout amount received.
Manual payouts	Manual payout processing time	Manual payouts requested during business hours are paid the same day; requests outside business hours are paid the next working day.
Manual payouts	Manual payout eligibility	Manual payouts can only be requested for funds where the pay period has elapsed.
Manual payouts	Request manual payout	Initiate a manual payout by entering the payout amount and submitting the request on the account balance page.
Payout management	Access payout reports	View a payout report for each automatic payout showing detailed transaction and fee information.
Payout management	View payout details	Select a payout from the list to view detailed information about that payout.
Payout management	Payout status tracking	View payout statuses including In transit, Succeeded, and Failed.
Payout management	View payouts page	Access a list of all payouts in your ShopWired account under ShopWired Payments > Payouts.
Payout destination	Configure payout bank account	Enter or change the bank account details where payouts are deposited in your ShopWired Payments account.
Payout timing	Monthly automatic payouts	Monthly automatic payouts are paid on the first working day of each month.
Payout timing	Weekly automatic payouts	Weekly automatic payouts are paid each Monday or the next working day if Monday is a bank holiday.
Payout timing	Instant payouts	Instant payouts are available within 20 minutes of creation.
Payout timing	Automatic payout timing	Automatic payouts are created and paid on the same day, usually available within a few hours after creation.
Payout timing	Payouts not processed on weekends or bank holidays	Payouts are not made into bank accounts on weekends or bank holidays regardless of schedule.
Payout timing	Pay period duration	The pay period defines the time for transaction funds to clear before payout, typically 3 working days (Accelerated Payouts).
Payout schedule	Manual payout initiation	Manually initiate payouts when manual payout schedule is selected.
Payout schedule	Default automatic daily payouts	Automatic daily payouts are enabled by default on weekdays excluding bank holidays.
Payout schedule	Configure automatic payout frequency	Set automatic payouts to occur daily, weekly, or monthly.
Payout schedule	Select payout schedule	Choose between automatic or manual payout schedules in your ShopWired Payments account settings.
Payout settings	Manual payouts balance labelling	Label balance amounts to reflect manual payout status, showing available payout amount and estimated future payouts.
Payout settings	Automatic payouts balance labelling	Label balance amounts to reflect automatic payout status, showing funds in transit and estimated future payouts.
Account balance	Display estimated future payouts	Show the total of transactions accumulating in the account that are not yet available for payout.
Account balance	Display in-transit or available payout amount	Show the total of payouts already on the way to your bank account for automatic payout settings, or the total amount available to create a payout for manual payout settings.
Account balance	Display cleared funds amount	Display the amount of cleared funds available to be paid out to your nominated bank account.
Account balance	View account balance	View the current balance of your ShopWired Payments account on the balance page.
Early fraud warnings	Proactive transaction review	Use early fraud warnings to review and manage transactions before disputes or chargebacks occur.
Early fraud warnings	Early fraud warning notification sources	Early fraud warnings are triggered by financial institution reports including Visa's C40 reports and Mastercard's SAFE system.
Early fraud warnings	Receive early fraud warning emails	Receive email alerts when a transaction is identified as high risk for dispute by card networks such as Visa and Mastercard.
Account restrictions	Direct communication for policy breaches	Contact users directly to resolve policy breaches and assist in removing account restrictions.
Account restrictions	Policy compliance review	ShopWired Payments reviews products, services, and company information to ensure compliance with trading policies.
Account restrictions	Verification requirements for restrictions	Restrictions can be imposed if the company, its directors/owners/representatives, or bank account cannot be verified.
Account restrictions	Remove restrictions via account settings	Remove account restrictions by providing required identity documentation through the ShopWired account settings.
Account restrictions	Transaction processing restriction	Restrict the ability to process new transactions on the account in certain cases.
Account restrictions	Restricted account state	Accounts can be placed in a restricted state where payouts are disabled but transaction processing may still be allowed.
Instant payouts	Initiate instant payout via balance page	Initiate an instant payout by entering the payout amount and selecting the request instant payout option on the ShopWired Payments Balance page.
Instant payouts	Manual capture requirement for authorised transactions	For authorised-only transactions, capture the payment before requesting an instant payout for the associated funds.
Instant payouts	Automatic eligibility notification	Receive automatic email notification when your ShopWired Payments account becomes eligible for instant payouts.
Instant payouts	Instant payout eligibility criteria	Access instant payouts if your account has at least 3 months trading history, a dispute rate below 0.50%, and a trading volume of at least £5,000 over the previous 3 months.
Instant payouts	View instant payout history	View previously requested instant payouts on the Payouts page in your ShopWired account.
Instant payouts	Instant payout processing time	Funds from instant payouts typically settle in your bank account within five minutes, with some banks taking up to three hours.
Instant payouts	Instant payout fee deduction	Deduct the fee for instant payouts from future ShopWired Payments balances while allowing withdrawal of the full current available balance.
Instant payouts	Instant payout fund eligibility	Only funds not already bundled into a payout can be requested for instant payout, even if the balance shows as available.
Instant payouts	Request instant payout	Request an immediate transfer of available funds from your ShopWired Payments balance to your bank account at any time, including weekends and public holidays.
Fee schedule	View fee schedule	View the fees applied to your ShopWired Payments account; fees cannot be edited.
Email notifications	Add additional email recipients	Enter additional email addresses to receive copies of ShopWired Payments notification emails.
Email notifications	Manage email notifications	Enable or disable ShopWired Payments information emails sent to the registered account email address.
Payouts	Configure payout schedule	Set the frequency of payouts to your bank account, including options for manual or automatic daily, weekly, or monthly payouts.
Payouts	Edit payout bank account	Edit the bank account details where ShopWired Payments payouts are deposited.
Fraud prevention	Decline transactions on failed CVC verification	Automatically decline transactions if the card security code (CVC) does not match the card issuer's records.
Fraud prevention	Decline transactions on failed address verification	Automatically decline transactions if the customer's entered address does not match the card issuer's records.
Payment method options	Allow checkout via Apple Pay and Google Pay	Enable customers to complete checkout using Apple Pay or Google Pay, bypassing the standard checkout process.
Payment method options	Accept Apple Pay and Google Pay payments	Allow customers to pay using Apple Pay and Google Pay wallets.
Payment method options	Accept American Express payments	Enable or disable acceptance of American Express payments through your website.
Transaction processing options	Enable card payments when creating orders	Activate the ability to take card payments over the phone when creating orders through your ShopWired account.
Transaction processing options	Pre-order payment processing	Select whether to charge pre-orders immediately or defer payment until the order is ready for dispatch.
Transaction processing options	Configure payment settlement method	Choose to take payment immediately (automatic capture) or reserve funds only (manual capture) for card transactions.
Transaction processing options	Set bank statement description	Enter the text that appears on customers' bank or card statements for payments made to your account.
Business details	View account status	View the current status of your ShopWired Payments account, such as active or requiring action.
Business details	Edit business information	Edit business/company details, beneficial owners, controllers, address information, and identity documents in the ShopWired Payments account.
Fees and charges	Payout frequency and cost	Process daily payouts to your UK bank account free of charge.
Fees and charges	Dispute fee	Charge a £20 fee for each dispute or chargeback managed through ShopWired Payments.
Fees and charges	Transaction fees by card type	Charge transaction fees based on card type, including standard UK cards, business UK cards, EU cards, international cards, and American Express.
Document verification	Request for photo ID and proof of address	Request photo ID and proof of address documents for company directors and beneficial owners when automatic verification is insufficient.
Directors and owners information	Provide director and owner details	Enter name, address, date of birth, email, phone number, relationship to company, photo ID, and proof of address for directors and beneficial owners.
Representative information	Provide representative details	Enter name, address, date of birth, email, phone number, relationship to company, and photo ID for company representatives.
Company information	Provide company details	Enter company name, address, phone number, tax ID, and names of directors, beneficial owners, and executives.
Account information	Provide business type and website URL	Enter your business type and website URL during account creation.
Account status	Account information requests	Receive notifications within the ShopWired dashboard if additional information is required to process transactions.
Account status	Immediate payment processing	Begin accepting payments via ShopWired Payments immediately after providing all required information.
Onboarding process	Additional document requests	Respond to additional identity document or verification requests from Stripe during or after onboarding.
Onboarding process	Identity verification via Stripe	Complete identity verification and onboarding questions through Stripe, including providing legal company and owner details.
Account setup	Activate ShopWired Payments	Start the onboarding process by clicking the 'activate ShopWired payments' button on the payment gateways page.
Account eligibility	Business type restrictions	Restrict ShopWired Payments usage to eligible business types and purposes as defined by ShopWired Payments policies.
Account eligibility	UK business eligibility	Activate ShopWired Payments only if your business is a UK resident with a UK bank account and meets eligibility criteria.
Restricted products and services	Require prior approval for CBD products	Require prior written approval
Restricted products and services	Require prior approval for financial services	Require prior written approval before using ShopWired Payments for financial services including investments, lending, buy now pay later, crowdfunding, debt collection, insurance, currency exchange, cryptocurrency, and NFTs.
Misuse restrictions	Prohibit sharing cardholder information	Disallow sharing cardholder information with another merchant for payment of cross-sell products or services.
Misuse restrictions	Prohibit cross-border acquiring outside jurisdiction	Disallow cross-border acquiring where the merchant's business address is outside the acquiring ShopWired Payments entity's jurisdiction.
Misuse restrictions	Prohibit evasion of chargeback monitoring	Disallow use to evade card network chargeback monitoring programmes.
Misuse restrictions	Prohibit third-party transaction facilitation	Disallow use of ShopWired Payments to facilitate transactions on behalf of any third party.
Misuse restrictions	Prohibit false or misleading information	Disallow use of ShopWired Payments where false, manipulated, inaccurate, or misleading information is provided about identity, business, or location.
Account restrictions	Delay release of funds	Release transacted funds only after six months have elapsed following transactions involving prohibited or restricted activities.
Account restrictions	Request additional verification	Require additional information or verification deemed necessary for prohibited or restricted activities.
Account restrictions	Suspend ability to receive payments	Suspend the ability to receive new payments from customers for prohibited or restricted activities.
Account restrictions	Suspend payouts for prohibited activity	Suspend all payouts and cancel payouts in transit if prohibited or restricted activities occur without prior approval.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit cannabis and marijuana products	Disallow sale of products containing cannabis or marijuana.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit sale of gift cards and vouchers	Disallow sale of gift cards, gift vouchers, or money vouchers.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit gambling and games of chance	Disallow games of chance, lottery, bidding fee auctions, gambling, sweepstakes, contests, and fantasy sports leagues for prizes.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit sale of firearms and explosives	Disallow sale of firearms, explosives, or other dangerous materials.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit online dating services	Disallow online dating services.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit adult video stores	Disallow operation of adult video stores.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit adult services	Disallow adult services including prostitution, escort services, sexual massage, pay-per-view, or adult live chat.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit pornography and adult material	Disallow pornography or adult material depicting nudity or sexually explicit acts.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit unfair, deceptive, or predatory products	Disallow any product or service deemed unfair, deceptive, or predatory by ShopWired Payments.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit negative response marketing and telemarketing	Disallow negative response marketing or telemarketing activities.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit online traffic and social media engagement services	Disallow products or services providing online website traffic or social media engagement.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit pyramid and cryptocurrency schemes	Disallow pyramid schemes, get rich quick schemes, investment opportunities, and cryptocurrency schemes.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit unauthorised brand name sales	Disallow unauthorised sale of brand name or designer products or services.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit copyright and IP infringement products	Disallow sale or distribution of products infringing copyrights or intellectual property without authorisation, including music, movies, software, and counterfeit goods.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit telecommunications interference equipment	Disallow sale or distribution of equipment capable of interfering with or manipulating telecommunications.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit fake references and ID services	Disallow use for fake references or identity-providing services.
Prohibited businesses and services	Prohibit illegal products or services	Disallow use of ShopWired Payments for any product or service illegal in the jurisdiction of sale, supply, or transition.
Prohibited jurisdictions	Prohibit export or supply to Russia	Disallow direct or indirect export, re-export, sale, or supply of goods or services to any person, company, entity, or government located in Russia.
Prohibited persons and entities	Block transactions involving restricted persons or parties	Prohibit transactions involving individuals, entities, or governments listed on restricted or sanctions lists from the USA, UK, EU, or United Nations.
Prohibited jurisdictions	Prohibit transactions linked to specified jurisdictions	Prevent use of ShopWired Payments for transactions linked directly or indirectly to Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Syria, Russia, Crimea, Donetsk Region (Ukraine), and Luhansk Region (Ukraine).
Reserve account	Release of reserved funds	Release reserved funds back to the available balance for normal payout scheduling after the holding period.
Reserve account	Reserve fund holding period	Hold reserved funds in the reserve account for a configurable period, typically between 30 and 120 days.
Reserve account	Reserve account balance display	Display a separate note on the ShopWired Payments balance page showing the amount held in the reserve account.
Reserve account	Reserve account notification	Notify users in writing about the necessity, terms, and appeal opportunity for the reserve account.
Reserve account	Reserve account fund holding	Hold a portion of transacted funds in a separate reserve account when the business is deemed higher risk.
Payout reports	Generate summarised payout report	Generate a report summarising transaction types and totals related to automatic payouts.
Payout reports	Generate itemised payout report	Generate a detailed report listing individual transactions included in automatic payouts.
Balance reports	Generate summarised balance report	Generate a report summarising transaction types, counts, and gross/net amounts affecting the ShopWired Payments balance.
Balance reports	Generate itemised advanced balance report	Generate a detailed itemised report showing all transactions affecting the ShopWired Payments balance during a period.
Balance reports	Generate itemised simplified balance report	Generate a simplified itemised report showing all transactions affecting the ShopWired Payments balance during a period.
Reports	Receive reports by email	Receive generated ShopWired Payments reports via email to the registered account email address.
Reports	Generate ShopWired Payments reports	Generate various ShopWired Payments reports by selecting report type and date range from the Reports section.
Order export	Export postcode check result	Include the result of the billing postcode check in order exports.
Order export	Export CVC check result	Include the result of the card security code (CVC) check in order exports.
Order export	Export processing fees	Include the total processing fees charged on each transaction in order exports.
Order export	Export risk evaluation	Include ShopWired's internal risk evaluation for each transaction in order exports.
Order export	Export transaction status	Include the ShopWired Payments transaction status (e.g. succeeded, cancelled, disputed) in order exports.
Order export	Export transaction ID	Include the unique ShopWired Payments transaction ID in order exports.
Payout reports	Download payout transactions CSV	Download an itemised CSV file of all transactions included in a specific automatic payout.
Payout reports	View payout details	View all individual transactions contained within an automatic payout from the Payouts page.
Activity report	Download activity report CSV	Download an itemised CSV file containing all ShopWired Payments activity within the selected time period.
Activity report	View activity summary	View a summary table of ShopWired Payments activity for the selected time period.
Activity report	Select report date range	Select the from and to dates to define the time period for the activity report.
Activity report	Generate activity report	Generate a report summarising all activity on your ShopWired Payments account over a specified time period.
Payout retries	Automatic retry after bank account update	Automatically retry initiating a payout after the user updates their bank account details.
Payout failure reasons	Detect insufficient funds for negative payouts	Identify payout failures caused by insufficient funds when debiting the bank account for negative balances.
Payout failure reasons	Detect incorrect payee name	Identify payout failures caused by a mismatch between the bank account name and ShopWired Payments account name.
Payout failure reasons	Detect invalid account type	Identify payout failures caused by attempting to receive payouts into non-current accounts.
Payout failure reasons	Detect account currency mismatch	Identify payout failures caused by mismatched currency between the bank account and payout currency.
Payout failure reasons	Detect incorrect bank account information	Identify payout failures caused by non-existent or closed bank accounts.
Bank account settings	Update bank account details	Allow users to update their bank account information from the account settings page to resolve payout failures.
Payout schedule	Bundle failed payouts into next payout	Automatically include failed payouts in the next successful payout after a failure.
Payout schedule	Automatic daily payout retries	Automatically retry failed payouts on the next scheduled daily automatic payout without user intervention.
Payout status	Indicate rejected payouts	Display the status "this payout was not completed" when a payout is rejected by the bank.
Payout status	Display payout failure reason	Show a message on the payout page explaining the reason for a payout failure if it can be detected.
PCI compliance documentation	Provide Attestation of Compliance	ShopWired support can provide the Attestation of Compliance documentation for ShopWired and ShopWired Payments.
PCI compliance status	Automatic PCI compliance for ShopWired Payments users	Merchants using ShopWired Payments are automatically PCI compliant and do not need to complete self-assessment questionnaires, attestations of compliance, or vulnerability scans.
PCI compliance responsibility	PCI compliance managed by ShopWired Payments	ShopWired Payments assumes full responsibility for PCI compliance for merchants using its payment solution.
Test transactions	Use offline payment for testing	Use the offline payment method to place orders without processing card transactions for testing order and email workflows.
Test transactions	Minimum test transaction amount	Require test transactions to be above 50p when placing live test payments.
Test transactions	Place live test transactions	Place live card transactions in live mode using your own card to test the payment gateway functionality.
Dispute evidence	Upload customer dispute withdrawal letters	Upload dispute withdrawal letters from customers as evidence when a dispute is withdrawn by the customer’s bank.
Dispute evidence	Upload refund and returns policies	Provide evidence of refund and returns policies and terms and conditions via uploads or website links.
Dispute evidence	Upload proof of product condition and description	Upload evidence demonstrating that products or services were as described or acceptable to contest disputes.
Dispute evidence	Upload delivery confirmations	Upload receipts of postage and delivery confirmations from couriers as evidence for dispute challenges.
Dispute evidence	Upload customer communications	Upload copies of communications with customers related to the order as evidence for dispute challenges.
Dispute fees	Automatic collection of dispute fees	Automatically collect the dispute fee when a transaction is subjected to a dispute.
Dispute funds handling	Automatic deduction of disputed amount	Automatically deduct the disputed amount from your available balance or attempt to collect it from your bank account.
Dispute status	Show dispute outcome as won or lost	Show dispute outcome as won or lost based on the institution/bank decision; no further details on reasons are provided.
Dispute status	Display dispute decision deadline	Display the deadline by which the institution/bank will make a decision on the dispute after evidence submission.
Dispute status	View current dispute status	View the current status of a dispute, including won, lost, or pending decisions, on the dispute page.
Challenging disputes	Evidence submission deadline enforcement	Enforce a deadline for submitting evidence after which no further evidence or challenges can be submitted.
Challenging disputes	Evidence fields vary by dispute type	Display evidence submission fields that depend on the type of dispute initiated.
Challenging disputes	Submit dispute evidence once only	Submit evidence to challenge a dispute only once; ensure all necessary evidence is included before submission.
Challenging disputes	Save dispute evidence without submitting	Save evidence entered for a dispute challenge at any time without submitting it.
Challenging disputes	Challenge a dispute	Select the option to challenge a dispute and provide evidence to contest it on a dedicated evidence submission page.
Accepting disputes	Accept a dispute	Select the option to accept a dispute, notifying the institution/bank; dispute fees are not refunded upon acceptance.
Dispute summary	Refund option for disputed transactions	When available, issue a refund for the disputed amount without accepting or contesting the dispute, via a provided link.
Dispute summary	View dispute response deadline	View the deadline set by the institution/bank by which you must respond to the dispute and submit evidence.
Dispute summary	View dispute initiation date and amount	View the date the dispute was initiated and the disputed amount, which may differ from the transaction amount.
Dispute details	View dispute fees charged	View total fees levied on the disputed transaction, including the dispute fee, based on your account's fee profile.
Dispute details	View fraud and risk check results	View results of fraud and risk checks related to the disputed transaction, such as postcode matching.
Dispute details	View transaction summary for disputed transactions	View a summary of the original transaction subject to dispute, including a link to the transaction page.
Dispute management	Access disputes list	Access a list of all disputes initiated on your account via the ShopWired Payments > Disputes page.
Dispute visibility	View dispute indication on orders and transactions	View clear dispute indicators on the view order and view transaction pages with links to dispute details.
Dispute notifications	Receive dispute notifications	Receive email notifications and in-account alerts when a transaction is subject to a dispute.
Transaction timeline	View transaction timeline	View a timeline of key transaction events including creation, capture, void, refunds, early fraud warnings, and disputes.
Declined transactions	Generic decline code	Transactions showing status "requires payment method" indicate no specific decline reason was provided by the cardholder's bank.
Declined transactions	View decline reason	View the reason a transaction was declined under the status heading in the payment details section.
Refunds	Create refunds on transaction page	Create refunds only from the transaction page for ShopWired Payments transactions.
Transaction processing	Capture time limit	Capture funds within 7 days of transaction initiation; otherwise, use pre-order app for longer capture periods.
Transaction processing	Void transaction	Void a transaction completely to cancel it; this action is irreversible.
Transaction processing	Automatic capture of funds	Automatically capture funds from cardholders when transactions are placed if account is set to auto-capture.
Transaction processing	Capture transaction funds manually	Capture funds manually by entering an amount and selecting the capture option when manual capture is enabled.
Fraud management	Mark payment method as fraudulent	Manually mark a payment method as fraudulent to prevent the same card from being used again on the website.
Transaction details	View 3D Secure result	Display 3D Secure authentication status for successful transactions authenticated through 3DS.
Transaction details	View payment method information	View card details including last 4 digits, expiry date, card origin country, CVC check result, and postcode check result.
Transaction details	View payment details	View total transaction value, processing fees, net amount, and corresponding order reference.
Transaction details	View risk evaluation	View ShopWired Payments' risk evaluation of a transaction as Normal, Elevated, or Highest fraud likelihood.
Transaction details	View transaction details	View full details of a transaction by selecting the transaction ID from the transactions page or order page.
Transactions overview	Filter by transaction status	Filter transactions to show all, only successful, or only unsuccessful transactions.
Transactions overview	Filter transactions by date	Filter transactions using From date and To date filters based on transaction creation date.
Transactions overview	Search transactions	Search transactions by customer surname, postcode, order reference, or transaction ID.
Transactions overview	View all transactions	View all ShopWired Payments transactions on the Payments & transactions page.
Virtual terminal	Apply standard processing fees	Virtual terminal transactions incur the same processing fees as other ShopWired Payments transactions.
Virtual terminal	Display unsuccessful transactions	Show unsuccessful virtual terminal transactions on the Payments & transactions page with decline reasons in the Status column.
Virtual terminal	No VAT displayed for virtual terminal transactions	Virtual terminal transactions do not display a value in the VAT column of reports.
Virtual terminal	Show description in activity report	Display the transaction description in the Description column of the Activity report instead of an order reference.
Virtual terminal	Display payment type as virtual terminal	Show payment type as "Virtual terminal" in the Payment method section of the transaction details.
Virtual terminal	Display transaction description	Display the entered transaction description in the Payment details section of the transaction information.
Virtual terminal	Manage virtual terminal transactions	View and manage virtual terminal transactions on the Transactions page alongside standard transactions.
Virtual terminal	MOTO transaction marking	Transactions are marked as MOTO (Mail Order / Telephone Order) to indicate exemption from 3D Secure authentication flow.
Virtual terminal	Enter transaction amount	Enter the transaction amount with up to two decimal places and no thousands separator.
Virtual terminal	Enter card details	Enter card number, card expiry date, and security code to process the payment.
Virtual terminal	Enter cardholder name	Enter the cardholder name exactly as it appears on the customer's card.
Virtual terminal	Enter customer email address	Enter the customer's email address to send an email receipt for successful transactions if email notifications are enabled.
Virtual terminal	Enter transaction description	Enter a transaction description up to 255 characters to identify the transaction within the ShopWired account.
Virtual terminal	Immediate transaction charging	Virtual terminal transactions are always charged immediately; manual capture is not supported.
Virtual terminal	Process card payments without orders	Process card payments from customers without creating an order in ShopWired using the virtual terminal.
Link payment method	No control over Link availability	Link availability cannot be disabled or controlled through ShopWired or ShopWired Payments accounts.
Settings	Enable Apple Pay & Google Pay express checkout	Configure ShopWired Payments to allow customers to check out via Apple Pay and Google Pay express checkout.
Settings	Enable Apple Pay & Google Pay payments	Configure ShopWired Payments to accept payments via Apple Pay and Google Pay on the payment page.
Apple Pay & Google Pay support	Support Apple Pay and Google Pay	Enable Apple Pay and Google Pay for payments processed via ShopWired Payments.
Fees and refunds	Full value refund to customer	Users can refund the full transaction value to the customer regardless of non-refundable fees.
Fees and refunds	Non-refundable transaction fees	Fees charged for the original transaction are not refunded when a refund is issued.
Refund failure	Fraud caution on alternative refunds	Users are advised to exercise caution when refunding by methods other than the original payment method, as ShopWired Payments is not liable for fraud in such cases.
Refund failure	No reattempt of failed refunds	Failed refunds cannot be retried through ShopWired Payments and must be refunded by alternative methods.
Refund failure	Refund failure notification	When a refund fails, an entry is added to the transaction timeline and a refund failed email is sent to the registered account email and configured additional recipients.
Refund tracking	ARN timeline entry	An ARN entry appears in the transaction timeline approximately 2 working days after refund creation.
Refund tracking	Refund timeline entry	A refund entry is added to the transaction timeline when a refund is created.
Refund creation	Process refund action	Submit the refund by selecting the add refund option on the transaction page.
Refund creation	Refund reason selection	Select a reason for the refund when processing a refund on the transaction page.
Refund creation	Refund amount entry	Enter the refund amount on the transaction page to initiate a refund.
Refund processing	Refund failure due to debit failure	If the debit fails repeatedly, the refund will not be processed until the bank account details are updated.
Refund processing	Retry failed debit attempts	If the debit from the bank account fails, ShopWired Payments will retry the debit after 3 working days.
Refund processing	Insufficient payout balance handling	If there is insufficient balance in the ShopWired Payments account to cover a refund, ShopWired Payments will attempt to debit the linked bank account to cover the refund.
Refund types	Customer confirmation of reversal	Customers can confirm with their card issuer if a refund was processed as a reversal.
Refund types	No ARN for reversals	Refunds processed as reversals do not generate an ARN and do not show a separate refund entry in the ShopWired account.
Refund types	Refund processed as reversal	Refunds issued within 24-48 hours of the original transaction are processed as reversals, removing the original charge from the customer's card statement without issuing a separate refund or ARN.
Refund processing	Provide ARN to customers	The ARN can be given to customers to help them trace refunds with their card issuer if the refund is delayed.
Refund processing	Refund appearance on customer statement	Refunds can take up to 10 working days to appear on the customer's bank statement.
Refund processing	Acquirer Reference Number (ARN) availability	An ARN is provided after refund processing to allow tracing of the refund by the customer's card issuer.
Refund processing	Refund processing time	Refunds typically take around 2 working days to be processed by ShopWired Payments.
Refund processing	Deduct refund from next payout	Refund amounts are deducted from the next available ShopWired Payments payout that is not already in transit to your bank.
Personal guarantees	Personal guarantee verification	Individuals
Personal guarantees	Personal guarantee requirement	ShopWired Payments may require personal guarantees from company principals under specified conditions.
Fee deduction	Deduction from accounts	ShopWired Payments may deduct owed amounts from any accounts associated with the user's ShopWired Payments account.
Fee collection costs	Collection cost liability	Users are liable for costs incurred by ShopWired Payments in collecting owed fees, including legal and collection agency fees.
Fee deduction	Insufficient funds fee collection	If transaction funds are insufficient to cover fees, ShopWired Payments may charge the user's associated payment method.
Fee deduction	Fee deduction from transactions	Fees are deducted from funds received for each Card Transaction before payout.
Security interest	Execution of documents	Users agree to execute documents required to create or maintain security interests.
Security interest	Security interest scope	The security interest secures all obligations under this Agreement and related agreements with ShopWired Payments, the Processor, and ShopWired.
Security interest	Lien on funds	ShopWired Payments holds a first priority lien and security interest on all funds processed through the user's account.
Fees	Penalties and fines	Users are liable for any penalties or fines imposed by financial institutions or regulators related to their use of the Service.
Fees	Tax on fees	Users are responsible for paying any taxes applicable to fees charged.
Fees	Fee collection	Fees are collected by the Processor on behalf of ShopWired Payments.
Fees	Additional fees	Users may incur fees for chargebacks, reversals, and payouts to their nominated bank account.
Fees	Transaction fees	ShopWired Payments charges fees for each Card Transaction processed through the Service.
Account creation	Business name accuracy	Users must provide an accurate business name for statements and indemnify ShopWired Payments against related liabilities.
Account creation	Information sharing consent	Users consent to ShopWired Payments sharing their information with third parties including credit bureaus and the Processor.
Account creation	Information provision	Users must provide requested information about themselves and related parties to ShopWired Payments and the Processor.
Account creation	Commercial use only	ShopWired Payments accounts may only be created for commercial purposes, not personal or household use.
Compliance	Payment network guidelines	Users must comply with the rules and guidelines of payment networks such as Visa, Mastercard, and American Express.
Compliance	Prohibited and restricted compliance	Users must comply with the Prohibited and Restricted Jurisdictions, Companies, Governments, Persons, Products & Industries document.
Data security	Security audits	ShopWired Payments may require users to undergo third-party security audits at their expense if a data breach is suspected.
Data security	User data security responsibility	Users are responsible for securing data under their control and complying with PCI-DSS and PA-DSS standards.
Data security	Shared data security responsibility	ShopWired Payments ensures reasonable data security but users acknowledge that the Processor also stores and processes data and is liable for breaches.
Tax responsibility	User tax obligations	Users are solely responsible for assessing, collecting, reporting, and remitting taxes related to Card Transactions.
Support	Assistance with transaction issues	ShopWired Payments provides reasonable assistance with transaction issues but does not guarantee resolution or assume liability for Processor errors.
Liability	User responsibility for transactions	Users assume full responsibility and liability for all transactions processed through their account, including chargebacks and reversals.
Compliance	Customer identity verification	Users are responsible for verifying the identity of customers placing transactions.
Compliance	Customer consent for transactions	Users must obtain customer consent before processing Card Transactions and comply with applicable legal and card network requirements.
Account rights	Third party access restrictions	Users must not permit third parties to access the Service without prior written consent.
Account rights	Limited licence to use Service	Users are granted a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited, and revocable right to use the Service during the Agreement term.
Eligibility	Business types supported	Eligible business types include Private Limited Company, Limited Partnership, Public Limited Company, unincorporated Partnership, or Sole Trader.
Eligibility	UK business requirement	Only businesses located in the United Kingdom can use ShopWired Payments.
Service overview	Supported payment methods	The Service processes transactions via credit cards, debit cards, and other payment methods available through ShopWired.
Service overview	Processor change	ShopWired Payments can change the payment Processor at any time without notice.
Service overview	Payment processing by third party	Payment processing and settlement are carried out by Stripe Payments Europe Ltd as the Processor.
Service overview	Service provider identity	ShopWired Payments is provided by ShopWired Payments Limited, a company incorporated in England & Wales.
Disputes	Dispute decision notifications	Continue receiving notifications about dispute decisions after account closure if disputes were previously challenged.
Disputes	Dispute response restriction after closure	Disable the ability to respond to disputes after the ShopWired account is closed.
Account closure	Active subscription requirement	Require an active ShopWired subscription to view or manage any ShopWired Payments account features.
Account closure	Access restriction after closure	Prevent access to view or manage ShopWired Payments transactions after the ShopWired account is closed.
Account closure	Data access before closure	Access and download reports, orders, transactions, and balance data before closing your ShopWired account.
Account closure	Close ShopWired account	Close your ShopWired account, which removes access to all account sections including ShopWired Payments.

Payment gateways

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Payment gateways overview	Gateway activation - no limit on gateways	Activate an unlimited number of payment gateways to offer multiple payment options to customers.
Payment gateways overview	Add new payment gateway	Add a new payment gateway by selecting it from available options and entering account credentials and configuration settings.
Payment gateways overview	Activate payment gateways	Activate one or more payment gateways from a list of over 30 available options within your ShopWired account.
Payment gateways overview	Gateway compliance - PSD2 compliance	All payment gateways integrated with ShopWired comply with PSD2 regulations.
Payment gateways overview	Gateway compliance - 3DS2 support	All integrated payment gateways support 3DS2 for secure card payments.
Payment gateways overview	Integration types - Recommended integration method	ShopWired recommends using direct integrations where available for payment gateways.
Payment gateways overview	Integration types - Express integrations	Use express integrations allowing customers to select payment gateways and saved addresses from the basket page.
Payment gateways overview	Integration types - Direct integrations	Use direct integrations where customers enter card details directly on your website.
Payment gateways overview	Integration types - Hosted integrations	Use hosted integrations where customers are redirected to the payment gateway’s website to enter card details.
Payment gateways overview	Supported express gateways	Use express integrations with gateways including Amazon Pay, Klarna, and PayPal.
Payment gateways overview	Supported direct gateways	Use direct integrations with gateways including ShopWired Payments, Adyen, Barclaycard API, Biller, Cardstream, Citypay, Klarna, Opayo Direct, PayPal powered by Braintree, Realex/Global Payments, Retail Merchant Services, Revolut, Square, Stripe, WorldPay Business Payments, and Zion Payments.
Payment gateways overview	Supported hosted gateways	Use hosted integrations with gateways including Active Payments, Barclaycard EPDQ, Cardsave, CoinCorner, Connect-E, DIBS Easy, Elavon, First Data Connect, JCC, Laybuy, Natwest Tyl, NoChex, Opayo Hosted and Form, PayFast, PaymentSense, Paytriot Payments, Takepayments, Trust Payments, and WorldPay.
Payment gateways overview	Gateway configuration - Additional gateway setup notices	Receive notices for payment gateways that require additional configuration in their own accounts to process payments and mark orders as completed.
Payment entry and forms	Card information entry form	Display a simple form for customers to enter their card payment details.
Payment entry and forms	Display AMEX card logo	Optionally display the American Express card logo on the payment form.
Payment options	Multiple payment methods	Allow customers to select from multiple available payment methods during checkout.
Payment options	Configure payment method availability	Configure which payment methods or gateways are available to specific visitor types.
Payment options	Minimum order value per payment method	Set a minimum order value required to use a specific payment method or gateway.
Payment status and handling	Payment marked as paid	Automatically mark orders as paid when payment confirmation is successfully received from the payment gateway.
Payment status and handling	Handle missing payment confirmation	Manage cases where payment is completed but ShopWired does not receive confirmation from the payment gateway.
Payment decline handling	Recognise payment declines	Detect when payments are declined by the payment gateway after visitors enter their card details.
Payment entry errors	Detect errors preventing payment information entry	Identify and address errors that prevent visitors from entering their payment details during checkout.
Payment gateway setup	Enter payment gateway credentials	Enter the credentials provided by your payment gateway into your ShopWired account to enable payment processing.
Payment gateway setup	Follow payment gateway setup steps	Complete any additional setup steps required by your payment gateway to accept payments through your website.
Offline payment method	Enable offline payment method	Activate the offline payment method to allow visitors to place orders without paying at the time of order creation.
Offline payment method	Customise offline payment display name	Change the display name of the offline payment option shown to customers during checkout (platform checkout only).
Offline payment method	Restrict offline payment access by visitor type	Control which visitor types can use the offline payment method, including trade customers and credit account holders (platform checkout only).
Offline payment method	Set minimum and maximum order values for offline payment	Define minimum and maximum order values allowed for orders using the offline payment method (platform checkout only).
Offline payment method	Configure transaction fee for offline payment	Set a transaction fee to apply to offline payment orders (requires transaction fees app).
Offline payment method	Enable offline payment for subscription orders	Allow offline payment method to be used for subscription product orders (requires subscriptions app).
Offline payment instructions	Edit order confirmation page instructions	Add custom text displayed on the order confirmation page after an offline payment order is completed.
Offline payment instructions	Edit email confirmation instructions	Add custom text to be included in the offline order confirmation email.
PayPal Checkout	Connect PayPal account	Connect an existing PayPal account or create a new one from within the ShopWired account to enable PayPal Checkout.
PayPal Checkout	Enable PayPal on checkout page	Enable PayPal as a payment option on the website's checkout page.
PayPal Checkout	Enable PayPal on basket page	Enable PayPal as a payment option on the shopping basket page to allow visitors to log in and use saved addresses for checkout.
PayPal Checkout	Support PayPal guest checkout	Accept PayPal guest checkout where available; availability is determined by PayPal and not controlled by ShopWired.
PayPal Checkout	Support PayPal Credit and PayPal Pay in 3	Automatically accept PayPal Credit and PayPal Pay in 3 payment methods without additional ShopWired configuration.
PayPal Checkout	Add PayPal Pay in 3 messaging	Add PayPal Pay in 3 promotional messaging to the website using the PayPal & Klarna credit messaging theme app or by editing theme files.
PayPal Checkout	Allow vaulting of PayPal accounts	Allow customers to save their PayPal account to their customer account for faster checkout in future visits.
PayPal Checkout	Capture payments manually	Capture payments for PayPal orders manually through the ShopWired account when automatic capture is disabled.
PayPal Checkout	Automatically capture payments	Select whether to automatically capture payments at the time of transaction or capture payments later through the ShopWired account.
PayPal Checkout	Issue refunds for PayPal orders	Issue refunds for orders paid via PayPal through the ShopWired account.
PayPal Checkout	Configure PayPal button colour	Select the colour of the PayPal payment button displayed on the website.
PayPal Checkout	Configure PayPal button size	Select the size of the PayPal payment button displayed on the website.
PayPal Checkout	Restrict basket page PayPal for US accounts	Disable the option to enable PayPal on the basket page for US-based merchants due to sales tax calculation requirements.
PayPal legacy integrations	Deprecated PayPal integrations	Older PayPal integrations like PayPal Payments Pro and PayPal Express are deprecated and unavailable to new users.
PayPal account verification	Complete PayPal Business account verification	Complete PayPal verification steps including photo ID, business details, and email verification to enable full PayPal functionality.
PayPal account verification	Enable Express Checkout permissions	Request PayPal support to enable Express Checkout with Classic API permissions on the PayPal Business account for ShopWired integration.
PayPal Website Payments Pro Hosted	Use PayPal Website Payments Pro Hosted	Use this integration if already eligible; new merchants cannot register for this gateway.
PayPal powered by Braintree	Activate PayPal powered by Braintree	Enable PayPal powered by Braintree as a payment gateway in the ShopWired account like other gateways.
Apple Pay & Google Pay support	Support Apple Pay and Google Pay on Stripe	Enable Apple Pay and Google Pay for payments processed via Stripe.
Apple Pay & Google Pay support	Apple Pay and Google Pay availability on hosted gateways	Availability depends on the payment gateway provider for hosted payment gateways.
Apple Pay & Google Pay support	Apple Pay and Google Pay unsupported on other direct integration gateways	Apple Pay and Google Pay are not supported on direct integration gateways other than ShopWired Payments and Stripe.
Klarna setup	Restrict Klarna payments by customer country	Klarna payments are restricted to customers based in the same country as the ShopWired website.
Trust Payments setup	Enable site security setting	Enable the site security setting in Trust Payments account.
Trust Payments setup	Enter site security password	Enter the site security password from Trust Payments into ShopWired payment gateway settings.
Trust Payments setup	Hashed fields configuration	ShopWired hashes specific fields in payment requests including errorcode, orderreference, paymenttypedescription, requestreference, settlestatus, sitereference, and transactionreference.
Realex/Global Payments setup	Add ShopWired IP addresses	Add ShopWired IP addresses 54.247.109.89 and 46.137.84.144 to Realex/Global Payments account IP whitelist.
Realex/Global Payments setup	Enable American Express payments	Enable the option to allow customers to pay with American Express in Realex/Global Payments settings.
Opayo setup	Add ShopWired IP addresses	Add ShopWired IP addresses 54.247.109.89 and 46.137.84.144 to Opayo account IP whitelist.
ConCardis setup	Configure SHA-IN passphrase	Enter a SHA-IN passphrase in both ConCardis and ShopWired payment gateway settings.
ConCardis setup	Configure SHA-OUT passphrase	Enter a SHA-OUT passphrase in both ConCardis and ShopWired payment gateway settings.
ConCardis setup	Enable processing message display	Enable display of a processing message to customers during payment processing in ConCardis account settings.
ConCardis setup	Set request method to POST	Select POST as the request method for transaction feedback in ConCardis account settings.
ConCardis setup	Set accepted payment status callback URL	Enter the callback URL for accepted, on hold, or uncertain payment statuses in ConCardis account settings.
ConCardis setup	Enable Always online server-to-server request	Select the Always online option for direct HTTP server-to-server requests in ConCardis account settings.
ConCardis setup	Enable transaction feedback parameters	Enable receiving transaction feedback parameters on redirect URLs in ConCardis account settings.
ConCardis setup	Set merchant page URL	Enter the merchant page URL containing the payment form in ConCardis account settings.
ConCardis setup	Set back button URL	Enter the back button URL in ConCardis account settings.
WorldPay setup	Enter merchant code	Enter the merchant code in ShopWired payment gateway settings if multiple codes are provided by WorldPay.
WorldPay setup	Enter installation ID	Enter the unique installation ID from WorldPay into ShopWired payment gateway settings.
WorldPay setup	Configure secret password	Enter a secret password in both WorldPay and ShopWired payment gateway settings to match.
WorldPay setup	Set signature fields	Enter signature fields as instId:amount:currency:MC_order_id in WorldPay account settings.
WorldPay setup	Enable payment response and shopper response	Enable payment response and shopper response options in WorldPay account settings.
WorldPay setup	Configure payment response URL	Enter the payment response URL using http protocol in WorldPay account settings.
Barclaycard API setup	Set hash algorithm to SHA-256	Configure the hash algorithm to SHA-256 in Barclaycard API account settings.
Barclaycard ePDQ setup	Configure SHA-IN passphrase	Enter a SHA-IN passphrase in both Barclaycard ePDQ and ShopWired payment gateway settings.
Barclaycard ePDQ setup	Configure SHA-OUT passphrase	Enter a SHA-OUT passphrase in both Barclaycard ePDQ and ShopWired payment gateway settings.
Barclaycard ePDQ setup	Enable processing message display	Enable display of a processing message to customers during payment processing in Barclaycard ePDQ settings.
Barclaycard ePDQ setup	Set request method to POST	Select POST as the request method for transaction feedback in Barclaycard ePDQ settings.
Barclaycard ePDQ setup	Set accepted payment status callback URL	Enter the callback URL for accepted, on hold, or uncertain payment statuses in Barclaycard ePDQ settings.
Barclaycard ePDQ setup	Enable Always online server-to-server request	Select the Always online option for direct HTTP server-to-server requests in Barclaycard ePDQ settings.
Barclaycard ePDQ setup	Enable transaction feedback parameters	Enable receiving transaction feedback parameters on redirect URLs in Barclaycard ePDQ settings.
Barclaycard ePDQ setup	Set merchant page URL	Enter the merchant page URL containing the payment form in Barclaycard ePDQ settings.
Barclaycard ePDQ setup	Set back button URL	Enter the URL for the back button on the secure payment page in Barclaycard ePDQ settings.
Barclaycard ePDQ setup	Configure transaction feedback URL	Enter the transaction feedback URL using http protocol in the Barclaycard ePDQ account settings.

Trade customers

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Trade customer accounts	Create trade customers manually	Create trade customer accounts manually in the admin with required fields and marketing preferences.
Trade customer accounts	Convert standard customer to trade customer	Convert an existing standard customer account to a trade customer account without notification emails.
Trade customer accounts	Activate or deactivate trade accounts	Set trade customer accounts as active or inactive and send activation emails upon activation.
Trade customer accounts	Unique email address enforcement	Prevent duplicate trade customer records by enforcing unique email addresses.
Trade customer accounts	Manage trade customer applications	View, edit, activate, ignore, or delete trade customer account applications in the B2B section.
Trade customer accounts	Automatically activate trade accounts	Enable automatic activation of trade customer accounts upon application without manual approval.
Trade customer accounts	Receive trade account application emails	Receive notification emails when a visitor applies for a trade customer account.
Trade customer accounts	Configure trade account application emails	Customise the contents of trade account application and activation emails.
Trade customer accounts	Trade account application page	Provide a trade customer account application page for visitors to apply for trade accounts.
Trade customer accounts	Customise application form fields	Customise fields on the trade account application form using the theme editor and custom fields app.
Trade customer data	Edit trade customer details	Edit trade customer information including custom field data.
Trade customer data	Add internal notes to trade customers	Record internal notes about trade customers that are not visible to the customer.
Trade customer data	Download trade customer data	Download trade customer information for GDPR compliance or other purposes.
Trade customer data	Delete trade customers	Delete trade customer records without affecting past orders.
Trade customer data	Filter trade customers by account status	Filter trade customers by active, inactive, or all account states.
Trade customer data	Filter trade customers by order count	Filter trade customers based on the number of orders placed.
Trade customer data	Search trade customers	Search trade customers by name, email address, or postcode.
Bulk import/export	Download import template	Download a CSV template with fixed column headings for importing trade customers.
Bulk import/export	Upload and process import file	Upload a CSV file to import new trade customers or update existing ones.
Bulk import/export	Import trade customers	Use CSV files to create new trade customers in bulk with a ShopWired import template.
Bulk import/export	Update existing trade customers	Export existing trade customers, edit their data in CSV, and re-import to update.
Bulk import/export	Preserve trade customer ID	Maintain the unique ID column unchanged when updating existing trade customers.
Bulk import/export	Export trade customers	Export trade customer data to CSV for all or filtered by marketing consent status.
Bulk import/export	Select export type	Choose to export all trade customers, only those accepting marketing, or those not accepting.
Bulk import/export	Include customer contact details	Import or export first name, last name, email, phone, and mobile of trade customers.
Bulk import/export	Include customer address details	Import or export address lines, city, state/county, postcode, and country for trade customers.
Bulk import/export	Include company and VAT number	Import or export company name and VAT number details for trade customers.
Bulk import/export	Include website URL	Import or export trade customer's website address.
Bulk import/export	Include date of birth	Import or export trade customer date of birth in specified date formats.
Bulk import/export	Include source data	Import or export how the trade customer heard about the business.
Bulk import/export	Include account active status	Specify if a trade customer's account is active or inactive in import/export files.
Bulk import/export	Manage credit account status	Specify if trade customers have credit accounts via import/export data (Yes/No).
Bulk import/export	Manage marketing consent	Specify whether trade customers accept marketing communications in import/export data.
Bulk import/export	Include reward points balance	Enter trade customers' reward points balance when using the reward points app.
Bulk import/export	Set cost price multiplier	Enter a cost price multiplier for trade customers in import/export CSV files.
Bulk import/export	Set global discount percentage	Enter a global discount percentage for trade customers via import/export data.
Bulk import/export	Set trade pricing band	Assign trade pricing bands to trade customers via CSV import/export.
Bulk import/export	Assign custom field data	Include custom field data for trade customers in import/export CSV files.
Bulk import/export	Include internal notes	Add internal notes for trade customers in import files; not visible to customers.
Trade customer order management	View trade customer order history	Display orders assigned to trade customers in their account order history.
Trade customer order management	Assign orders by billing email	Assign orders to trade customer records based on the billing email address.
Offline payments	Enable credit accounts for trade customers	Configure trade customers to have credit accounts for offline payment options.
Offline payments	Restrict offline payment to trade customers	Limit offline payment access to visitors logged into trade customer accounts.
Offline payments	Restrict offline payment to credit accounts	Restrict offline payment method to trade customers with credit accounts via checkout settings.
Website customisation	Theme settings for trade customers	Use theme settings to customise the website experience specifically for trade customers.
Website customisation	Restrict features by customer type	Restrict certain features and discount types to trade customers only or exclude them.
Website customisation	Make website trade only	Restrict website pricing visibility exclusively to logged-in trade customers.
Trade only categories and products	Create trade only categories and products	Create categories and products visible and purchasable only by trade customers.
Trade pricing	Configure trade pricing	Set different product prices specifically for trade customers.
Individual trade customer pricing	Upload CSV for individual trade prices	Upload CSV files containing trade prices per product/variation for individual trade customers.
Individual trade customer pricing	Download current trade prices CSV	Download an export of current individual trade customer prices for editing and updating.
Individual trade customer pricing	Replace existing trade prices on upload	Uploading a new pricing spreadsheet replaces all previously uploaded individual trade prices.
Individual trade customer pricing	Remove specific trade price via CSV	Remove trade pricing for a specific customer and SKU by entering `-1` in the CSV cell.
Individual trade customer pricing	Obtain trade customer IDs	Obtain trade customer IDs from trade accounts list or export.
Individual trade customer pricing	Export stock for SKU codes	Export stock to obtain all product and variation SKU codes.
Individual trade customer pricing	Use SKU codes for pricing identification	Use product and variation SKU codes to identify items when configuring individual trade pricing.
Address book	Add additional addresses	Add multiple additional addresses to trade customer accounts selectable at checkout.
Address book	Manage additional addresses	Edit or delete additional addresses displayed in separate tabs labelled Address 1, Address 2, etc.
Customer data fields	Use additional data fields (deprecated)	Use five additional data fields for notes or information on trade customer accounts (deprecated after 7 Feb 2025).

Trade prices

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Trade pricing bands overview	Create trade pricing bands	Create trade pricing bands as sets of trade prices for products to assign to trade customers.
Trade pricing bands overview	Create multiple pricing bands	Create different trade pricing bands for different groups of trade customers.
Trade pricing bands overview	Assign trade customers to pricing bands	Assign trade customers to a trade pricing band to apply the product prices configured within that band.
Trade pricing bands management	View trade pricing bands list	View existing trade pricing bands with columns showing number of members and number of product prices set.
Trade pricing bands management	Edit trade pricing bands	Edit existing trade pricing bands to manage product and variation prices.
Trade pricing bands requirements	Use SKU codes for pricing	Use unique SKU codes assigned to products and variations to identify items for trade pricing band configuration.
Trade pricing bands requirements	Require Trade accounts app	Trade pricing bands require the Trade accounts app to be installed.
Product pricing within bands	Add product prices	Add product prices to a trade pricing band by selecting product and variation (if applicable) and entering the price.
Product pricing within bands	Edit and delete prices	Edit or delete existing product and variation prices within a trade pricing band.
Product pricing within bands	Variation selection restrictions	When using the 'all variants' feature, individual variation combinations cannot be selected for pricing.
Assigning customers	Assign trade pricing band to customer	Assign a trade pricing band to a trade customer when creating or editing their account via the Pricing section.
Assigning customers	Import/export trade customer pricing bands	Assign trade pricing bands to trade customers using the TRADE PRICING BAND column in the trade customer import/export system.
Default assignment	Set default trade pricing band	Configure a default trade pricing band to be automatically assigned to new trade customer accounts upon activation.
Individual trade prices	Set individual trade prices	Configure separate prices for each trade customer for each product individually.
Individual trade pricing	Apply individual trade prices	Apply individual trade prices to determine the sale price for trade customers.
Global price discounts	Configure global percentage discounts	Set a percentage discount that applies to all normal product prices for a trade customer.
Global price discounts	Apply global price discounts	Apply global price discounts to adjust the sale price for trade customers.
Global price discounts	Import/export global price discounts	Use the GLOBAL DISCOUNT column in the trade customer import/export system to bulk configure global price discounts.
Global price discounts	Apply global price discount to product pricing	Automatically multiply product, product variation, product choice, or product extra prices by the configured global price discount for trade customers.
Cost price multipliers	Enable cost price multiplier pricing	Configure trade customer pricing by multiplying the product cost price by a specified multiplier for each trade customer.
Cost price multipliers	Set cost price multipliers per trade customer	Apply a multiplier to the cost price for each trade customer to calculate their product prices.
Cost price multiplier pricing	Configure multiplier during trade account creation or editing	Select the "a multiplier of product cost price" option in the Pricing section and enter the multiplier value for a trade customer.
Cost price multiplier pricing	Import/export cost price multipliers	Import or export trade customer cost price multipliers using the COST PRICE MULTIPLIER column in the trade customer import/export system.
Cost price multiplier pricing	Set cost price multiplier per trade customer	Set a decimal multiplier for each trade customer to apply a surcharge (greater than 1) or discount (less than 1) on the product cost price.
Cost price multiplier	Apply cost price multiplier	Calculate sale price by multiplying the product or variation cost price by a cost price multiplier for trade customers.
Trade pricing bands	Apply trade pricing band prices	Use trade pricing band prices to calculate the sale price for trade customers.
Pricing fallback	Display normal price if no trade price	Show the normal product price if no trade price is configured for the trade customer and product.
Pricing precedence	Apply trade pricing in order of precedence	Trade pricing is applied in the following order: individual trade prices, trade pricing bands, cost price multipliers, then global price discounts.
Website display	Require login to view trade prices	Only visitors logged into a trade account can see trade pricing on the website.
Website display	Show trade prices as sale prices	Display trade prices as sale prices with the original price crossed out for logged-in trade customers.
Theme settings	Hide prices for non-trade visitors	Enable a theme setting to hide all prices on the website unless the visitor is logged into a trade account.
Theme settings	Hide pricing setting in Version 4 themes	Activate the hide pricing setting in the theme editor under the trade customers setting group for Version 4 themes.
Theme settings	Hide pricing setting in Version 5 themes	Activate the hide pricing setting in the theme editor under theme settings > hide pricing group for Version 5 themes.

B2B settings

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Trade accounts	Auto-activate trade accounts	Automatically approve trade account applications instead of requiring manual approval.
Trade accounts	Default trade pricing band	Assign a default trade pricing band to new trade customer accounts.
Trade accounts	Show company name on orders	Display the company name instead of the customer’s name on order pages where available.
Trade accounts	Wholesale delivery	Enable separate wholesale delivery rates for trade customers.
Trade discounts	Visitor access to bulk discounts	Choose which visitor types (e.g. trade or retail) can access bulk discount pricing.
Trade categories	Activate trade-only categories	Allow creation of categories that are visible only to logged-in trade customers.
Trade categories	Show different category menu	Display a different category menu for trade customers compared with retail visitors.
Trade categories	Only show trade categories	Restrict category menus for trade customers to trade-only categories.
Trade products	Hide trade-only products	Prevent non-trade customers from viewing products assigned to trade-only categories.
Trade products	Hide non-trade products	Restrict trade customers to viewing only trade-only products, hiding retail products from them.

Website pages

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Page creation and management	Create new website pages	Create unlimited text or information pages for your website.
Page creation and management	Edit existing website pages	Edit the content of existing website pages.
Page creation and management	Pre-created standard pages	Default pages such as About Us, FAQs, Delivery Information, Terms & Conditions, Refund Policy, and Privacy Policy are auto-created with example content.
Landing pages	Create landing pages	Create customised landing pages using the theme editor’s section and block system (Version 5 themes).
Landing pages	Unlimited landing pages	Create as many landing pages as required.
Landing pages	Edit landing page content	Add and configure sections and content blocks on landing pages.
Landing pages	Set landing page title	Enter an internal title to identify each landing page in your account.
Landing pages	Set landing page URL	Specify the URL path where the landing page appears (starting with a slash).
Landing pages	Edit landing page SEO settings	Configure SEO settings including title tag, meta description, and meta keywords for landing pages.
Navigation and redirects	Add pages to menus	Add website and landing pages to menus using link lists; pages are not added automatically.
Navigation and redirects	Set up 301 redirects	Configure 301 redirects for deleted pages or when a page URL changes to forward visitors and search engines.
Text editor	WYSIWYG content editor	Create and format page content using ShopWired’s classic-mode WYSIWYG editor.

Blog

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Setup	Install blog app	Install the blog app from the ShopWired Apps section to enable the blog.
Appearance	Theme-based blog appearance	The blog and post appearance is controlled by the website’s theme.
Appearance	Theme editor customisations	Make blog display customisations using the theme editor.
Appearance	Advanced theme file editing	Edit theme files to perform advanced blog appearance customisations.
URLs	Blog home page URL	The blog home page is accessible at /blog.
URLs	Blog category URLs	Each category has a unique URL generated from its name at /blog/category/category-name; URLs cannot be edited.
URLs	Individual blog post URLs	Each blog post has a unique URL generated from its title.
Display settings	Configure posts on blog home page	Set the number of blog posts displayed per page on the blog home page.
Display settings	Configure posts per category page	Set the number of blog posts displayed per page on category pages.
Display settings	Configure excerpt length	Set the number of words shown in the auto-generated post excerpt.
Display settings	Reverse chronological order	Blog posts on the home page and category pages are displayed in reverse chronological order.
Categories	Create blog categories	Create new blog categories by entering a category name.
Categories	Edit blog categories	Rename existing blog categories.
Categories	Delete blog categories	Delete blog categories without affecting posts assigned to them.
Post creation	Create a new blog post	Create a new blog post with a title, content and a thumbnail image.
Post creation	Assign blog post to category	Assign a post to an existing category or create a new category during post creation.
Post creation	Customise post excerpt	Enable and enter a custom excerpt for use on the blog home page, category pages and embedded posts.
Post creation	Publish immediately or schedule	Publish immediately or schedule a release date and time for automatic publication.
Post creation	Set display date	Set the display date shown on the post on the website.
Post management	Activate or deactivate blog posts	Control whether a blog post is displayed on the website with an active/inactive toggle.
Post management	View last edited date	View the last edited date for each post without changing the original publication date.
Post management	Delete blog posts	Permanently delete blog posts from the blog management page.
SEO	Customise title tag	Set a custom SEO title tag for each blog post.
SEO	Customise meta description	Set a custom meta description for each blog post.
SEO	Customise page URL	Set a custom URL slug for each blog post.
SEO	Meta keywords field	Meta keywords field available for manual entry.

Company information & logos

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Company details	Add company name	Enter your company name to be displayed on your website.
Company details	Add company address	Enter your company address to be displayed on your website.
Company details	Add company postcode	Enter your company postcode to be displayed on your website.
Company details	Add company telephone number	Enter your company telephone number to be displayed on your website.
Company details	Add company fax number	Enter your company fax number to be displayed on your website.
Company details	Add company email address	Enter your company email address to be displayed on your website.
Company details	Display on contact us page	Automatically display entered company information on the website’s contact us page.
Company details	Display in footer	Display entered company information in the website footer, depending on the theme.
Company details	Hide company information	Hide company information from the website by removing the relevant details.
Company details	Customise display via theme settings	Adjust theme settings to change how company information is displayed.
Logos	Upload company logo	Upload a logo in JPG, PNG, JPEG, or GIF format to your ShopWired account.
Logos	Preserve animated GIFs	Maintain animation when uploading GIF logo files.
Logos	Edit logo image	Use ShopWired’s image editor to make changes to the uploaded logo.
Logos	Display logo on website	Display the uploaded company logo on your website.
Logos	Use logo in transactional emails	Include the uploaded company logo in your website’s transactional emails.
Favicon	Upload favicon	Upload a favicon file in JPG or PNG format to your ShopWired account.
Favicon	Automatic favicon conversion	Automatically convert uploaded JPG or PNG favicons to ICO format.
Favicon	Edit favicon image	Use ShopWired’s image editor to make changes to the uploaded favicon.
Social media profiles	Configuration location depends on theme version	For themes installed on or after 18 May 2024, manage social profiles in theme settings; for earlier themes, manage them in the ShopWired account.
Social media profiles	Add profiles via ShopWired account	Enter full URLs for Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Pinterest, YouTube, and Instagram to display social links on your website.
Social media profiles	Add profiles via theme settings	Enter full URLs for supported social profiles in your theme’s settings to display social links on your website.
Social media profiles	Supported platforms in themes	Add profiles for Facebook, X/Twitter, LinkedIn, Pinterest, YouTube, Instagram, TikTok, Snapchat, Tumblr, eBay, Etsy, Amazon, and WhatsApp.
Social media profiles	Optional profile fields	Social media profile fields can be left blank if not used.

Featured products

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Selection	Select featured products	Select individual products to be featured on your website using the Featured products management page.
Selection	Add multiple featured products	Add up to a maximum of 50 featured products to be displayed on your website.
Display	Display on Version 4 themes	Automatically display featured products on the home page using the built-in featured products section in Version 4 themes.
Display	Display on Version 5 themes	Display featured products on any page by adding the embedded products section type to the page in Version 5 themes.
Appearance	Theme-based design and placement	The placement, design, and appearance of featured products are determined by the active theme and can be customised using the theme customiser.

Product Q&A

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Product question activation	Activate Q&A on all products	Enable product questions and answers across all products from Products > Settings.
Product question activation	Enable Q&A per product	Allow individual products to accept questions using the product-level setting in Additional information.
Website display	Display questions and answers	Show product questions and answers on product pages, including questioner's name, question content, date, answer, and vote counts.
Website display	Product question form fields	Provide a question form with fields for name, email address, question content, and public/private display preference.
Website display	Visitor voting on questions	Allow visitors to rate questions and answers as helpful or unhelpful.
Website display	Question ordering	Display questions ordered by overall rating (upvotes minus downvotes), with the highest rated first.
Email notifications	Product question asked email	Automatically email the questioner when a product question is submitted, with an optional copy to the store owner via notification settings.
Email notifications	Product question answered email	Automatically email the questioner when their question is answered, with an optional copy to the store owner via notification settings.
Email notifications	Customise Q&A emails	Customise the content of the Product question asked and Product question answered emails within the account.
Managing questions	View and manage product questions	Access and manage all product questions from Website > Product Q&A in the ShopWired account.
Managing questions	Search product questions	Search questions by product name, SKU code, or questioner's email address.
Managing questions	Edit question details	Edit product association, question date, questioner name and email, question content, and display preference.
Managing questions	Add and send answers	Add answers to questions and optionally email the answer to the questioner when saving.
Managing questions	Edit helpfulness votes	Adjust the number of helpful and unhelpful votes a question has received.
Managing questions	Toggle question display	Enable or disable the display of individual questions on the website.
Managing questions	Display question on multiple products	Select up to 50 additional products to display the same question and answer.
Managing questions	View question metadata	View creation date and answered status in the questions list.

Videos page

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Videos app	Add videos app to account	Install the Videos app from the Apps section to enable the dedicated videos page and video management features.
Videos app	Create a videos page	Provides a dedicated page on your website that displays videos embedded from external hosting platforms.
Videos app	Configure videos page URL	The videos page is accessible at https://www.yourdomain.com/videos once the app is installed.
Videos app	Create new video entry	Add a new video by saving its details in the videos management section.
Videos app	Add video display name	Specify a display name for each video to show beneath the embedded player on the videos page.
Videos app	Add video embedding code	Enter the embed code from a hosting site (e.g. YouTube, Vimeo) to display the video.
Videos app	Edit existing videos	Update the details of videos already added in the videos management section.
Videos app	Delete existing videos	Remove videos from the videos page via the videos management section.
Theme customisation	Control videos page appearance	Customise the videos page styling and layout through your theme editor or theme support.
Website menus	Add videos page link to menus	Add a link to the videos page in your site’s menus using Link Lists (not added automatically).

Website images

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Image standards	Recommended square image size	Use square images sized at 4000px by 4000px for product, category, and brand images if unsure about image sizes.
Image standards	Choose a standard image format	Select a common image shape, aspect ratio, or dimensions as a standard and edit other images to match it.
Image upload limits	Maximum image file size	Upload images with a maximum file size of 4MB per image.
Image upload limits	Maximum image dimensions	Upload images with maximum dimensions of 6000px by 6000px in any area of the ShopWired account.
WebP support	Restrict WebP image uploads	Prevent uploading of WebP image files through any image upload or import/export function; only standard image files can be uploaded.
WebP support	Automatic WebP image generation	Automatically create a WebP version of every uploaded standard image file (JPG, GIF, PNG) for use on the website.
WebP support	Serve WebP images to supported browsers	Automatically serve WebP image versions to visitors whose browsers support the WebP format.
Image resizing	Automatic creation of resized images	ShopWired automatically creates four resized versions of every uploaded image in addition to the original file.
Image resizing	Distinct URLs for image sizes	Each resized image version has a distinct URL suffix (_small, _medium, _large, _extra-large) appended to the original image URL.
Image resizing	Image size method usage	Use the image size method on image URLs to return a specifically sized image, e.g. product.photo_url('small').
Image resizing	Small image size method	Return an image no larger than 300px width using the 'small' method argument.
Image resizing	Medium image size method	Return an image no larger than 500px width using the 'medium' method argument.
Image resizing	Large image size method	Return an image no larger than 1000px width using the 'large' method argument.
Image resizing	Extra large image size method	Return an image no larger than 1600px width using the 'extra-large' method argument.
Theme images	Adjust image aspect ratio in Version 5 themes	Adjust the aspect ratio of product, category, brand, and blog post images within all Version 5 themes.
Theme images	Edit theme files to match image dimensions	Edit theme files to change the aspect ratio and dimensions of images displayed on the website.
Theme images	Display recommended image sizes in theme editor	View recommended image sizes for each image type within the theme editor when uploading images.
Theme images	Consult theme help guide for image sizes	Access the theme’s help guide to find recommended image sizes for each image type.
Image uniformity	Maintain uniform image shape and dimensions	Ensure product, category, brand, and blog post images are as uniform in shape and dimensions as possible to optimise website appearance.
Image quality	Upload highest quality images	Upload the highest quality and size images available within the maximum dimension and file size limits.
Image galleries	Create image galleries	Create collections of images that can be embedded on website pages or displayed as stand-alone pages.
Image galleries	Manage galleries by theme	Image galleries are assigned to specific installed themes and organised by theme in the galleries page.
Image galleries	Create new galleries per theme	Create new galleries under the live or draft themes listed in the galleries management page.
Image galleries	Galleries page displays active theme galleries	The galleries page on the website only shows galleries assigned to the theme currently rendering the site.
Image galleries	Galleries for deleted themes	Galleries assigned to deleted themes are shown in an "Other galleries" section in the galleries management page.
Image galleries	Individual gallery URLs	Each image gallery has its own unique URL on the website for direct linking.
Image galleries	Galleries page URL	All image galleries for the active theme are displayed on a galleries page at `/galleries` on the website.
Image galleries	Set gallery main image	Upload a main image for each gallery to display on the galleries page.
Image galleries	Manage gallery images	Toggle images active/inactive, delete images, reorder images by drag and drop, and edit image name/text.
Image galleries	Upload and add images to galleries	Upload images to galleries in batches of up to 5 images per upload, with unlimited total images per gallery.
Image galleries	Image name as ALT text	Use the image name/text as the ALT text for images in galleries.
Image galleries	Gallery page SEO settings	Configure title tag, meta description, and meta keywords for each gallery page.
Image galleries	Noindex setting for galleries	Exclude gallery pages from search engine indexing using the noindex setting.
Image galleries	Gallery page text customisation	Customise any text displayed on the galleries page through the theme editor.
Image galleries	Link galleries in menus	Add links to individual image gallery pages in website menus using the link lists feature or text links.
Image galleries	Version 4 theme image management	Manage certain theme images (e.g. homepage banners) through galleries, editable via theme editor or galleries page.
Image galleries	Version 5 theme image management	Use image galleries primarily to embed galleries on other page types or create stand-alone gallery pages; most images managed via theme editor.
Image galleries	Embed galleries on pages (Version 4 themes)	Embed image galleries on pages by adding code to the website’s theme files.
Image galleries	Embed galleries on pages (Version 5 themes)	Use the theme editor to add an image gallery section to any website page using a created image gallery.
Image editing tools	Crop images	Crop images to remove unwanted edges or focus on specific subjects using freeform or preset aspect ratios.
Image editing tools	Rotate images	Rotate images in 90° increments to adjust orientation.
Image editing tools	Flip images	Flip images horizontally or vertically to create mirrored versions.
Image editing tools	Maintain crop bounds	Automatically keep the crop area inside image bounds, adjusting zoom and position when rotating or scaling.
Image editing	Save edited images	Save changes to images by overwriting the original file, with immediate effect on the website.
Image editing	Discard image edits	Discard all changes made during editing without saving.
Image editing	Browser-based resizing	Perform image resizing entirely in the browser to speed processing and reduce file size.
Image editing	Resize images by dimensions	Enter specific width and height values to resize images to exact dimensions.
Image editing	Lock aspect ratio	Maintain aspect ratio and prevent distortion when resizing by using a padlock option.
Image adjustments	Adjust brightness	Modify the overall lightness or darkness of an image in real-time.
Image adjustments	Adjust contrast	Increase or decrease the difference between light and dark areas of an image.
Image adjustments	Adjust saturation	Control the intensity of colours in an image.
Image adjustments	Adjust exposure	Change how much light is let into the image.
Image adjustments	Adjust gamma	Control midtones without affecting highlights and shadows.
Image adjustments	Adjust clarity	Sharpen image details for a crisper appearance.
Image adjustments	Adjust temperature	Warm up or cool down the colour tones of an image.
Image adjustments	Adjust vignette	Darken or lighten image edges to draw attention to the centre.
Drawing and annotation	Draw freehand lines and shapes	Use a sharpie tool to draw freehand lines or shapes on images.
Drawing and annotation	Erase drawings	Remove freehand drawings without affecting the original image using an eraser tool.
Drawing and annotation	Create editable shapes	Add structured, editable shapes using a path tool.
Drawing and annotation	Add straight lines	Insert straight lines onto images.
Drawing and annotation	Add arrows	Add arrows to point at key parts of an image.
Drawing and annotation	Add rectangles	Add rectangular boxes or borders to images.
Drawing and annotation	Add ellipses	Add elliptical shapes to highlight circular areas or create soft overlays.
Drawing and annotation	Manage shapes	Move, resize, duplicate, and layer shapes with colour selection from a palette.
Text addition	Add text to images	Insert text anywhere on an image with predefined font choices, adjustable size, alignment, and colour.
Text addition	Multi-line text	Enter multiple lines of text and position them precisely on the image.
Filters	Apply image filters	Apply a range of preset filters to change the style or tone of images for consistency.
Redaction	Blur image areas	Use a blur tool to hide sensitive or private information securely on images.
Frames	Add image frames	Add simple borders or decorative frames around images to match website aesthetics or highlight content.
Zoom and pan	Zoom images	Zoom in on images using scroll, pinch, or zoom controls for precise editing.
Zoom and pan	Pan images	Pan across zoomed-in images by dragging to focus on specific details.
Animated images	Animated GIF original image only	Animated GIFs retain only the original image file; resized versions do not preserve animation.

Website menus

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Creating link lists	Create link list	Users can create new link lists and configure the links they contain.
Creating link lists	Edit link list title	Users can set or change a link list’s title for themes that display it.
Creating link lists	View link list position	The link list’s position setting shows where it appears within the theme.
Creating link lists	View link list ID	Each link list displays a unique, read‑only ID.
Managing menu links	Link types	Available link types include Home page, Ecommerce page, Category, Product, Page, Custom URL, Blog, and Contact us page.
Managing menu links	Add and edit links	Users can add new links and edit existing links within a link list.
Managing menu links	Reorder links	Links can be dragged and dropped to change their order within a link list.
Managing menu links	Custom URL format	Internal links use relative paths; external links require a full URL including https://.
Managing menu links	Manage in account	Links can be managed in Website > Menus within the ShopWired admin.
Managing menu links	Manage in theme editor	Links can be managed via the theme editor.
Managing menu links	Account link visibility	Links to login, create account, trade application, forgotten password, and logout automatically show or hide based on the visitor’s login status.
Managing menu links	Account page redirection	Visitors who are not logged in and access customer account pages via menu links are redirected to the login page.
Website menus on themes	Theme-defined menu areas	Each theme defines the menu areas where link lists can be displayed.
Website menus on themes	Assign link lists to menu areas	In the theme editor, users can assign specific link lists to each menu area.
Website menus on themes	Default links in link lists	On first install, each link list includes default links defined by the theme.
Website menus on themes	Reserved empty link lists	Some themes include empty link lists reserved for future use.
Link lists on themes	Theme-created link lists	When a theme is installed, it creates the link lists used by that theme.
Link list theme association	Link lists tied to installed theme	Link lists belong to the current installed theme and cannot be assigned to a different theme.
Link list theme association	Link lists retained after theme removal	If a theme is removed, its link lists are kept and moved to the Other link lists section.

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Activation & behaviour	Enable cookie consent widget	Enable a cookie consent widget that requires visitors to grant or deny consent before non‑essential cookies are set.
Activation & behaviour	Script control	Automatically block non‑essential scripts and cookies until consent is granted, applying visitors’ preferences to ShopWired features.
Activation & behaviour	Cookie categories	Offer consent by category (personalisation, marketing, analytics); strictly necessary cookies remain enabled.
Activation & behaviour	Accept, decline, or manage options	Provide buttons to accept all, decline all, or manage preferences by category.
Display mode	Banner or popup display	Choose to present consent in a bottom banner or a centred popup.
Banner appearance & content	Banner style and colours	Select light, dark, or custom styles and set background, text, and button colours.
Banner appearance & content	Banner text editor	Edit the banner copy, including adding links to your privacy or cookies policy.
Preferences popup	Popup preferences	Customise the preferences popup title, descriptions, and colours for each category.
Access button	Cookie access button	Show a persistent floating button so visitors can revisit and change cookie preferences at any time.
Access button	Access button position	Choose the floating button position: bottom-left or bottom-right.

Currencies

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Multi-currency app	Add selectable currencies	Enable multiple currencies that visitors can choose to view product and delivery prices in their preferred currency.
Multi-currency app	Automatic currency selection by visitor location	Automatically set the display currency based on the visitor’s geographic location when a matching currency is configured.
Multi-currency app	Automatic currency selection by customer country	Automatically set the display currency based on the logged-in customer’s registered country when a matching currency is configured.
Multi-currency app	Set currency conversion rates automatically	Fetch and update conversion rates automatically (daily) using the Open Exchange Rates API.
Multi-currency app	Set currency conversion rates manually	Enter custom conversion rates for each enabled currency relative to the account’s base currency.
Multi-currency app	Adjust automatic conversion rates by percentage	Apply a percentage uplift or reduction to automatically fetched rates to reflect retail exchange rates.
Multi-currency app	Display prices without VAT for foreign currencies	Show prices without VAT when the selected currency’s country is set as a non-VAT zone.

Send to a friend

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
App installation	Send to a Friend app	Adds a product recommendation form to product pages, allowing visitors to email a product to a friend.
Theme compatibility	Automatic integration on Version 3+ themes	The form is automatically available on product pages when using Version 3 or later themes.
Theme compatibility	Manual installation on Version 1 and 2 themes	Requires manual installation to enable the form on product pages for Version 1 and Version 2 themes.
Form display	Trigger via theme sharing button	The form is accessed from the theme’s email or share button on product pages, depending on theme design.
Email customisation	Customise referral email content	Customise the email sent to the recipient, including product details and the sender’s message.
Success handling	On‑page success message	Display an onscreen confirmation after submission.
Success handling	Redirect to success page	Redirect visitors to a specified success page after the email is sent.
Anti‑spam	Built‑in reCAPTCHA	Includes mandatory reCAPTCHA verification on the form.
Privacy	Recipient email not stored	The feature does not store or capture the recipient’s email address.
Integrations	Reward Points referral compatibility	Can be combined with the Reward Points referral system to include unique referral links for logged‑in customers.

reCAPTCHA

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Form coverage	Supported forms for reCAPTCHA	reCAPTCHA can protect contact us, custom contact, customer registration, trade account application, product review, and product question forms.
Form coverage	Unsupported forms for reCAPTCHA	reCAPTCHA is not available on customer login forms, newsletter subscription forms, or shopping basket pages.
Theme compatibility	Automatic setup on Version 3+ themes	Supported forms are protected without manual setup on Version 3 or later themes.
Theme compatibility	Manual setup on Version 1–2 themes	Version 1 and 2 themes require manual setup to enable reCAPTCHA on contact us, customer registration, and product review forms.
App integration	Automatic protection on default forms	The reCAPTCHA app automatically protects the contact us, customer registration, trade account application, and product review forms.
Custom forms	reCAPTCHA on custom contact forms	Custom contact forms can be protected by reCAPTCHA when the app is activated.
Product Q&A integration	reCAPTCHA on product Q&A forms	Product Q&A forms can be protected by reCAPTCHA when using the Product Q&A app.

Soft add to basket

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Add to basket behaviour	Enable soft add to basket	When enabled, visitors remain on the current page after adding a product and are presented with options to proceed to checkout or continue shopping.
Add to basket behaviour	Default add to basket behaviour	When the soft add to basket feature is not enabled, visitors are redirected to the shopping basket page after adding a product.
Display	Theme-controlled soft add to basket window	The appearance and layout of the soft add to basket window are determined by the active theme.

Stockists

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Installation	Install stockists app	Enable the stockists feature by installing the Stockists app from the Apps section.
Stockists page & search	Stockists page URL	A stockists page is automatically available at /stockists on the website domain.
Stockists page & search	Add stockists page link	Add the stockists page to website menus via Link List menus.
Stockists page & search	Theme-based stockists display	Stockists page appearance is controlled by the website theme.
Stockists page & search	Search by postcode or town/city	Visitors can search stockists by entering a UK postcode or town/city name.
Stockists page & search	Search results ordering	Search results are ordered by distance, nearest first.
Stockists page & search	Company name display	The company name is shown as the title for each stockist on the stockists page.
Stockists page & search	Prefill search location in URL	Support prefilled search via a location parameter in the URL to show stockists for that location.
Settings	Configure search radius	Configurable search radius in miles to limit results, with an option for no minimum radius.
Settings	Custom no results message	Set a custom message to display when no stockists match a visitor’s search.
Admin management	Create a stockist entry	Create stockists by entering details such as company name, website and postcode.
Admin management	Edit stockist details	Edit the details of an existing stockist.
Admin management	Delete stockists	Delete stockist entries.
Admin management	Search stockists	Search existing stockists by company name, postcode or town/city in the admin.
Stockist record fields	UK postcode entry	Store a full UK postcode for each stockist to enable location-based searching.
Stockist record fields	Website address entry	Store a website URL for each stockist.

SEO

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
SEO warnings overview	Display SEO warnings page	View a dedicated SEO warnings page in the dashboard showing all current SEO warnings.
SEO warnings overview	Detect duplicate SEO elements	Detect when two or more website pages share the same title tag, meta description, or page URL.
SEO warnings details	List duplicated values and pages	Show the duplicated URL, title tag, or meta description along with the pages containing the duplication.
SEO warnings details	Title tag warnings	Display details of website pages that share the same title tag.
SEO warnings details	Meta description warnings	Display details of website pages that share the same meta description.
SEO warnings details	Page URL warnings	Display details of website pages that share the same URL.
SEO warnings resolution	Edit pages from warnings	Access pages directly from SEO warnings to edit the duplicated SEO property.
SEO warnings update	Daily SEO warnings refresh	SEO warnings are generated and updated once every 24 hours.
SEO tags for pages	Set title tag	Set the title tag content for each website page to define the clickable headline shown in search engine results.
SEO tags for pages	Set meta description	Set the meta description content for each website page to provide a concise summary shown below the title in search results.
SEO tags for pages	Set page URL	Configure the URL for each website page, ensuring it is unique, concise, and uses hyphens to separate words.
SEO tags for pages	Set meta keywords	Add meta keywords to pages, although these have minimal to no impact on modern search engine rankings.
SEO tags for pages	Enable noindex tag	Enable the noindex tag on a page to prevent it from appearing in search engine results.
SEO tags for pages	Edit SEO tags on individual pages	Set or edit title tag, meta description, page URL, and meta keywords when creating or editing individual pages such as categories, products, or text pages.
SEO tags for pages	Edit SEO tags on non-individual pages	Configure SEO tag properties for pages not created individually via the SEO settings page.
SEO tags for pages	Bulk import/export SEO tags	Import or export SEO tag data including title tags, meta descriptions, URLs, and meta keywords using the corresponding import/export system.
SEO tags	Manual SEO tag entry	Manually enter unique title tags, meta descriptions, and page URLs in the SEO tags section to resolve warnings.
SEO tags	Automatic SEO tag generation	Automatically generate SEO tags from page title and description if SEO tags are left blank.
SEO tags	Instant update of SEO tags on website	Changes to SEO tags are reflected instantly on the website front end.
SEO tags	Character limits on SEO fields	Meta title is limited to 100 characters, meta keywords to 400 characters, and meta description to 400 characters.
SEO tags	Configure title tag for standard pages	Configure the title tag for categories, brands, products, website pages, blog posts, media pages, and landing pages when editing those pages.
SEO tags	Configure meta description tag for standard pages	Configure the meta description tag for categories, brands, products, website pages, blog posts, media pages, and landing pages when editing those pages.
SEO tags	Configure title tag for other pages	Configure the title tag for other website pages from the SEO tags settings page under Standard page meta tags.
SEO tags	Configure meta description tag for other pages	Configure the meta description tag for other website pages from the SEO tags settings page under Standard page meta tags.
SEO tags	Configure meta keywords tag for other pages	Configure the meta keywords tag for other website pages from the SEO tags settings page under Standard page meta tags.
SEO tags	Edit SEO tags via edit option	Select the edit option for a page in the Standard page meta tags section to configure its SEO tags.
Verification meta tags	Enter Google Search Console verification meta tag	Enter the full Google Search Console verification meta tag into the designated field on the SEO settings page.
Verification meta tags	Enter Bing Webmaster Tools verification meta tag	Enter the full Bing Webmaster Tools verification meta tag into the designated field on the SEO settings page.
Verification meta tags	Enter custom verification meta tags	Enter verification meta tags from other services such as Pinterest into the custom meta tags field on the SEO settings page.
Verification meta tags	Enter multiple verification meta tags in one field	Enter more than one verification meta tag into the same field by including multiple full meta tags together.
Verification meta tags	Display verification meta tags site-wide	Verification meta tags entered are included in the section of every page on the website, including holding pages.
301 redirects	Create 301 redirects via CSV upload	Create permanent 301 redirects by uploading a CSV file containing old URLs and their corresponding new URLs.
301 redirects	Upload 301 redirects in ShopWired	Upload a CSV file of redirects via Website Settings > 301 redirects, with option to replace existing redirects.
301 redirects	Download existing 301 redirects	Download a CSV file of all currently configured 301 redirects from Website Settings > 301 redirects.
301 redirects	Query string handling setting	Configure whether query strings are removed from old URLs before matching redirects to control redirect behaviour.
301 redirects	Query string removal enabled	When query string removal is enabled, old URLs without query strings redirect with query strings appended to new URLs.
301 redirects	Query string matching enabled	When query string removal is disabled, old URLs with query strings must match exactly to trigger redirects.
301 redirects	Automatic removal of URL suffixes	ShopWired automatically removes `-p` or `-c` suffixes from the end of URLs in redirects.
301 redirects	Special character handling in URLs	Replace special characters in URLs with their URL escape codes before uploading redirects.
301 redirects	URL format rules for redirects	Enter only the final part of URLs without domain name, protocol, or file extensions in the old URL field.
301 redirects	Domain name independent redirects	301 redirects work independently of the domain name, allowing testing on temporary domains.
301 redirects	Test 301 redirects before domain live	Test redirects using the ShopWired temporary domain before your own domain is live on ShopWired.
301 redirects	Domain-wide redirects not supported	ShopWired does not support automatic domain-wide redirects; these must be set up via your domain provider.
Structured data format	Use JSON-LD structured data format	All ShopWired themes use the JSON-LD format to provide structured data on website pages.
Product page structured data	Include basic product information	Include product title, description (HTML tags removed), MPN, GTIN, and SKU in structured data unless "Hide prices unless logged into a trade customer account" is enabled.
Product page structured data	Include product variations and offers	Include an array of offers for each product variation or a single offer if no variations exist.
Product page structured data	Offer details	Each offer includes price, currency, price validity date (end of next year), item condition, product URL, availability status, and business name from company information.
Product page structured data	Include reviews and ratings	Include aggregate rating and individual reviews with rating and reviewer name if product reviews exist and the product reviews app is enabled.
Product page structured data	Include brand information	Include brand name in structured data if the product has an associated brand.
Product page structured data	Include product images	Include an array of image URLs if multiple photos exist, or a single image URL if only one photo is available.
Home page structured data	Include organisation structured data	Include structured data of type `organisation` on the home page with business name, website address, logo URL, email address, telephone number, and business address.
Home page structured data	Include website structured data	Include structured data of type `website` on the home page with business name, website address, and logo URL.
Home page structured data	Source business information from company settings	Automatically source business name, email, telephone, and address from the company information entered in the ShopWired account.
Structured data editing	Edit product page structured data template	Modify the product page structured data template to change the structured data output on product pages.
Structured data editing	Edit home page structured data template	Modify the home page structured data template to change the structured data output on the home page.
Testing structured data	Use Google rich results test	Test website pages for rich results support using Google's rich results test tool.
Breadcrumbs	Breadcrumbs based on navigation path	Breadcrumbs displayed on the website reflect the visitor’s navigation path through categories and brands.
Breadcrumbs	Option to always display base URLs	Users can enable a setting to always display product and category pages at their canonical (base) URLs instead of navigation path URLs.
Breadcrumbs	Setting location for base URL display	The setting to always display product and category pages at canonical URLs is located in Website settings > Domain name under the Canonical URLs section.
Breadcrumbs	Impact of enabling base URL display	Enabling the setting to always display canonical URLs removes the breadcrumb navigation path mechanism.
Breadcrumbs	Requirement to remove breadcrumbs when using base URLs	When the setting to always display canonical URLs is enabled, breadcrumbs should be removed from the website theme.
Canonical URLs	Automatic canonical link element	ShopWired automatically sets a rel="canonical" link element on every page of your website to specify the base URL for indexing.
Canonical URLs	Canonical URLs for category and product pages	Canonical link elements are set on category and product pages to indicate their base URL regardless of navigation path.
Canonical URLs	Non-disableable canonical URL setting	The canonical link element feature is always enabled and cannot be disabled in ShopWired.
Robots.txt	Automatic robots.txt generation	Automatically generate a robots.txt file for your website, accessible at `https://www.yourdomain.com/robots.txt`.
Robots.txt	Default robots.txt instructions	Instruct search engines not to crawl the /wishlist page and links generated by the multi-currency app, allow crawling of all other pages, and provide sitemap locations.
Robots.txt	Upload custom robots.txt file	Upload and use a custom robots.txt file by selecting manual generation and entering the file contents.
Robots.txt	Block search engines from crawling	Configure the robots.txt setting to disallow all search engine bots from crawling any page on your website.
Sitemap.xml	Automatic sitemap.xml generation	Automatically generate a sitemap.xml file for your website, accessible at `https://www.yourdomain.com/sitemap.xml`.
Sitemap.xml	Sitemap.xml content	Include home page, contact us, galleries, videos, blog, categories, brands, every category page, brand page, product page, and website page in the sitemap.xml.
Sitemap.xml	Sitemap.xml page attributes	Assign a priority of 0.5 and a changefreq of daily to every page in the sitemap.xml file.
Sitemap.xml	Add custom pages to sitemap	Add up to 50 custom page URLs manually to the sitemap.xml via the Additional page URLs section in Website settings.
Sitemap.xml	Custom pages sitemap attributes	Assign a priority of 0.5 and a changefreq of daily to manually added custom pages in the sitemap.xml.
Sitemap.xml	Last modified date in sitemap	Include the last modified date for each page in the sitemap.xml based on the last edit or creation date.
Sitemap.xml	Sitemap index file generation	Automatically generate a sitemap index file when the sitemap contains more than 50,000 URLs, listing multiple sitemap files.
Sitemap.xml	Sitemap index file usage	Provide search engines with the URL of the sitemap index file without needing to submit individual sitemap files it contains.
Sitemap.xml	Upload custom sitemap.xml file	Upload and use a custom sitemap.xml file instead of the automatically generated one by selecting manual generation and entering the file contents.
Sitemap.xml	Automatic sitemap-news.xml generation	Automatically generate a sitemap-news.xml file containing blog posts published within the last 48 hours, accessible at `https://www.yourdomain.com/sitemap-news.xml`.
Sitemap.xml	Sitemap-news.xml content	Include news:name as company name, news:genres as blog, publication date as blog creation date, news:title as blog post title, and news:keywords as blog categories and tags.

Referrer spam

Holding page

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Activation	Holding page status	Turn the holding page on or off to control visitor access to the storefront.
Access control	Website access password	Specify a password that visitors must enter to bypass the holding page and view the site.
Content	Holding page logo	Upload a logo image to display on the holding page instead of the default account logo or company name.
Content	Holding page text	Add and style custom text on the holding page using the built-in editor.
Newsletter integration	Email sign-up on holding page	Show an email sign-up field on the holding page and add sign-ups to connected email marketing integrations (e.g. Mailchimp, Klaviyo, MailerLite).
Preview	View holding page	Open the holding page directly from your ShopWired account using the View holding page option.

Domain name

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Custom domain setup	Add custom domain name	Enter your own domain name or subdomain in Website settings > Domain name to use it with your ShopWired website.
Custom domain setup	Select main website address	Choose to display your website at the root domain, the www version, or a subdomain as the primary address.
Custom domain setup	Email domain for transactional emails	Enter your root domain for sending transactional emails when your website address uses a subdomain.
DNS configuration	Required DNS records	Configure an A record for @ pointing to 54.247.109.89 and a CNAME record for www pointing to ecommercedns.uk with your domain registrar.
DNS configuration	DNS verification status	View detection status of the required A and CNAME records in the DNS verification section of Domain name settings.
DNS configuration	Retry DNS verification	Manually retry DNS record verification (available once every 5 minutes) to update DNS status in ShopWired.
SSL certificate	Free SSL certificate provision	Generate a free SSL certificate for your domain, covering the root domain, the www version, or a subdomain once DNS is correctly configured.
SSL certificate	Generate SSL certificate	Request generation of an SSL certificate from Website settings > Domain name.
SSL certificate	SSL certificate activation	Once generated, the SSL certificate is activated and all traffic is forced to use HTTPS.
SSL certificate	SSL certificate status display	View SSL certificate status separately for the root domain and the www version in the SSL certificate section.
SSL certificate	Check SSL certificate status	Manually refresh the SSL certificate status indicators using the check status option.
Security	HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS)	Enable HSTS for domain names with an active SSL certificate to enforce secure connections (available in the SSL certificate section).
Temporary domain name	Free temporary domain name	Receive a free temporary domain name in the format abc.myshopwired.com when creating a ShopWired account.
Temporary domain name	Temporary domain name 301 redirect	Enable an automatic 301 redirect from your temporary domain to your live custom domain to prevent duplicate content.
Temporary domain name	Remove temporary domain name	Remove the ShopWired temporary domain name after making your website live on your own domain.
Temporary domain name	View temporary domain name	View your ShopWired temporary domain name via the website preview or in Website settings > Domain name.

File manager

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Uploading	Upload files from device	Select and upload files directly to the file manager.
Management and organisation	Enter file name	Enter a display name for each uploaded file in the file manager.
Management and organisation	Add optional file tags	Add optional tags to files for organisational purposes.
Management and organisation	Files are immutable	Uploaded files cannot be edited once uploaded.
Storage and delivery	Files hosted on CDN	Uploaded files are served from ShopWired’s CDN via a unique URL.
Storage and delivery	Unlimited file storage	Store an unlimited number of files in the file manager.
Types and limits	Upload files up to 50 MB	Each uploaded file can be up to 50 MB in size.
Types and limits	Accepted file types	Upload Microsoft Office, Adobe, standard text, multimedia, and STL file types.
Linking and URLs	Copy file URL	Copy the unique URL of an uploaded file to your clipboard.
Linking and URLs	Insert file URL in CMS	Insert file URLs into the CMS editor to link to files on website pages.
Linking and URLs	Link to files via URL	Use a file’s URL to create text or image links on any website page.

Transactional emails

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Email address management	Require domain verification for sender addresses	Require completion of domain verification for any domain used in sender email addresses to ensure proper delivery and authentication.
Email address management	Configure separate sender addresses per email	Specify different sender email addresses for each transactional email type.
Email address management	Configure CC and BCC recipients	Add one or more CC and BCC addresses to receive copies of transactional emails.
Email sending	Fallback to ShopWired sending domain for unverified addresses	If a sender address is on an unverified or public domain, emails are sent via ShopWired’s sending domain.
Email format	Toggle HTML emails for website emails	Enable or disable HTML versions of website transactional emails; when disabled, only plain text is sent.
Email format	Toggle HTML emails for order status emails	Enable or disable HTML versions of order status emails; when disabled, only plain text is sent.
Email content editing	Edit HTML and plain text bodies	Edit the content of both the HTML and plain text versions of each transactional email.
Email content editing	Edit email subject lines	Set custom subject lines for transactional emails.
Email content editing	Preview email content	Preview the appearance of transactional emails using sample data.
HTML header & footer	Toggle HTML header and footer	Include or exclude the global HTML header and footer on all transactional emails.
HTML header & footer	Customise HTML header	Create a custom HTML header for transactional emails.
HTML header & footer	Customise HTML footer	Create a custom HTML footer for transactional emails.

Visitor monitoring

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Analytics scripts	Add visitor tracking scripts	Paste visitor tracking code into the Analytics scripts setting to include it on every page of your website, including checkout. Multiple scripts can be added.
Marketing scripts	Add marketing scripts	Paste marketing scripts into the Marketing scripts setting to include them on every page, including checkout, near the end of the page. Multiple scripts can be added.
Conversion tracking scripts	Add conversion tracking scripts	Paste conversion tracking scripts into the Conversion tracking scripts setting to include them only on the checkout/complete page. Multiple scripts can be added.
Conversion tracking scripts	Add standard Google tag	Add the standard Google tag with your Google Ads conversion ID and label via the Conversion tracking scripts setting.
Conversion tracking scripts	Configure conversion event tracking	Configure the Google tag to send conversion events with order total, currency, and transaction ID to Google Ads.
Conversion tracking scripts	Enable enhanced conversions script	Add the enhanced conversions script via the Conversion tracking scripts setting to send hashed customer data to Google Ads.
Cookie consent	Enable cookie consent widget	Activate the cookie consent widget to obtain visitor consent before placing tracking cookies, preventing tracking scripts from running if consent is denied.
Google Analytics	Support for GA4 and Consent Mode V2	Use built-in support for Google Analytics 4 and Google Consent Mode Version 2 to manage visitor tracking and consent.
Facebook tracking pixel	Configure Facebook tracking pixel ID	Enter your Facebook pixel ID to enable tracking without editing website theme files.
Facebook tracking pixel	Select Facebook pixel events to track	Choose to track events including PageView, Purchase, Search, CompleteRegistration, InitiateCheckout, and AddToCart.
Facebook tracking pixel	Configure ViewContent event tracking	Enable the ViewContent event and specify page URL paths that trigger this event, separated by commas.
Facebook tracking pixel	Configure Lead event tracking	Enable the Lead event and specify page URL paths that trigger this event, separated by commas.
Google Ads integration	Use Google tag setup method	Use the Google tag method in Google Ads enhanced conversions settings to enable enhanced conversions on your website.
Google Ads integration	Support compliance with Google policies	Require acceptance of Google’s compliance statement when enabling enhanced conversions.
Enhanced conversions data	Support multiple customer data fields	Support sending hashed email address, or optionally name, address, and phone number fields for enhanced conversion matching.
Enhanced conversions data	Hash customer data before sending	Hash customer data using a secure one-way SHA256 algorithm before sending it to Google Ads.
Enhanced conversions data	Send data on checkout complete	Send enhanced conversions data only on the checkout/complete page when the conversion event fires.
Live chat integration	Add live chat installation code	Add installation code from a live chat provider into the Personalisation scripts setting to enable live chat on the website.
Live chat integration	Add multiple live chat codes	Add multiple sets of live chat installation codes into the Personalisation scripts setting.

VAT

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
VAT zones	Set VAT rate per delivery zone	Assign a specific VAT rate to each delivery zone.
VAT zones	Set VAT threshold per delivery zone	Define a VAT threshold amount for each delivery zone, below which VAT is charged.
VAT zones	Toggle VAT charging per delivery zone	Enable or disable VAT charging for each delivery zone.
VAT zones	Apply VAT to products and delivery rates per zone	VAT charging settings for delivery zones affect both product prices and delivery rates.
VAT zones	VAT threshold currency handling	VAT thresholds are set in the delivery zone’s currency and converted to the website’s local currency at order time.
VAT zones	Display VAT threshold note on orders	Show a note on orders indicating whether VAT was charged based on the VAT threshold comparison.
VAT zones	VAT threshold applies to all order methods	VAT thresholds apply to orders placed via the website and orders created manually in the ShopWired account.
EU business VAT exemption	Validate EU VAT registration numbers	Validate visitor VAT registration numbers to exempt EU business customers from VAT charges.
VAT features app	Install VAT features app	Install the VAT features app to enable VAT relief functionality in your ShopWired account.
VAT features app	Configure VAT country prefixes	Enter a comma-separated list of 2-letter ISO country codes for EU countries where VAT should be removed for valid VAT numbers.
VAT features app	Remove VAT for valid VAT numbers	Enable removal of VAT from orders when a visitor enters a VAT number that is successfully validated.
Disability VAT relief	Mark products eligible for VAT relief	Configure products as eligible for disability VAT relief.
Disability VAT relief	Enable VAT relief declaration for customers	Request visitors to declare eligibility for disability VAT relief and remove VAT from eligible products.
Disability VAT relief	Allow customers to claim VAT relief on basket page	Enable customers to claim VAT relief on eligible products via a basket page post request.
Disability VAT relief	Ask eligibility questions for VAT relief	Implement customer eligibility questions on the basket page to assess VAT relief claims.
Disability VAT relief	Store VAT relief eligibility answers on orders	Store customer answers to VAT relief eligibility questions on the order.
Disability VAT relief	Store VAT relief eligibility reason	Add notes in the order comments recording reasons for VAT relief eligibility.
Disability VAT relief	Enable VAT relief on admin orders	Remove VAT from eligible products on orders created in the ShopWired admin.
Disability VAT relief	Import VAT relief eligibility	Use product imports to mark products as eligible for VAT relief.
VAT rate determination	Use delivery zone VAT rate	Use the VAT rate configured for the selected delivery zone.
VAT rate determination	Use shipping country VAT rate	Use VAT rate of shipping country if no custom VAT rates apply.
VAT rate determination	Apply custom VAT rates	Use custom VAT rates configured for products, variations, or gift cards.
VAT rate determination	Use ShopWired account VAT rate	Use ShopWired account VAT rate or custom rate for the account location if no others apply.
VAT rate determination	Use abandoned basket custom VAT rate	Apply custom VAT rate for items restored from abandoned baskets.
VAT rate determination	Apply disability VAT relief	Set VAT rate to zero when disability VAT relief applies.
Custom VAT rates	Set custom VAT rate on products	Enter custom VAT rates up to 4 decimal places for individual products.
Custom VAT rates	Set custom VAT rate on product variations	Enter custom VAT rates for individual product variations.
Zero rated / VAT exempt products	Mark products as zero rated or VAT exempt	Mark products as zero rated or VAT exempt using appropriate settings or imports.
Zero rated / VAT exempt products	Mark product variations as zero rated or VAT exempt	Mark product variations as zero rated or VAT exempt.
Delivery cost VAT application	Apply VAT to delivery charges based on product VAT status	Apply VAT to delivery charges only if any product in the order is VATable; no VAT applied if all products are zero-rated or exempt.
Delivery cost VAT application	Automatically adjust delivery VAT based on basket contents	Automatically set delivery VAT rate to zero when all basket products are zero-rated or VAT exempt.
Delivery cost VAT application	Charge full VAT equivalent on delivery when products are zero-rated or exempt	Enable charging the full VAT-inclusive equivalent price for delivery costs when all products are zero-rated or VAT exempt.
Delivery cost VAT application	Simplified VAT treatment for delivery charges	Charge delivery VAT in full if any product is VATable, without apportioning between product rates.
VAT calculation methods	Configure VAT calculation method	Choose to calculate VAT per line item or per single unit in orders and baskets.
VAT calculation methods	VAT per single unit method	Calculate VAT on each single unit then multiply by quantity for line items.
VAT calculation methods	VAT per line item method	Calculate VAT on total quantity of each line item.
VAT calculation per single unit	Calculate VAT amount per unit	Calculate VAT on a single unit by applying VAT rate to stored net price, rounded to two decimals.
VAT calculation per single unit	Calculate GROSS price per unit	Calculate gross price per single unit by applying VAT rate to net price, rounded to two decimals.
VAT calculation per single unit	Calculate line item totals	Multiply unit prices by quantity for gross, net and VAT line item totals.
VAT calculation per single unit	Recalculate net price per unit	Derive net price per unit by subtracting VAT amount from gross price (may differ due to rounding).
VAT calculation per line item	Calculate VAT amount on line item	Calculate VAT by dividing gross price by 1+VAT rate, multiplying by VAT rate, rounding to two decimals.
VAT calculation per line item	Calculate line item NET price	Subtract VAT amount from line item gross price to get net price.
VAT calculation per line item	Calculate line item GROSS price	Multiply single unit gross price by quantity for total line item gross price.
VAT calculation per line item	Calculate approximate single unit values	Derive approximate single unit gross, net, and VAT values by dividing totals by quantity, rounded to four decimals.
VAT calculation per line item	Calculate total VAT for basket/order	Sum VAT amounts of all line items and delivery charges for total VAT.
Rounding	VAT rounding per calculation method	Round VAT amounts to the nearest penny (£0.01) at the stage required by the selected VAT calculation method.
Rounding	Impact of rounding on pricing	Rounding effects vary by single unit price and quantity, more noticeable with lower prices and higher quantities.
Price entry	Enter product and delivery prices excluding VAT	Configure prices to be entered excluding VAT (net).
Price entry	Enter product and delivery prices including VAT	Configure prices to be entered including VAT (gross).
Price storage	Store prices exclusive of VAT	All product and delivery prices are stored exclusive of VAT regardless of entry method.
Price storage	Price precision	Store prices to four decimal places for accuracy.
Price storage	Calculate net price from VAT-inclusive entry	Derive net price by dividing VAT-inclusive price by (1 + VAT rate).
Price adjustment	Adjust prices for differing VAT rates	Adjust final prices by removing VAT at original rate and adding VAT at current rate when VAT rates differ but prices include VAT.
Price adjustment	Add VAT equivalent for non-VAT zones	Add VAT equivalent amount to prices for visitors from non-VAT zones when VAT equivalent pricing is enabled.
VAT equivalent pricing	Calculate VAT equivalent pricing using delivery zone rate	Calculate VAT equivalent prices using VAT rate of the customer’s delivery zone.
VAT equivalent pricing	Calculate VAT equivalent pricing using UK standard rate	Calculate VAT equivalent prices based on UK standard VAT rate.
VAT equivalent pricing	Select customer types for VAT equivalent pricing	Specify which customer types should be charged VAT equivalent pricing.
VAT equivalent pricing	Charge VAT equivalent price to non-VAT countries	Enable charging VAT inclusive equivalent price to customers from non-VAT delivery zones.
Price display	Display product and delivery prices including VAT	Show prices inclusive of VAT (gross) to visitors.
Price display	Display product and delivery prices excluding VAT	Show prices exclusive of VAT (net) to visitors.
Price display	Show prices including VAT to trade customers	Show VAT-inclusive prices to logged-in trade customers.
Price display	Show prices excluding VAT to trade customers	Show VAT-exclusive prices to logged-in trade customers.
Price display	Show prices including VAT to visitors and standard customers	Show VAT-inclusive prices to standard customers and visitors.
Price display	Show prices excluding VAT to visitors and standard customers	Show VAT-exclusive prices to standard customers and visitors.
Price display	Adjust price display via Twig variables and theme customiser	Use theme settings and Twig variables to adjust price display including or excluding VAT.
VAT calculation	Select VAT calculation method	Choose VAT calculation method for baskets and orders (per unit or per line item).
VAT calculation	Calculate VAT on total quantity of line item	Calculate VAT and totals based on total line item quantity.
VAT calculation	Calculate VAT on basket total	Sum VAT from all line items and delivery charges for basket total VAT.
US sales tax	Configure US sales tax collection	Enable automatic calculation of US sales tax on orders based on nexus and configured tax settings.
US sales tax	Define nexus states	Specify US states where your business has physical or economic nexus requiring sales tax collection.
US sales tax nexus	Add new nexus	Add physical or economic nexus for US sales tax calculation.
US sales tax nexus	Configure physical location nexus	Enter full physical location address nexus to calculate local tax rates.
US sales tax nexus	Configure economic nexus	Configure economic nexus based on sales volume or value without address.
US sales tax nexus	Edit nexus sales tax ID	Enter and save sales tax ID for each nexus location.
US sales tax nexus	Verify physical location address	Verify addresses with USPS when configuring physical nexus and revalidate if verification fails.
US sales tax nexus	Override address verification	Create physical nexus without USPS address verification if necessary.
US sales tax nexus	Exclude non-tax states	Exclude states with no sales tax from nexus selection (DE, MT, NH, OR).
US sales tax	Sales tax responsibility notice	Display notices informing customers of their use tax obligations where you have no nexus.
US sales tax	Destination-based sourcing	Calculate sales tax for destination-based states based on customer location.
US sales tax	Origin-based sourcing	Calculate sales tax for origin-based states based on your business location.
US sales tax	Economic nexus criteria	Define economic nexus thresholds per state law based on sales volume or value.
US sales tax	Physical nexus criteria	Physical nexus established by location, employees, inventory or business presence.
US sales tax product settings	Assign tax codes to products	Assign TaxJar tax codes to products to apply specific sales tax rates.
US sales tax product settings	Tax code selection	Select appropriate tax code category for products in pricing section.
US sales tax product settings	Create custom tax rates	Create custom tax rates for products if default codes do not calculate correctly.
US sales tax product settings	Tax code list management	Use TaxJar’s tax code list; contact TaxJar to request additions as the list cannot be modified in ShopWired.
US sales tax product settings	Responsibility for tax code use	Users are responsible for correct tax code application and should seek professional advice if needed.
US sales tax orders	Calculate sales tax on manual orders	Select option to calculate sales tax automatically when creating manual orders for customers in nexus states.
VAT on eBay orders	Import eBay prices including VAT	Import eBay product and shipping prices including VAT and calculate net and VAT elements.
VAT on eBay orders	Calculate VAT on imported eBay orders	Calculate VAT amounts on imported eBay orders using default or custom ShopWired VAT rates.
VAT on eBay orders	Exclude VAT calculation for multi-leg shipping	Do not calculate VAT on eBay orders identified as multi-leg shipping (Global Shipping Programme).
Website theme integration	Add VAT number input to basket page	Add form field on basket page for visitors to enter VAT numbers for validation.
Website theme integration	Conditional display of VAT number field	Show or hide VAT number input based on visitor’s delivery zone VAT exemption eligibility.
Website theme integration	Store VAT number in basket comments	Store validated VAT number in a hidden basket field.
Website theme integration	Remove VAT from order and delivery	Automatically remove VAT from entire order including delivery when valid VAT number entered.
VAT validation	VAT number validation via API	Use VATLayer API to validate visitor-entered VAT numbers for VAT removal eligibility.
Product import/export	Set custom VAT rate via import/export	Use import/export columns to assign custom VAT rates up to two decimal places for products.
Product import/export	Set zero rated / VAT exempt status via import/export	Mark products as zero rated or VAT exempt using import/export columns.
Product import/export	Set zero rated or custom VAT rate for variations	Use import/export columns to assign zero rated or custom VAT rates to product variations.
Product multi-channel feed	Output prices including VAT	Configure XML feed to output product and delivery prices inclusive of VAT.
Product multi-channel feed	Output prices excluding VAT	Configure XML feed to output product and delivery prices exclusive of VAT.
Non-UK customers	Adjust prices based on visitor's selected currency VAT status	Automatically adjust product and delivery prices to include or exclude VAT based on visitor's selected currency and location.
Non-UK customers	Select VAT rate for VAT equivalent pricing	Choose which VAT rate (delivery zone or ShopWired default) to use for VAT equivalent pricing calculations.
Non-UK customers	Select customer types for VAT equivalent pricing	Select which customer types should be charged VAT equivalent pricing.
Non-UK customers	Charge VAT equivalent price to non-VAT customers	Enable charging the VAT inclusive equivalent price to customers from non-VAT delivery zones.
VAT registration status	Set VAT registration status	Indicate whether the business is registered for VAT.
Standard VAT rate	Use standard VAT rate	Enable default standard VAT rate for the ShopWired account’s location.
Standard VAT rate	Enter custom standard VAT rate	Disable default rate and enter a custom standard VAT rate to charge within the UK.

Sales tax

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Nexus determination	Configure economic nexus thresholds per state	Set economic nexus thresholds per state based on sales value or number of transactions to trigger tax obligations.
Nexus determination	Physical presence nexus	Recognise nexus in states where physical presence, including inventory in warehouses, triggers sales tax obligations.
Nexus determination	Configure marketplace sales inclusion	Choose whether to include or exclude marketplace sales in economic nexus calculations per state.
State sales tax sourcing	Configure sourcing type per state	Set the sales tax sourcing type for each state as origin, destination, or hybrid sourcing based on state rules.
Shipping taxability	Configure shipping taxability per state	Set whether shipping charges are taxable or not in each state according to local tax laws.
Local taxes	Enable local sales tax collection	Enable or disable the collection of local sales taxes within each state where applicable.
State tax exemption	Recognise states with no sales tax	Automatically recognise states (e.g. Delaware, Montana, New Hampshire, Oregon) where no state or local sales tax is charged.
Product tax overrides	Create product tax override	Create a custom sales tax rate override for a single product or category of products for a specific US state.
Product tax overrides	Select targets for override	Select one or more products or categories as targets for the product tax override.
Product tax overrides	Configure product tax rate	Set the custom tax rate for the product override with up to three decimal places.
Product tax overrides	Select state for product override	Select a single US state to which the product tax override applies.
Product tax overrides	Name product tax override	Enter an internal name for the product tax override that is not visible to customers.
Product tax overrides	Override precedence	When multiple overrides exist for the same state and product, the first created override takes precedence.
Product tax overrides	Product exempt from sales tax option	Mark a product as exempt from sales tax in all nexus states without creating a tax override.
Shipping tax overrides	Create shipping tax override	Create a custom sales tax rate override for shipping charges for a specific US state.
Shipping tax overrides	Configure shipping tax rate	Set the custom tax rate for shipping charges with up to three decimal places.
Shipping tax overrides	Select state for shipping override	Select a single US state to which the shipping tax override applies.
Shipping tax overrides	Name shipping tax override	Enter an internal name for the shipping tax override that is not visible to customers.
Sales tax holidays	Create sales tax holiday	Create a sales tax holiday for a specific US state to exempt selected products or categories from sales tax during a date range.
Sales tax holidays	Select state for tax holiday	Select a single US state to which the sales tax holiday applies.
Sales tax holidays	Select targets for tax holiday	Select one or more products or categories as targets for the sales tax holiday exemption.
Sales tax holidays	Set tax holiday date range	Define the start and end dates for the sales tax holiday.
Notice & report laws	Enable notice and report compliance	Enable compliance with notice and report laws for states that require it.
Sales tax report	Generate sales tax report	Generate a report showing sales tax applied to orders for each jurisdiction within a specified date range.
Sales tax report	Filter report by date range	Select a period from and to date to filter the sales tax report for a specific time frame.
Sales tax report	View jurisdiction name	Display the name of the taxing jurisdiction or custom tax rate for which sales tax has been collected.
Sales tax report	View state in report	Display the name of the state or territory where the taxing jurisdiction is located in the report.
Sales tax report	View total orders per jurisdiction	Show the total number of orders within the selected period for each taxing jurisdiction.
Sales tax report	View total sales tax amount	Show the total amount of sales tax owed to each jurisdiction for the selected period.
Sales tax report	Export sales tax report	Export the sales tax report as a CSV file for external use or record keeping.

Account management

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Package management	Choose ShopWired package	Select a ShopWired package to subscribe to from available options.
Package management	Select subscription interval	Choose billing interval for your package: monthly, yearly (10% discount), 2 yearly (20% discount), or 3 yearly (30% discount).
Package management	Change ShopWired package	Change to a different ShopWired package and select a new subscription interval.
Package management	Automatic billing on subscription	Automatically charge the card for the full cost of the selected subscription interval upon package sign-up.
Package management	Automatic billing on package change	Automatically charge the card for the cost of the new package when changing packages.
Package management	Apply pro rata discounts on package change	Automatically apply pro rata discounts and reset billing periods when changing packages or billing intervals.
Billing and payments	Enter payment details	Enter credit/debit card information and billing address to confirm payment for the selected package.
Turnover management	Package turnover limit enforcement	Each package has a maximum turnover limit based on the previous 365 days of qualifying turnover.
Turnover management	Define qualifying turnover types	Count completed website orders via payment gateway, unpaid orders marked paid in admin, paid quotes, and subscription orders towards turnover.
Turnover management	Exclude certain orders from turnover	Exclude orders created via API, admin, offline payment method, or imported from eBay or Lightspeed from turnover calculations.
Turnover management	Automatic turnover limit checks	ShopWired checks qualifying turnover daily to monitor usage against the package turnover limit.
Turnover management	Display turnover allowance and usage	Show current turnover allowance and usage in the Your ShopWired package section of the Billing/Invoices page.
Turnover management	Email alerts for approaching turnover limit	Send email notifications to the registered account email when turnover exceeds 90% and 95% of the package limit.
Turnover management	Upgrade package on turnover limit breach	Automatically migrate the account to the next highest package and charge the billing card if turnover exceeds the package limit.
User accounts	Create user accounts	Create individual user accounts with a unique email address and password for team members or third parties.
User accounts	User account login credentials	Users log in using their assigned email address and password.
User accounts	Set user email address	Assign an email address to each user account which is used for login.
User accounts	Configure user account name	Enter a name for each user account to identify the account holder.
User accounts	Set initial user password	Configure an initial password for new user accounts that users should change upon first login.
User accounts	Customise user account creation email	Customise the contents of the email sent to new users with their login details.
User accounts	Configure user account access	Limit user access to specific areas of the ShopWired account using account access settings.
User accounts	Edit user account permissions	Modify the access permissions assigned to existing user accounts.
User accounts	Deactivate user accounts	Deactivate user accounts to log out users and prevent future logins.
User accounts	Reset user account password	Reset the password for a user account to allow the user to log in with a new password.
User accounts	Delete user accounts	Permanently delete user accounts from the ShopWired account.
User accounts	User account limitations	User accounts cannot change the ShopWired subscription package or create other user accounts.
User accounts	User account activity logging	ShopWired does not log actions performed by user accounts within the system.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	Enable multi-factor authentication	Require both a password and a 6-digit verification code from Google Authenticator when logging in.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	MFA for user accounts	Allow user accounts with website access to enable MFA individually.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	Activate MFA via QR code	Activate MFA by scanning a QR code with the Google Authenticator app.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	Enter password and verification code	Complete MFA activation by entering the account password and the code from the authenticator app.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	MFA activation confirmation	Display a confirmation notice when MFA has been successfully activated.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	Use Google Authenticator app	Use the Google Authenticator app to generate verification codes for MFA.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	MFA backup code generation	Generate a single-use MFA backup code to bypass MFA if the authenticator app is inaccessible.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	Use backup code for account access	Use the MFA backup code once to access the account if the authenticator app is lost or inaccessible.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	Regenerate MFA backup code	Regenerate a new MFA backup code from account settings, displayed only once.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	Deactivate MFA for user accounts	Deactivate MFA for user accounts by deselecting the MFA option in user account settings.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	User MFA reactivation recommendation	Recommend users reactivate MFA after successfully logging in following deactivation.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA)	Support contact for lost MFA access	Contact ShopWired support for help if both the MFA app and backup code are lost.
Ownership transfer	Transfer account ownership	Transfer ownership of a ShopWired account to a new owner, preserving website content and settings while resetting customer and order data.
Ownership transfer	Preserve website content and settings	Retain all website content, products, categories, delivery rates, and settings during ownership transfer.
Ownership transfer	Website remains live during transfer	Keep the website live and accessible throughout the ownership transfer process.
Ownership transfer	Change account password for new owner	Change the ShopWired account password to a new value before providing access to the new owner.
Ownership transfer	New owner payment information prompt	Prompt the new owner to enter their own payment information upon first login after ownership transfer.
Ownership transfer	Remove payment details	Remove stored payment details from the ShopWired account as part of the ownership transfer.
Ownership transfer	Remove payment gateway connections	Remove all payment gateway connections from the ShopWired account during ownership transfer.
Ownership transfer	Delete all customer information	Remove all customer data from the ShopWired account during ownership transfer.
Ownership transfer	Delete all existing orders	Remove all existing orders from the ShopWired account as part of the ownership transfer process.
Ownership transfer	Reset statistics and order/customer data	Reset all statistics and order/customer-related data to zero during ownership transfer.
Data deletion	Single bulk delete process at a time	Only one bulk delete process can be initiated at any one time.
Data deletion	Progress indicator for bulk delete	View a progress indicator showing the status and estimated time remaining during bulk data deletion.
Data deletion	Delete all categories	Delete all categories from your ShopWired account in a single bulk action.
Data deletion	Delete all products	Delete all products from your ShopWired account in a single bulk action.
Data deletion	Delete all standard customers	Delete all standard customer records from your ShopWired account in a single bulk action.
Data deletion	Delete all trade customers	Delete all trade customer records from your ShopWired account in a single bulk action.
Data deletion	Delete all bulk pricing rules	Delete all bulk pricing rules from your ShopWired account in a single bulk action.

Custom fields

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Supported item types	Add custom fields to multiple item types	Add custom fields to categories, brands, products, pages, blog posts, customers, orders, and quotes.
Custom field types	Create text custom fields	Create custom fields that accept text string input.
Custom field types	Create toggle custom fields	Create custom fields that represent a true or false (selected or not selected) state.
Custom field types	Create choice custom fields	Create custom fields with a list of predefined values selectable via radio buttons.
Custom field types	Create list custom fields	Create custom fields with a list of predefined values selectable via a dropdown menu.
Custom field types	Create value list custom fields	Create custom fields that allow configuration of a list of individual values.
Custom field types	Create product list custom fields	Create custom fields that allow selection of products from the ShopWired product catalogue.
Custom field types	Create date picker custom fields	Create custom fields that allow selection of a date.
Custom field types	Create date & time picker custom fields	Create custom fields that allow selection of a date and time.
Configuration	Configure custom field name	Set a system name for the custom field (letters and underscores only).
Configuration	Configure custom field label	Set a display label for the custom field shown within the ShopWired account.
Configuration	Configure instructions	Add optional instructions displayed as tooltips within the ShopWired account for data entry guidance.
Configuration	Configure sort order	Set the display order of custom fields within the ShopWired account.
Configuration	Configure custom field values	Define available values for choice, list, value list, and product list custom fields.
Website availability	Enable customer custom fields on website	Make customer custom fields available for use on website account creation and editing forms.
Website availability	Enable order custom fields on website	Make order custom fields available for use on the website checkout.
Data entry	Enter custom field data on items	Enter data into custom fields when creating or editing categories, brands, products, pages, blog posts, customers, orders, or quotes.
Data entry	Import custom field data	Add custom field data via the import system where supported for the item type.
Customer custom fields	Display customer custom fields on website forms	Display customer custom fields on account creation and trade account creation forms when enabled.
Order custom fields	Use order custom fields on orders and quotes	Add custom fields to orders and quotes with additional functionality beyond other custom fields.
Order custom fields	Include order custom fields in exports and emails	Include order custom fields in order XML feeds, order status emails, and invoice PDFs.
Website functionality	Display additional product information	Use custom fields to display extra product details like specification tables on product pages.
Website functionality	Modify website behaviour with custom fields	Use custom fields to alter website functionality, such as replacing buttons or controlling page visibility.
Website functionality	Render different layouts using custom fields	Use custom fields to render different page layouts or recommended product sets dynamically.
Website functionality	Display content conditionally with custom fields	Show or hide content blocks or pages based on custom field values.

Google Shopping

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect to Google Merchant Center	Connect your ShopWired account to your Google Merchant Center by signing in with Google and authorising ShopWired.
Account connection	View connected Merchant Center account ID	View the Google Merchant Center Account ID connected to your ShopWired account; this ID cannot be edited.
Account connection	Disconnect from Merchant Center account	Disconnect your ShopWired account from the connected Google Merchant Center account to connect a different account.
Product selection and sending	Select products to send	Choose to send either selected products only or all published products to Google Merchant Center.
Product selection and sending	Manual product selection for export	Select individual products to send to Google Merchant Center using tick boxes in the app’s products section.
Product selection and sending	Search products for export	Search products by name, SKU, GTIN, or MPN within the app to find products for export.
Product selection and sending	Send products immediately	Send selected products to Google Merchant Center immediately using the send now option.
Product selection and sending	View ineligible products	Identify products ineligible for export by a warning icon and view missing information preventing export.
Product deletion	Delete products from Merchant Center	Delete selected product listings from Google Merchant Center without deleting the products from ShopWired.
Product deletion	Bulk delete product listings	Delete up to 50 product listings at once from Google Merchant Center using the app’s delete option.
Product deletion	Automatic removal on product inactivation	Automatically remove products from Google Merchant Center when they are made inactive in ShopWired.
App settings	Use SEO meta title for product title	Send the product’s SEO meta title as the product title to Google Merchant Center instead of the default product title.
App settings	Include VAT in exported prices	Configure whether product prices sent to Google Merchant Center include VAT to match website price display.
App settings	Variation identifier format	Choose SKU codes or generated identifiers (product ID plus variation values) for variation listings.
App settings	List variations separately	List each product variation as a separate item in Google Merchant Center with variation values appended to titles.
App settings	Product identifier source	Choose to use product SKU codes or product IDs as the product identifier sent to Google Merchant Center.
App settings	Auto-send new products	Automatically send newly created products to Google Merchant Center regardless of product selection settings.
App settings	Auto-send reactivated products	Automatically send products to Google Merchant Center when changed from inactive to active status.
App settings	Relist expiring products automatically	Automatically relist products in Google Merchant Center before their 30‑day expiration.
App settings	Include checkout link	Include a checkout URL in product listings to allow shoppers to go directly to your website’s checkout.
App settings	Disable Found by Google	Disable Google Merchant Center’s automatic product crawling (Found by Google) to control submissions via the app.
Cost of goods sold	Send cost of goods sold data	Send cost price information for products and variations to Google Merchant Center using the cost_of_goods_sold attribute when cost prices are configured.
Unique product identifiers	Enter GTIN for products	Enter a Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) for products to meet Google Merchant Center requirements.
Unique product identifiers	Enter MPN for products	Enter a Manufacturer Part Number (MPN) for products without a GTIN and assign a brand to the product.
Unique product identifiers	Mark product as no identifier	Mark products as not having a unique product identifier when no GTIN or MPN and brand are available.
Unique product identifiers	Set GTIN/MPN/no identifier via import/export	Use product import/export columns to set GTIN, MPN, and no identifier flags for products.
Product category	Set Google product category	Assign a Google product category to products using Google’s category taxonomy.
Product category	Set Google product category via import/export	Use the product import/export system to assign Google product categories by specifying Google category IDs.
Condition	Set product condition	Specify product condition as New, Used, or Refurbished for Google Merchant Center listings.
Condition	Set product condition via import/export	Use the product import/export system to set product condition with values New, Used, or Refurbished.
Detailed product attributes	Set detailed product attributes	Configure attributes such as Age Group, Gender, Material, Pattern, Size Type, Colour, Size, and Ships From Country.
Detailed product attributes	Set detailed attributes via import/export	Use product import/export columns to set detailed attributes with Google‑defined values and formats.
Product bundles	Mark product as bundle	Mark products as bundles using Google’s is_bundle attribute, regardless of ShopWired’s bundle feature usage.
Product bundles	Set bundle attribute via import/export	Use the product import/export system to mark products as bundles with the Google Is Bundle column.
Variation URLs	Use variation URLs for product listings	Use variation URLs as the link attribute for product variations to preselect variation options on click.
Shipping information	Include shipping details in listings	Enable or disable sending shipping cost information with product listings to Google Merchant Center.
Shipping information	Use product-specific delivery prices	Send product‑specific delivery prices or free delivery status for the UK delivery zone to Google Merchant Center.
Shipping information	Send cheapest applicable delivery rate	When including shipping details, send the cheapest applicable delivery rate per product for domestic shipping.
Shipping information	Include shipping rates for all zones	Send a shipping rate for each configured delivery zone when listing products internationally.
Shipping information	Exclude specific delivery zones	Exclude selected delivery zones (e.g. Rest of the World, Northern Ireland) from shipping rate information sent to Google.
Stock and availability	Send product availability status	Send availability as in_stock, out_of_stock, pre‑order, or backorder based on stock and pre‑order settings.
Stock and availability	Send availability updates automatically	Automatically update Google Merchant Center when product availability changes from edits, stock imports, or API updates.
Product updates	Automatic product update sync	Automatically send product updates from ShopWired to Google Merchant Center when product or stock data changes.
Product updates	Stock quantity update sync	Automatically send stock quantity changes to Google Merchant Center from ShopWired account edits, imports, or API.
Product data requirements	Require product title	Each product must have a title to be listed on Google Shopping.
Product data requirements	Require product description	Each product must have a description to be listed on Google Shopping.
Product data requirements	Require product image	Each product must have at least one image to be listed on Google Shopping.
Product data requirements	Require product price	Each product must have a price to be listed on Google Shopping.
Product data requirements	Require product availability	Each product must have an availability status (in stock, out of stock, pre‑order, or backorder) to be listed on Google Shopping.
Product data requirements	Automatic availability determination	Product availability is automatically determined by the app for listing purposes.
Product data requirements	Require product brand	Each product must have a brand to be listed on Google Shopping.
Product data requirements	Require GTIN where available	Products with a GTIN must have it provided to be listed on Google Shopping.
Product data requirements	Require MPN if no GTIN	Products without a GTIN must have an MPN to be listed on Google Shopping.
Product data requirements	Require condition for used/refurbished	Used or refurbished products must have a condition specified to be listed on Google Shopping.
Product status	View approved products	View products approved by Google Merchant Center with green tick indicators and approval details.
Product status	View disapproved products	View products not approved by Google Merchant Center with warning indicators and details.
Product status	View disapproval reasons	See item‑level issues and destination status reasons explaining why products are disapproved by Google.
Product status	View approved destinations	See which Google destinations (e.g. Shopping, Surfaces across Google) products are approved for.
Product status	View disapproved countries	View countries where a product is not approved for Google Shopping inclusion.
Export errors	View product export errors	View details and timestamps of product export errors in the app’s export errors section.
Export errors	Retry failed exports	Retry exporting products to Google Merchant Center after correcting errors using the retry option.
API call visibility	View API calls	View detailed API calls made by the app for product creation or updates in the products section.
Custom labels	Use custom labels for campaigns	Use up to five custom label fields to subdivide products in Google Shopping and Performance Max campaigns.
Custom labels	Set custom labels via import/export	Use product import/export columns to set Google Shopping custom labels for products.
Custom labels	Set custom labels via product custom fields	Configure Google Shopping custom labels using product custom fields for custom label 0–4.

eBay

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to eBay	Grant authorisation to connect your ShopWired account to your eBay account for data exchange.
Account connection	Revoke eBay access	Disconnect your ShopWired account from your eBay account by revoking access.
Account connection	Reconnect expired eBay connection	Reconnect after connection expiration by revoking access and reauthorising through eBay.
Account connection	eBay connection expiration	The connection expires after a period specified by eBay (540 days), requiring reconnection.
Business location	Set business postcode	Set your business location postcode to use as the ‘located in’ location on eBay listings.
Product listing creation	Create eBay listings from ShopWired products	Create eBay listings linked to ShopWired products to enable stock sync, listing management, and order importing.
Listing management	Manage exported ShopWired listings	Manage eBay listings created by exporting ShopWired products to eBay.
Listing management	Manage imported eBay listings	Manage eBay listings imported into ShopWired from eBay.
Listing management	View eBay listing eligibility status	Display product eligibility for eBay listing and view missing information via tooltips.
Listing management	List multiple products on eBay simultaneously	Select multiple eligible products and list them on eBay with configurable start date and time.
Listing updates	Filter products listed on eBay	Filter products by those listed on eBay to locate and manage listings.
Listing updates	Update multiple eBay listings	Bulk update selected eBay listings from the products page.
Listing updates	Manual update of product information on eBay	Send updated product information to eBay manually; updates are automatic only for stock.
Listing updates	Error handling for listing updates	Receive errors or warnings when listing updates fail due to missing/invalid data or changed eBay category rules.
Expired listings	Refresh expired listing status	Refresh eBay listing end times for selected products showing as expired.
Expired listings	Refresh expired listing status via product edit	Manually refresh listing status from the product’s eBay information section.
Expired listings	Support for bulk refresh of expired listings	Request manual refresh of all expired eBay listings via ShopWired support.
Expired listings	Automatic expiration time update	ShopWired attempts to update expiration times for eBay listings approaching expiry.
Profiles	Enable eBay business policy profiles	Enable downloading eBay business policies (Shipping, Payment, Return profiles) into ShopWired.
Profiles	Refresh eBay profiles	Refresh and download newly created eBay business policies into ShopWired.
Profiles	Assign profiles to products	Assign eBay Shipping, Payment, and Return profiles when creating or editing products.
Profiles	Bulk assign profiles via import/export	Assign eBay profiles to multiple products with import/export columns specifying profile IDs.
Listing settings	Configure delivery costs and discounts	Set shipping cost calculation method (fixed, variable, discounted) and configure discount percentage.
Listing settings	Activate Global Shipping Programme	Enable or disable eBay's Global Shipping Programme on all listings, overriding individual settings.
Listing settings	Charge VAT for delivery	Select whether to send VAT rate for domestic shipping services on eBay listings.
Listing settings	Specify VAT percentage for listings	Choose whether to send product VAT rate to eBay; requires VAT-registered eBay account and VAT-enabled site.
Listing settings	Configure returns window	Set the returns window displayed on eBay listings, including option for no returns accepted.
Listing settings	Configure dispatch time	Set dispatch time used by eBay to calculate estimated delivery dates.
Stock sync	Select primary stock platform	Choose either ShopWired or eBay as primary stock platform to manage sync direction.
Stock sync configuration	Enable sending stock updates from ShopWired to eBay	Enable or disable sending stock level updates to eBay when ShopWired is primary.
Stock sync configuration	Enable importing stock updates from eBay to ShopWired	Enable or disable importing stock level updates from eBay when eBay is primary.
Stock sync configuration	Disable stock syncing	Turn off both sending stock updates to eBay and importing stock updates from eBay.
Stock sync timing	Immediate stock sync from ShopWired to eBay	Stock changes on ShopWired are synced immediately or within minutes to eBay when ShopWired is primary.
Stock sync timing	Delayed stock sync from eBay to ShopWired after orders	Stock changes on eBay from orders sync within 15 minutes when eBay is primary stock platform.
Stock sync timing	Delayed stock sync from eBay to ShopWired after manual adjustments	Manual stock changes on eBay sync within 2 hours to ShopWired when eBay is primary.
Stock sync events	Stock event triggers for syncing	Stock sync triggered by quantity changes via product edits, stock management, imports, API, orders, and returns.
Stock sync exceptions	Invalid eBay stock events	Stock is not synced if updated via imports or APIs when product is unlinked or when zero stock is sent without required settings.
Product export	Export products to eBay	Export ShopWired products to be listed on eBay.
Product import	Import eBay listings as products	Import eBay product listings into ShopWired as products.
Importing listings	Import listings via eBay app	Use ShopWired’s eBay app to download and import eBay listings.
Importing listings	Filter listings by import status	Filter eBay listings by import status: never imported, imported but not created, created as products.
Importing listings	Filter listings by eBay category	Filter eBay listings for import by selecting a single eBay category.
Importing listings	Filter listings by eBay shop category	Filter listings by user’s curated eBay shop categories.
Importing listings	Filter listings by listing date range	Filter eBay listings by creation date range.
Importing listings	Import listings in pages	Import up to 1,000 listings at a time by selecting page ranges (100 listings per page).
Importing listings	Select listings to import	Select individual or all displayed eBay listings for import via tickboxes or import all option.
Importing listings	Import status notification	Receive notice if no applicable listings are found or if more than 1,000 listings are available.
Importing listings	View listing details before import	View listing image, name, price and eBay link before import.
Importing listings	Link imported eBay listings to ShopWired products	Link imported listings to ShopWired products to enable stock sync, order import, and listing management.
Importing listings	Import fixed price listings from eBay	Import fixed price eBay listings created within 88 days or scheduled within 31 days.
Product data import	Import eBay listing ID	Import eBay listing item ID as ShopWired eBay ID.
Product data import	Import eBay listing end time	Import listing end time as ShopWired eBay end time.
Product data import	Import product title from eBay	Import eBay listing title as ShopWired product title.
Product data import	Import product description from eBay	Import eBay listing description as ShopWired product description.
Product data import	Import product price from eBay	Import eBay listing price as ShopWired product price.
Product data import	Import product quantity from eBay	Import eBay listing quantity as ShopWired product quantity (not imported for listings with variations).
Product data import	Import SKU from eBay	Import eBay SKU or generate SKU from eBay listing ID if none exists (not imported for variations).
Product data import	Import product images from eBay	Import eBay listing images as ShopWired product images.
Product data import	Import product weight from eBay	Import eBay listing weight as ShopWired product weight.
Product data import	Import eBay categories	Import eBay listing categories into ShopWired eBay category fields.
Product data import	Import eBay profiles	Import eBay shipping, returns and payment profiles to ShopWired product eBay profiles.
Product data import	Import GTIN and identifiers	Import eBay EAN as GTIN, ISBN as custom field, brand, MPN, and condition.
Product data import	Import item specifics to custom fields	Import eBay item specifics into matching ShopWired custom fields.
Product data import	Import item specifics with custom fields	Import eBay item specifics data by creating ShopWired custom fields prefixed with “ebay_” before import.
Product import/export	Bulk import/export custom fields	Import/export eBay item-specific custom field data using product import/export with custom field columns.
Product import/export	Import/export eBay product information via CSV	Use specific import/export columns for eBay category IDs, condition, shipping services, listing ID, custom title, and profile IDs.
Exported data	Export product details to eBay listings	Export title, description, images, categories, charity info, condition, SKU, quantity, weight, VAT, GTIN, MPN, brand, item specifics, price, best offer, schedule time, dispatch time, returns, global shipping, shipping/payment/return profiles, discount profiles, and shipping rates.
Exported data	Export product variation details to eBay listings	Export variation options, images, prices, SKUs, quantities, GTINs and MPNs.
Pricing	Set global price increase/decrease percentage	Configure a global multiplier to adjust prices for all new and updated eBay listings.
Pricing	Set custom eBay price per product	Use custom field `ebay_price` to set an individual price for each product’s eBay listing.
Pricing	Restrict custom eBay price for variations	Custom eBay price cannot be set for product variations; price managed via global multiplier or on eBay.
Product information	Assign primary eBay category	Select a required leaf eBay category for the product from eBay’s list.
Product information	Assign secondary eBay category	Optionally assign a second leaf eBay category for broader visibility.
Product information	Assign own eBay store category	Assign a category from your curated eBay store categories for store navigation.
Product information	Assign secondary own eBay store category	Assign an additional category from your own store categories.
Product information	Set product condition	Select product condition from predefined eBay list; this is required.
Product information	Use Brand field	Assign brand in “Categorise the product” section to provide brand item specifics.
Product information	Use MPN field	Enter Manufacturer Part Number in Additional information to provide item specifics.
Product information	Use GTIN/EAN field	Enter GTIN/EAN codes in Additional information to provide item specifics.
Product information	Enable Best Offer feature	Enable eBay’s Best Offer feature for listings; only on eligible existing listings.
Product information	Configure charity listings	Enter valid eBay Charity ID and donation percentage for listings.
Product information	Enable global shipping programme eligibility	Mark products eligible for eBay’s Global Shipping Programme.
Product information	Select delivery rates for eBay listings	Select or configure up to four domestic and five international delivery rates per product.
Product information	Specify international delivery regions	Assign international delivery rates to eBay-defined regions using “specify by area”.
Product information	Assign global delivery rates to products	Assign global eBay delivery rates when creating/editing products or via import/export.
Product information	Manage global eBay delivery rates	Create and manage domestic and international delivery rates with courier, price, and international region details.
Product information	Assign eBay postage rules via custom fields	Use custom fields `ebay_shipping_discount_profile_id` and `ebay_world_shipping_discount_profile_id` for postage rules.
Product requirements	Enforce required product information for eBay listings	Require title (max 80 chars), description, image, brand, price > 0, GTIN & MPN or “Does not apply”, condition, category assignment, delivery rate/profile, and item specifics.
Item specifics	Support required item specifics	Support entry of required eBay item specifics varying by category to comply with listing requirements.
Item specifics	Handle missing GTIN/EAN or MPN	Enter "Does not apply" in GTIN/EAN or MPN fields when not applicable.
Item specifics	Create custom item specifics	Create and configure additional eBay item specifics using ShopWired custom fields.
Custom fields	Install custom fields app	Install app to create and manage custom fields for eBay item specifics.
Custom fields	Add product custom fields	Add custom fields prefixed by “ebay_” to represent eBay item specifics.
Custom fields	Configure custom field label and type	Set label to match eBay item-specific name and select text as type.
Product editing	Enter custom field data	Enter eBay item-specific information in Custom fields section when creating or editing products.
Stock sync	Automatic stock level sync	Automatically synchronise stock between linked ShopWired products and eBay listings.
Imported order data	Import eBay orders	Import orders placed on eBay into ShopWired for management.
Imported order data	Import eBay buyer message	Import buyer’s checkout message as order comments in ShopWired.
Imported order data	Import eBay shipping and billing addresses	Import eBay shipping address as both billing and shipping address in ShopWired orders.
Imported order data	Import eBay order totals	Import eBay order totals including grand total, shipping total, and product subtotal.
Imported order data	Create delivery rate from eBay data	Create a delivery rate from eBay shipping info for single-leg shipping orders.
Imported order data	Handle multi-leg shipping orders	Detect multi-leg (Global Shipping Programme) orders and assign a free “Global Shipping Programme” delivery rate.
Order import settings	Import orders from eBay	Enable or disable import of eBay orders into ShopWired for management.
Order import requirements	Import orders with linked products only	Import eBay orders only if all products have a live linked product in ShopWired.
Order import frequency	Automatic order import interval	Import eBay orders automatically every 15 minutes.
Error handling	Handle missing postage service errors	Require at least one domestic postage service other than collection in person.
Error handling	Handle business policy errors	Use eBay profiles for shipping, payments, and returns when business policies are active.
Error handling	Handle missing item specifics errors	Identify required missing item specifics and add corresponding custom fields with values.
Error handling	Handle invalid quantity errors	Detect and correct stock quantity values exceeding eBay limits.
Error handling	Resolve variation and item specific conflicts	Remove conflicting item specifics that clash with variation names.
Error handling	Handle listing value limit errors	Adjust stock quantity to comply with eBay listing value limits or request higher limits.
Error handling	Ignore obsolete sales fund hold warnings	Recognise and ignore outdated warnings about sales funds on hold.
Error handling	Ignore deprecated PayPal managed payments warnings	Recognise and ignore obsolete PayPal warnings returned by eBay API.

TikTok

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect to TikTok Shop	Connect your ShopWired account to TikTok Shop using OAuth authorisation.
Account connection	Disconnect from TikTok Shop	Disconnect from TikTok Shop to immediately disable all product sync and order import functionality.
App settings	Order importing	Automatically import TikTok Shop orders into ShopWired’s orders page.
App settings	Default shipping rate for TikTok orders	Select the shipping rate to apply to imported TikTok orders.
App settings	Order status sync from TikTok to ShopWired	Automatically update the ShopWired order status when the TikTok order status changes.
App settings	Automatic product sync	Automatically synchronise eligible products when created, updated, or activated in ShopWired.
App settings	Manual product send	Enable a Send now button for each product when automatic sync is disabled.
App settings	List variants as separate TikTok products	Send each product variant as a separate TikTok product with its own title.
App settings	Nightly stock sync check	Reconcile stock levels nightly between ShopWired and TikTok, correcting mismatches automatically.
App settings	View stock sync logs	View detailed logs of stock sync checks and corrections.
App settings	Stock import from TikTok orders	Deduct ShopWired stock for TikTok orders even when order importing is disabled.
Mappings	Map ShopWired categories to TikTok categories	Map each ShopWired leaf category to a corresponding TikTok category.
Mappings	Default TikTok category	Set a default TikTok category for products without a specific category mapping.
Mappings	Map ShopWired brands to TikTok brands	Map ShopWired brands to TikTok brands for product export.
Mappings	Map TikTok order statuses to ShopWired statuses	Map TikTok order statuses to ShopWired order statuses for importing and status synchronisation.
Data mapping	Map ShopWired product fields to TikTok	Map product title, description, ID, SKU, price, sale price, stock, weight, images, brand, category, GTIN/MPN, and video URL to TikTok fields.
Custom fields	Set TikTok Video URL	Enter an optional direct URL to a publicly accessible .mp4 video file for the product.
Custom fields	Set TikTok Unit	Choose the unit of measurement (CENTIMETER or INCH) for product dimensions.
Custom fields	Set TikTok Height	Enter a numeric height value for the product as required by TikTok.
Custom fields	Set TikTok Width	Enter a numeric width value for the product as required by TikTok.
Custom fields	Set TikTok Length	Enter a numeric length value for the product as required by TikTok.
Products	Search products by name or SKU	Search ShopWired products by product name or SKU within the TikTok app interface.
Products	View product sync status	View the TikTok sync status (Sent, Not Sent, Failed) for each ShopWired product.
Products	Batch send products to TikTok	Select multiple products and send them in batch to TikTok for export.
Products	Use TikTok Short URLs	Access generated TikTok short URLs for products to use in TikTok content and ads.
Exports	View exported products	View all products exported to TikTok with sync date, approval status, and disapproval reasons.
Exports	Batch delete exported products	Select and delete multiple exported products from TikTok without deleting them from ShopWired.
Exports	Re-export deleted products	Re-export products to TikTok after they have been deleted from TikTok exports.
Orders	View TikTok Shop orders	View all TikTok Shop orders with details including order ID, ShopWired status, customer name, order date, total, fulfilment status, and logs.
Orders	Filter TikTok orders by status	Filter TikTok Shop orders by TikTok order status such as Awaiting Shipment, Delivered, or Completed.
Orders	Imported order visibility	Imported TikTok orders appear in both the TikTok app and the main ShopWired orders page.
Orders	Non-imported order visibility	TikTok orders not imported appear only in the TikTok app orders section.
Events API	Enable TikTok Events API	Toggle server-side event tracking for TikTok Ads on or off.
Events API	Select TikTok Pixel	Select the TikTok Pixel to send event data to.
Events API	Enter TikTok API access token	Enter the access token required for the TikTok Events API integration.
Events API	Enable debug logging	Enable logging of event requests and responses for troubleshooting.

Etsy

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Listings	Import Etsy listings	Import products from Etsy into ShopWired, with selection of which listings to create as ShopWired products.
Listings	Export ShopWired products	Export products from ShopWired to Etsy, creating new Etsy listings.
Stock synchronisation	Master stock controller	Choose whether ShopWired or Etsy acts as the stock master for synchronisation.
Stock synchronisation	Real-time stock sync	Send stock updates from ShopWired to Etsy immediately when quantities change.
Stock synchronisation	Daily stock sync	Automatically update stock levels from Etsy to ShopWired on a daily schedule.
Stock synchronisation	Smart product filtering	Limit stock synchronisation to products that have been manually imported from or exported to Etsy.
Orders	Import Etsy orders	Import Etsy orders into ShopWired for centralised order management.
Orders	Sync order changes	Synchronise order updates between ShopWired and Etsy, such as status changes.

Veeqo

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to Veeqo	Connect your ShopWired account to Veeqo to enable product, order and stock synchronisation and exporting.
Account connection	Disconnect ShopWired from Veeqo	Disconnect the integration between ShopWired and Veeqo from the Veeqo app.
SKU connection	Manually link products by SKU code	Create a connection between ShopWired and Veeqo products or variations with matching SKU codes.
SKU connection	Link multiple products by CSV upload	Upload a CSV containing SKU codes to bulk link products or variations between ShopWired and Veeqo.
SKU connection	Download linked SKU codes report	Download a CSV listing SKU codes that have established links between ShopWired and Veeqo.
Product import/export	Import products from Veeqo to ShopWired	Import selected or all products from Veeqo into ShopWired.
Product import/export	Export products from ShopWired to Veeqo	Export selected or all ShopWired products to Veeqo.
Product import/export	Remove imported products from ShopWired	Remove products previously imported from Veeqo from your ShopWired catalogue using the remove option in the import section.
Product import/export	Remove exported products from Veeqo	Remove products previously exported from ShopWired from Veeqo using the remove option in the export section.
Product import/export	Variation image export limitation	Images assigned to specific variation combinations are not exported to Veeqo and must be assigned in Veeqo.
Product export	Send stock levels during product export	Include stock levels when exporting products to Veeqo and select the Veeqo warehouse to apply those levels.
Stock sync	Automatic stock sync based on SKU matching	Automatically synchronise stock levels between ShopWired and Veeqo when SKU codes exactly match and a link exists.
Stock sync	Stock sync triggered by order export	Send stock updates from ShopWired to Veeqo when an order is created and exported to Veeqo.
Stock sync	Enable stock sync from Veeqo to ShopWired	Enable synchronising stock levels from a selected Veeqo warehouse to ShopWired.
Stock sync	Select Veeqo warehouse for stock sync	Select the Veeqo warehouse from which stock levels should be synchronised to ShopWired.
Order export	Automatic order export to Veeqo	Automatically export ShopWired orders containing products with matching SKU codes to Veeqo.
Order export	Customer matching for order export	Match orders to existing Veeqo customers by billing company name or email, or create new customer records.
Order export	Partial order export by SKU match	Export only line items with matching SKU codes when an order contains both matching and non‑matching SKUs.
Order export	Select Veeqo store for order export	Select the Veeqo store that should receive exported orders.
Order export	Enable export of future orders to Veeqo	Enable automatic export of future ShopWired orders to the selected Veeqo store.
Delivery rates	Download ShopWired delivery rates for mapping	Download a list of ShopWired delivery rates to assist with mapping to Veeqo delivery methods.
Delivery rates	Map ShopWired delivery rates to Veeqo	Map each ShopWired delivery rate to a corresponding Veeqo delivery method for order exporting.
Order export errors	View order export errors	View orders that failed to export to Veeqo, including order reference, creation date, shipping name and error details.
Order export errors	Retry failed order exports	Retry exporting orders that previously failed after fixing the issues.

ChannelGrabber

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to ChannelGrabber	Connect your ShopWired account to ChannelGrabber by entering API key and API secret credentials.
Product linking	Manual product connection from ShopWired	Manually link SKU codes between ShopWired and ChannelGrabber when products are created first on ShopWired.
Product linking	Automatic product connection from ChannelGrabber	Automatically link new products or variations created first on ChannelGrabber to ShopWired for stock syncing.
Stock syncing	Enable stock sync from ChannelGrabber	Enable syncing of stock levels from ChannelGrabber to ShopWired for products and variations with matching SKU codes.
Stock syncing	Initial stock sync	Perform an initial stock sync to establish connections between products and variations on ShopWired and ChannelGrabber by matching SKU codes.
Stock syncing	Download synced SKU report	Download a CSV report listing SKU codes that are synced between ShopWired and ChannelGrabber.
Order export	Enable order export to ChannelGrabber	Enable automatic export of orders from ShopWired to ChannelGrabber for orders containing products or variations with matching SKU codes.
Order export	Assign sales channel name	Enter the ChannelGrabber sales channel name to assign to exported orders.
Order export	Partial order export by SKU match	Export only the line items with matching SKU codes in orders that include both matching and non-matching SKUs.
Order export	Sync dispatched order status	Automatically update the ShopWired order status to shipped when the order is marked as dispatched in ChannelGrabber, and import tracking URLs.
Unpaid orders	Export unpaid orders with awaiting payment status	Export unpaid completed orders from ShopWired to ChannelGrabber with the status set to awaiting payment.
Unpaid orders	Sync payment status when marked paid in ShopWired	When an unpaid order is marked as paid on ShopWired, update the payment and order status in ChannelGrabber.
Order export errors	View order export errors	View details of orders that failed to export to ChannelGrabber, including order reference, creation date, shipping name, and error details.
Order export errors	Retry failed order exports	Retry automatic export of orders that previously failed to export to ChannelGrabber after correcting errors.

Linnworks

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Setup	Connect Linnworks account	Install the ShopWired app in Linnworks and create a ShopWired channel using your business ID and security token.
Setup	Inventory sync enablement	Enable inventory synchronisation within the Linnworks ShopWired channel integration.
Product mapping	SKU-based matching	Products are matched between Linnworks and ShopWired by identical SKU codes.
Product mapping	Channel product mapping	Link Linnworks inventory items to ShopWired via the channel mapping tool.
Stock synchronisation	Stock sync from Linnworks to ShopWired	Stock level changes in Linnworks update product stock on ShopWired for mapped SKUs.
Stock synchronisation	Stock update interval	Stock adjustments in Linnworks are applied on ShopWired within approximately 15 minutes.
Stock synchronisation	Max listed quantity per channel	Limit the maximum stock quantity published to ShopWired using Linnworks’ Max Listed setting for the channel.
Order export	Automatic order export	ShopWired orders are automatically exported to Linnworks when they contain linked products.
Order export	Order eligibility	Only orders containing items mapped in Linnworks are exported to Linnworks.
Order export	Dispatch timeframe	Set the expected dispatch timeframe for orders exported to Linnworks.
Order export	Order export interval	New ShopWired orders appear in Linnworks within approximately 15 minutes.
Order export	One-way order sync	Changes made to orders in Linnworks are not synced back to ShopWired.

Unleashed

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to Unleashed	Enter your Unleashed API ID and API key to establish the connection between ShopWired and Unleashed.
Account connection	Disconnect ShopWired from Unleashed	Disconnect your ShopWired account from Unleashed using the in-app disconnect option.
Stock sync settings	Enable stock sync from Unleashed	Enable automatic updating of ShopWired stock levels from Unleashed for products with matching SKU codes.
Stock sync	Perform initial stock sync	Manually trigger the first stock sync to match SKU codes between systems and fetch current stock levels.
Stock sync	Automatic stock sync	Ongoing synchronisation of stock levels from Unleashed to ShopWired for products with matched SKU codes.
Stock sync	View stock synced SKUs	View the list of SKU codes currently matched and syncing between ShopWired and Unleashed.
Order export settings	Enable order export to Unleashed	Enable exporting of orders from ShopWired to Unleashed.
Order export settings	Set Unleashed warehouse code	Specify the Unleashed warehouse code used for exported orders; defaults to the Unleashed default warehouse if left blank.
Order export settings	Send requested delivery date to Unleashed	Include the customer’s requested delivery date from checkout in the exported order data.
Tax codes mapping	Map ShopWired VAT/tax rates to Unleashed tax codes	Configure mappings between ShopWired VAT/tax rates and corresponding Unleashed tax codes for order export.
Tax codes mapping	Add multiple tax code mappings	Add mappings for multiple rates, including standard, zero‑rated and exempt.
Order exporting	Export orders with synced SKUs	Export an order only if it contains at least one product with a SKU that exactly matches a SKU in Unleashed.
Order exporting	Partial order export for mixed products	For orders containing both matched and unmatched SKUs, export only the matched items.
Order exporting	Export click and collect orders as pickup	Export orders in the click & collect delivery zone to Unleashed as pickup orders.
Order exporting	Customer matching on export	Match customers by company name, billing email, or surname plus billing postcode; create a new Unleashed customer if no match is found.

Xero

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Allow access to ShopWired app	Grant ShopWired permission in Xero to enable order, payment, and refund export.
Account connection	Connect to Xero account	Authenticate and connect ShopWired to Xero via OAuth to enable data export.
Order export	Enable order exporter	Enable automatic export of orders from ShopWired to Xero.
Order export	Export orders on demand	Manually export orders by date or order reference range, with options to skip already exported or errored orders.
Invoice settings	Send invoices as draft	Create exported Xero invoices in draft status.
Invoice settings	Use ShopWired order reference as invoice number	Populate the Xero invoice number with the ShopWired order reference.
Invoice settings	Use ShopWired order reference as invoice reference	Populate the Xero invoice reference field with the ShopWired order reference.
Invoice settings	Assign invoices to specified contact	Assign invoices to a specified Xero contact when the customer does not exist in Xero.
Invoice settings	Export costs before or after discounts	Choose whether product and shipping costs are exported before or after discounts are applied.
VAT settings	Set default VAT rate	Select the default Xero VAT rate for VAT-liable line items.
VAT settings	Set VAT exclusive rate	Select the Xero VAT rate to apply to VAT‑exempt line items.
VAT settings	Configure custom VAT rates	Enter custom VAT rates in ShopWired and map them to corresponding Xero VAT rates.
Revenue allocation	Select product sales account	Choose the Xero revenue account to allocate the product portion of sales invoices.
Revenue allocation	Select delivery account	Choose the Xero revenue account to allocate the delivery portion of sales invoices.
Revenue allocation	Select rounding account	Choose the Xero revenue account to allocate rounding adjustments on sales invoices.
Revenue allocation	Select partial payments account	Choose the Xero revenue account to allocate partial payments such as gift voucher redemptions.
Payment accounts	Map payment gateways to Xero accounts	Assign each ShopWired payment gateway to a specific Xero bank account for payment export.
Payment accounts	Set default payment account	Select a default Xero bank account for payments without a specific gateway mapping.
Payment accounts	Export payments to Xero	Enable automatic export of payments to Xero bank accounts corresponding to the gateway used.
Payment accounts	Mark exported payments as reconciled	Automatically mark exported payments as reconciled in Xero.
ShopWired Payments fees	Export ShopWired Payments fees	Export ShopWired Payments processing fees as separate line entries to Xero.
ShopWired Payments fees	Select Xero account and code for fees	Choose the Xero bank account and account code used for exporting processing fees.
ShopWired Payments fees	Automatically reconcile exported fees	Automatically mark exported ShopWired Payments fees as reconciled in Xero.
Refunds	Export refunds as credit notes	Create credit notes in Xero for refunded orders with references matching ShopWired order references.
Refunds	Create spend money transactions	Create spend money transactions in Xero bank accounts corresponding to payment gateways for refunds.
Error handling	View export errors	View orders that failed to export to Xero with error messages returned by Xero.
Error handling	Email notifications for export errors	Receive email notifications when an order fails to export to Xero.
Error handling	Retry failed exports	Retry exporting orders after correcting errors.

Quickbooks

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Install QuickBooks app	Install the QuickBooks app from the ShopWired Apps section to enable integration.
Account connection	Connect to QuickBooks account	Connect your ShopWired account to QuickBooks by authenticating via the Intuit website.
Order export	Enable automatic order export	Enable the QuickBooks app to automatically export orders from ShopWired to QuickBooks.
Order export	Manual export on demand	Manually export orders by date range or order reference range, with options to skip orders already exported or with errors.
Payment export	Export payments to QuickBooks	Enable automatic export of payments taken on your website to QuickBooks bank accounts.
Account mapping	Map payment gateways to QuickBooks bank accounts	Assign each ShopWired payment gateway to a corresponding QuickBooks bank account for payment export.
Account mapping	Set default payment account	Select a default QuickBooks bank account for payments without a specific payment gateway mapping.
Account mapping	Configure income account	Select the QuickBooks account where product sales invoices are allocated.
Account mapping	Configure partial payments account	Select the QuickBooks account where partial payments, such as gift voucher payments, are allocated.
Tax settings	Configure VAT rate	Select the default QuickBooks VAT rate to apply to VAT‑liable order line items.
Tax settings	Configure VAT exclusive rate	Select the QuickBooks VAT rate to apply to order line items that do not attract VAT.
Invoicing	Use ShopWired order reference as invoice number	Populate QuickBooks invoice numbers with ShopWired order references instead of using QuickBooks-generated numbers.
Error handling	Email notifications for export errors	Configure an email address to receive notifications when an order fails to export to QuickBooks.
Error handling	View export errors	View a list of orders that failed to export to QuickBooks with error messages returned by QuickBooks.
Error handling	Retry failed exports	Retry exporting orders after correcting errors in the order or QuickBooks app settings.

Sage Online

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Sage Accounting	Connect Sage account	Connect ShopWired to Sage Business Cloud Accounting via the Sage app to enable automatic order export.
Sage Accounting	Disconnect Sage account	Disconnect the Sage account at any time from the app configuration page.
Sage Accounting	Export as sales invoice	Export ShopWired orders as sales invoices into Sage.
Sage Accounting	Export as sales quote	Export ShopWired orders as sales quotes, with an expiry period configurable in days.
Sage Accounting	Ledger account mapping	Map products, delivery, and rounding adjustments to specific ledger accounts in Sage.
Sage Accounting	VAT/tax rate mapping	Configure VAT rates for standard items, zero-rated items, and non-VAT zone exports.
Sage Accounting	Export payments	Automatically export payments to Sage bank accounts when exporting orders as invoices.
Sage Accounting	Payment gateway mapping	Map each ShopWired payment gateway (e.g. Stripe, PayPal) to an individual Sage bank account.
Sage Accounting	Default bank account	Select a default Sage bank account for payments where no specific mapping exists.
Sage Accounting	Read-only bank accounts handling	Identify read-only bank accounts in Sage (e.g. Stripe) and prevent payment exports to them.
Sage Accounting	Export error logs	View failed order exports with error reasons and retry failed exports from the app interface.

Kashflow

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Enter Kashflow login details	Store your Kashflow username and password in the app to connect your account.
Currency settings	Configure currency code and exchange rate	Set the currency code and exchange rate to match your Kashflow and ShopWired accounts.
Payment export	Enable payment export	Enable exporting of payments from ShopWired orders to Kashflow bank accounts.
Payment export	Map payment gateways to Kashflow methods and accounts	Link each ShopWired payment gateway to a corresponding Kashflow payment method and bank account.
Payment export	Set default Kashflow bank account	Choose a default Kashflow bank account for payments without a specific gateway mapping.
Project assignment	Select Kashflow project	Assign orders to a selected Kashflow project, with the option to refresh the project list.
Export settings	Enable order exporter	Enable automatic export of orders from ShopWired to Kashflow.
Export settings	Export orders on demand	Manually export orders by date range or order reference range, with options to skip already exported or errored orders.
Export errors	View export errors	View a list of orders that failed to export to Kashflow, including error messages returned by Kashflow.
Export errors	Retry failed exports	Retry exporting orders after correcting errors in the order or Kashflow app settings.
Export errors	Email notifications for export errors	Configure an email address to receive notifications when an order fails to export.

Clearbooks

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to Clearbooks	Enter Clearbooks API key and email address in app settings to connect.
Invoice settings	Select VAT treatment	Choose the VAT treatment to apply to exported invoices.
Invoice settings	Assign projects to invoices	Assign a single project to all exported invoices.
Customer synchronisation	Synchronise customers as contacts	Synchronise ShopWired customers to Clearbooks as contacts.
Customer synchronisation	Configure customer matching logic	Match by ShopWired customer ID, billing email address, or company name.
Customer synchronisation	Create new customers	Automatically create a Clearbooks customer if no match is found.
Exporting orders	Enable order exporter	Enable or disable automatic export of finalised orders to Clearbooks.
Exporting orders	Automatic order export	Automatically export orders when finalised (e.g. completed or paid).
Exporting orders	Manual order export	Manually export orders for a specific date range or order reference range.
Exporting orders	Synchronise order updates	Automatically synchronise subsequent order changes, including payment status.
Exporting orders	Handle deleted orders	Remove deleted ShopWired orders from the app database without deleting them in Clearbooks.
Exporting orders	Daily export limit	Limit exports to 500 orders per app per day.
Exporting orders	Webhook-triggered exports	Trigger exports via webhooks on order finalisation and updates.
Payment export	Payment recording options	Record payments as invoice-linked payments or as bank statement lines.
Payment export	Automatic and manual payment export	Export payments automatically or manually to Clearbooks.
Payment export	Support partial payments	Export partial payments as separate payment entries.
Payment export	Map payment accounts	Map payment methods in ShopWired to specific Clearbooks bank accounts.
Payment export	Export ShopWired payment fees	Export ShopWired processing fees as negative bank statement lines when enabled.
Data mapping	Export orders as sales invoices	Export orders to Clearbooks as sales invoices with mapped fields.
Data mapping	Export products as invoice line items	Export each product as an invoice line with description, unit price, quantity, VAT rate and comments.
Data mapping	Export shipping as invoice line item	Export shipping charges as an additional invoice line with description, price and VAT rate.
Data mapping	Export discounts as negative line items	Export discounts as negative invoice lines using the highest VAT rate among affected products.
Data mapping	Map customer billing address	Map billing address fields to Clearbooks contact fields during export.
Error handling and notifications	Set error notification email	Specify an email address to receive export error notifications.
Error handling and notifications	Daily error notification emails	Send a daily summary of failed exports to the configured email address.
Error handling and notifications	Log export errors	Record export errors and display them in the app interface.
Error handling and notifications	Track partial exports	Indicate which parts of an export succeeded or failed for partial exports.
Error handling and notifications	Retry or ignore errors	Retry failed exports or mark errors as ignored.

Avalara

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Enter Avalara account ID	Enter your Avalara account ID in the ShopWired Avalara app settings to connect your account.
Account connection	Enter Avalara licence key	Enter your Avalara licence key in the app settings to establish the connection.
Account connection	Update licence key to maintain connection	Update the stored Avalara licence key in ShopWired if you generate a new key in Avalara to keep the integration active.
Sales tax locations	Nexus state configuration	Configure nexus states in ShopWired (aligned with your Avalara account) to ensure correct sales tax calculation and reporting.
Order export	Automatic order export	Automatically export new orders from ShopWired to Avalara once the accounts are connected.
Invoice export	Commit invoices on export setting	Choose whether orders are exported as committed or uncommitted invoices, determining inclusion in Avalara tax returns.
Export errors	View export errors	View details of orders that failed to export to Avalara in the Export errors section of the Avalara app.
Export errors	Retry failed exports	Retry exporting failed orders to Avalara from the order editor using the retry export action.

TaxJar

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Enter TaxJar API token	Connect your ShopWired account to TaxJar by entering your TaxJar API token in the app settings.
Order export	Automatic order export	Automatically export new ShopWired orders to your connected TaxJar account as transactions.
Order export	Export with tax overrides	Exports honour product and shipping tax overrides configured in ShopWired.
Export errors	View export errors	View details of orders that failed to export to TaxJar, including error messages.
Export errors	Retry failed exports	Retry exporting failed orders to TaxJar after correcting the issues.

Mailchimp

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to Mailchimp	Authenticate and authorise your ShopWired account to connect with your Mailchimp account for data syncing.
Consent & confirmations	Enable confirmation email for new subscribers	Choose whether Mailchimp sends a confirmation email asking new subscribers to confirm their subscription.
Consent & confirmations	Sync customer details only if marketing consent given	Send customer details to Mailchimp only if the customer has agreed to accept marketing communications.
Audience mapping	Refresh Mailchimp audience lists	Refresh the list of Mailchimp audiences available for mapping in the app settings.
Audience mapping	Map audience for newsletter sign-ups	Select a Mailchimp audience to sync details when a visitor enters their email in the newsletter subscription field.
Audience mapping	Map audience for order creation	Select a Mailchimp audience to sync details when an order is placed or created by an admin.
Audience mapping	Map audience for trade account applications	Select a Mailchimp audience to sync details when a trade account is applied for or created by an admin.
Audience mapping	Map audience for customer account creation	Select a Mailchimp audience to sync details when a customer account is created by a visitor or an admin.
Subscriber management	Export newsletter subscribers to CSV	Download all existing newsletter subscribers as a CSV file from ShopWired.

Klaviyo

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to Klaviyo	Enter a valid Klaviyo private API key to connect your ShopWired account.
Event mapping	Map ShopWired events to Klaviyo lists	Select Klaviyo lists to receive contacts for events including customer created on order, customer account registration, trade customer registration, and newsletter sign-ups.
Event mapping	Marketing opt-in requirement	Only customers who opt in to marketing are added to marketing lists (except newsletter sign-ups); all orders are exported regardless of opt-in status.
Product sync	Export products and categories	Export your full product catalogue and categories to Klaviyo for campaigns and automations.
Product sync	Automatic product and category updates	Automatically send product and category updates to Klaviyo when they are added or edited in ShopWired.
Product sync	Resync exported products and categories	Option to include previously exported products and categories in a resync to Klaviyo.
Product variations	SKU requirement for export	Each product or variation must have a SKU to be exported to Klaviyo.
Product variations	Variation export display options	Choose to export variations as separate products or grouped within the main product in Klaviyo.
Order events	Enable order event exporter	Enable the order event exporter in the Klaviyo app settings to send order events to Klaviyo.
Order events	Export order events to Klaviyo	Send events such as placed order, ordered product, fulfilled/despatched order, cancelled order, and refunded order for post-purchase flows.
Order events	Export fulfilment and payment information	Include payment and fulfilment details with events by enabling the Export Payments setting.
Back in stock notifications	Integration with ShopWired back in stock app	Use ShopWired’s Back In Stock app alongside Klaviyo flows for restock alerts.
Back in stock notifications	Support back in stock alerts	Allow customers to request alerts for out of stock products or variations; Klaviyo sends emails or texts when restocked.
Voucher sync	Export voucher codes to Klaviyo	Export voucher codes and descriptions to Klaviyo for use in marketing campaigns and automations.
Voucher sync	Include inactive vouchers in export	Option to include inactive voucher codes when exporting to Klaviyo.
Export on demand	Manually export orders	Manually export orders by date or order reference range, with options to skip already exported or errored orders.
Export on demand	Export order batch size limit	Manual order exports are limited to 100 orders per batch.
Export monitoring	Enable export error email notifications	Turn on email notifications for failed order exports.
Export monitoring	Export error email notifications	Set a single email address to receive daily notifications of export errors.
Export monitoring	View exported orders status	View the status of orders exported to Klaviyo in the Exported Orders section.
Export monitoring	View export errors	View orders that failed to export with associated error messages in the Export Errors section.
Export monitoring	View API payloads for exported orders	Inspect the API payload sent to Klaviyo for each exported order for troubleshooting.
Export monitoring	Retry or ignore failed exports	Retry exporting failed orders or mark them to be ignored.

Mailerlite

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to Mailerlite	Connect your ShopWired account to Mailerlite by entering your Mailerlite API key to enable data synchronisation.
Group mapping	Refresh Mailerlite groups list	Refresh the list of Mailerlite groups in ShopWired to include newly created groups.
Group mapping	Map Mailerlite groups to customer events	Map Mailerlite groups to events such as newsletter sign-ups, account registration, trade account registration, and customer created on order.
Data sync conditions	Sync customer details on marketing consent	Send customer details to Mailerlite only when the customer or visitor has agreed to receive marketing communications.
Data sync events	Sync newsletter sign-ups	Automatically send details of newsletter sign-ups to the mapped Mailerlite group.
Data sync events	Sync new customer accounts	Automatically send new customer accounts created on the website to the mapped Mailerlite group.
Data sync events	Sync new trade customer accounts	Automatically send new trade customer accounts to the mapped Mailerlite group.
Data sync events	Sync new customer records on order placement	Automatically send new customer records created when an order is placed to the mapped Mailerlite group.
Subscriber import	Import subscribers to Mailerlite	Import existing newsletter subscribers into Mailerlite by uploading a CSV or TXT file and assigning them to one or more Mailerlite groups.
Subscriber import	Export newsletter subscribers CSV	Download all newsletter subscribers from ShopWired as a CSV file.

Printful

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to Printful	Connect your ShopWired account to your Printful account to enable order export for fulfilment.
Account connection	Disconnect ShopWired from Printful	Disconnect your ShopWired account from Printful to stop order exports.
App settings	Export orders as draft or pending	Choose to export orders to Printful as draft orders requiring manual confirmation or as pending orders for automatic fulfilment and payment.
App settings	Send customer email on shipped status	Automatically send an order status email to customers when Printful updates the order status to shipped in ShopWired.
App settings	Send retail costs to Printful	Send the retail cost paid by the customer to Printful for customs declarations on international shipments.
Delivery rates	Map ShopWired delivery rates to Printful	Download ShopWired delivery rates into the Printful app and map each to a corresponding Printful shipping service.
Delivery rates	Default to flat rate shipping service	If a ShopWired delivery rate is not mapped, export the order to Printful with the flat rate shipping service selected.
Delivery rates	Export free delivery and specific delivery price orders as flat rate	Export orders with free delivery or a specific delivery price using Printful’s flat rate service.
Product import	Import products from Printful	Select and import configured Printful products into your ShopWired account for sale on your website.
Product import	Import product status notification	Receive an email notification listing products successfully imported and any that failed after the import completes.
Product management	Edit imported Printful products	Edit imported Printful products in ShopWired to add categories, descriptions, recommended retail prices, and other details.
Order fulfilment	Automatic order export to Printful	Automatically export orders containing Printful products to Printful for fulfilment as soon as the order is created in ShopWired.
Order fulfilment	Partial order export	Export only Printful-fulfilled products in mixed orders; non-Printful products are excluded from the export.
Order fulfilment	Export errors management	View orders that failed to export to Printful, review error details, update order or product information, and retry the export.

Printify

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to Printify	Authorise ShopWired to access your Printify account to enable product import and order export.
Account connection	Disconnect ShopWired from Printify	Disconnect the integration to stop data exchange.
App settings	Automatic order production	Automatically submit exported orders to Printify for production.
App settings	Customer email on shipped status	Automatically email customers when Printify marks an order as shipped.
Delivery rates	Import ShopWired delivery rates	Import your ShopWired delivery rates into the Printify app for mapping.
Delivery rates	Map delivery rates to Printify shipping	Map each ShopWired delivery rate to a Printify shipping method (Standard or Express).
Delivery rates	Default to Standard shipping	Unmapped delivery rates default to Printify Standard shipping.
Product import	Import all Printify products	Import all products from the connected Printify store into ShopWired.
Product import	Import selected Printify products	Select specific Printify products to import into ShopWired.
Product import	Import status email notification	Receive an email summarising the results of a product import, including successes and failures.
Product management	Edit imported Printify products	Edit imported products in ShopWired, including categories, descriptions, recommended retail prices, and other details.
Order fulfilment	Automatic order export to Printify	Automatically export orders containing Printify products to Printify when the order is created.
Order fulfilment	Partial order export	Export only the Printify-fulfilled items from mixed orders, excluding non-Printify products.
Order fulfilment	Export error management	View and manage orders that failed to export to Printify.
Order fulfilment	Retry failed exports	Retry exporting orders after resolving export errors.

Zakeke

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect ShopWired to Zakeke	Connect your ShopWired store to Zakeke by entering the Store URL, Products API URL, Client ID and Secret key.
Account connection	Set base currency	Set Zakeke’s base currency to match your ShopWired account’s currency.
App settings	Customise customisation button text	Set custom text for the button that launches the Zakeke customiser on product pages.
App settings	Export offline payment orders	Choose whether orders paid via offline methods are exported to Zakeke.
Product management	Import ShopWired products to Zakeke	Import products from ShopWired into Zakeke for configuration or customisation.
Product management	Import new ShopWired products automatically	Automatically import newly created ShopWired products into Zakeke after the initial connection.
Product customisation	Create 2D customisable products	Use Zakeke to create 2D customisable products for your ShopWired store.
Product customisation	Import all product variants for 2D customisation	Import all variants of a product into Zakeke when setting up 2D customisation.
Product customisation	Create 3D configurable products	Use Zakeke’s configurator to build 3D configurable products with adjustable components or materials.
Product customisation	Import all product variants for 3D configuration	Import all variants of a product into Zakeke when setting up 3D configuration.
Product customisation	Enable Zakeke customiser per product	Enable the Zakeke customiser button on selected product pages (2D or 3D).
Product customisation	Enable add to basket without customisation	Allow customers to add a Zakeke-enabled product to the basket without customising it.
Product customisation	Preview product appearance on ShopWired	Preview how 2D customisable and 3D configurable products will appear on your ShopWired website.
Order export	Automatic order export to Zakeke	Automatically export orders containing Zakeke products to Zakeke.
Order export	View export errors	See orders that failed to export in the app’s Export errors section.
Order export	Retry failed order exports	Retry exporting orders that previously failed.

Royal Mail Click & Drop

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
App integration	Install Click & Drop app	Install the Royal Mail Click & Drop app from the ShopWired Apps section to enable the integration.
Account setup	Add Click & Drop API key	Enter the API key from your Royal Mail Click & Drop account into the app settings to connect ShopWired with Click & Drop.
Account setup	Enable OBA/business account option	Select the OBA/business account option to enable Parcel package sizes and apply appropriate validation.
Delivery rates and services	Define custom Royal Mail service codes	Add and describe custom Royal Mail service codes (UK and international) for use when mapping delivery rates.
Delivery rates and services	Map delivery rates to Royal Mail services and package sizes	Map ShopWired delivery rates to corresponding Royal Mail service codes and package sizes for export.
Delivery rates and services	Apply postage automatically	Automatically apply a postage service to exported orders; can be disabled to apply postage manually in Click & Drop.
Order export	Automatic order export	Automatically export orders to Click & Drop when they reach a specified order status.
Order export	Manual order export	Export orders manually by selecting orders with a specified status in the app’s Manual export section.
Order export	Use both automatic and manual export	Allow both automatic and manual export methods to run concurrently.
Order export	Change order status after export	Automatically set the ShopWired order to a selected status after a successful export.
Order export	Send customer email on export	Automatically send an order status email to the customer when an order is exported to Click & Drop.
Order export	Include company details in export	Include your company details from ShopWired with each exported order.
Order export	Select recipient for Royal Mail email updates	Choose whether email updates for tracked shipments go to you or the customer.
Order export	Send customs and duties amount	Send pre‑paid customs and duties amounts (DDP) with the order export when configured.
Order export	Enter IOSS number	Store an IOSS number to be transmitted with each eligible order for customs processing.
Product data for customs	Add origin country	Record the product’s country of origin for customs declarations.
Product data for customs	Add customs description	Provide a product customs description for international shipments.
Product data for customs	Add HS tariff code	Store HS tariff codes for products to support customs declarations.
Product data for customs	Configure product weights	Enter product and variation weights for accurate postage calculation and export validation.
Manual export	Create packages for manual export	During manual export, create one or more packages per order, specifying total weight, package size and service.
Manual export	Select products for customs declarations	Select the products included in each package for international shipments to generate customs forms.
Compliance	Provide required shipment data	Transmit all required shipment and product data for B2B, B2C, C2B and C2C shipments to meet Windsor Framework requirements.
Export errors and monitoring	View export errors	View orders that failed to export in the app’s Export errors section.
Export errors and monitoring	Retry failed exports	Retry exporting orders after correcting issues.
Export errors and monitoring	Move orders to manual export	Move failed automatic exports into the Manual export section for processing.
Dispatch and tracking	Update order status on dispatch	Automatically update the order status when a postage label is purchased in Click & Drop.
Dispatch and tracking	Add tracking information	Automatically attach Royal Mail tracking URLs to orders for eligible services after label purchase.
Dispatch and tracking	Send dispatch email to customer	Automatically send an order status email when dispatch information is received from Click & Drop.

Shipstation

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect to ShipStation account	Authenticate ShopWired with ShipStation using an API key and API secret entered in the app configuration.
Store selection	Select ShipStation store	Choose which ShipStation store ShopWired orders will be exported to.
Status mapping	Map ShopWired to ShipStation statuses	Configure which ShopWired statuses correspond to ShipStation statuses such as awaiting shipment, shipped, or cancelled.
Delivery configuration	Map delivery rates	Map ShopWired delivery rates to specific ShipStation shipping services for preselection when orders export.
Delivery configuration	Configure international non-delivery	Select whether undeliverable international orders are treated as abandoned or returned to sender.
Delivery configuration	Configure business postcode	Enter the business postcode to ensure correct customs handling for shipments between Northern Ireland and Great Britain.
Delivery date settings	Send requested delivery date	Automatically populate ShipStation’s Ship By Date by subtracting configured days from the customer’s requested delivery date.
Order export	Automatic order export	Export orders automatically from ShopWired to ShipStation when mapped statuses are matched.
Order export	Export order details	Include customer details, comments, gift messages, product details, HS Tariff Codes, origin country and delivery information with each exported order.
Order export	Export free or specific delivery orders	Export orders with free delivery or specifically priced delivery to ShipStation without a preselected service.
Order export	Export bespoke delivery rate orders	Export orders created with bespoke delivery rates without a preselected service.
Status updates	Update order status from ShipStation	Automatically update the ShopWired order status when a shipping label is created in ShipStation and the order is marked as shipped.
Status updates	Send customer email on status change	Send an order status change email to customers when an order is updated to shipped via ShipStation.
Order export errors	View and retry failed exports	View orders that failed to export to ShipStation and retry exporting them after making corrections.

OneID

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
App settings	Enter OneID client ID	Enter the OneID client ID provided for your integration.
App settings	Enter OneID client secret	Enter the OneID client secret provided for your integration.
App settings	Enable live mode	Toggle between test and live modes for the OneID app.
App settings	Enable always verify setting	Require age verification on every purchase, regardless of prior verification status.
Product custom fields	Mark product as age restricted	Flag a product as age restricted to trigger age verification during checkout when it is in the basket.
Checkout age verification	Prompt age verification at checkout	Prompt visitors to verify their age at checkout if their basket contains at least one age‑restricted product.
Checkout age verification	Skip age verification for verified customers	Do not prompt logged‑in customers who have previously verified their age.
Checkout age verification	Guest checkout age verification	Always prompt guests to verify their age at checkout.
Customer custom fields	OneID age verified field	Store whether the customer's account has been verified through OneID.
Customer custom fields	OneID age verification date field	Store the date when the customer last completed age verification through OneID.
Customer custom fields	OneID age verification time field	Store the time when the customer last completed age verification through OneID.
Customer age verification data	View and modify customer age verification status	View and edit the stored age verification status and date for individual customers.
Order custom fields	OneID age verified field	Store whether age verification was completed through OneID for the order (including guest checkouts).
Order custom fields	OneID age verification date field	Store the date of the customer's age verification for the order (including guest checkouts).
Order custom fields	OneID age verification time field	Store the time of the customer's age verification for the order (including guest checkouts).
Order age verification data	View and modify order age verification status	View and edit the age verification status and date recorded against an order.

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Account connection	Connect Instagram Business account	Connect your ShopWired account to an Instagram Business account via the associated Facebook Page.
Account connection	Log in with Facebook for Instagram access	Authorise access by logging in with a Facebook account that manages the linked Facebook Page and Instagram Business account.
Account connection	Manage multiple Instagram feeds	Connect and display multiple Instagram feeds on your website, including different post types.
Account connection	Select posts to download	Choose to download either all posts or only posts your Instagram account has been tagged in.
Feed selection	Select Instagram feed	Choose which connected Instagram feed to display in the widget section.
Widget integration	Add Instagram widget section	Add the Instagram widget as a section to pages on Version 5 themes using the sections and blocks system.
Feed display	Select post layout	Choose between grid layout (with configurable rows and columns) or slider layout (with configurable columns).
Feed display	Configure columns per device	Set the number of columns of Instagram posts displayed on desktop, tablet, and mobile devices.
Feed display	Configure rows per device	Set the number of rows of Instagram posts displayed on desktop, tablet, and mobile devices.
Feed display	Set post spacing	Adjust the amount of empty space between Instagram posts in the widget.
Feed display	Configure post click behaviour	Choose what happens when a post is clicked: do nothing, open a popup with the post, or open the post on Instagram.
Feed display	Configure post hover behaviour	Choose the hover behaviour on posts: no change, show likes, show description, or show both.
Feed display	Configure hashtag filtering	Specify hashtags to filter which Instagram posts are displayed in the feed.
Feed display	Select feed content type	Choose to display all posts, posts with specific hashtags, or posts the account has been tagged in.
Feed display	Set feed title	Configure a title to display above the Instagram feed on your website.
Display settings	Set top margin	Adjust the top margin to control the space above the Instagram feed section.
Display settings	Set bottom margin	Adjust the bottom margin to control the space below the Instagram feed section.
Product tagging	Retrieve products from Facebook Catalogue	Use the Facebook Catalogue linked to the connected Facebook Page to list products available for tagging.
Product tagging	Search products for tagging	Search products by name or SKU when tagging products in Instagram posts.
Product tagging	Tag products in Instagram posts	Tag ShopWired products in Instagram posts to link viewers directly to product pages on your website.
Connection management	Notification of Instagram disconnection	Receive email alerts if the connection between Instagram and ShopWired is broken and requires reconnection.
Connection management	Receive email on successful post download	Receive email confirmation when the Instagram Widget app has successfully downloaded posts.

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Consent management	Enable Google Consent Mode V2	Enables GA4 to send cookieless pings before consent and full tracking data after consent is granted.
Consent management	Advanced Consent Mode support	Applies default consent states automatically for ad storage, ad user data, ad personalisation, and analytics storage.
Consent management	Update visitor preferences	Automatically updates GA4 consent settings when visitors accept cookies on your website.

Facebook Conversions API

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
App connection	Connect ShopWired to Facebook	Authorise ShopWired to send purchase event data to Facebook via the Conversions API by connecting your Facebook account.
Pixel management	Enter Conversions API token	Enter a Conversions API token for each Facebook pixel to enable event data export.
Pixel management	Select Facebook pixels	Choose which Facebook pixels/data sources receive purchase event data from the app.
Pixel management	Enable or disable pixels	Turn individual Facebook pixels on or off to control event data sending.
Event export	Automatic purchase event export	Automatically send purchase event data to Facebook when an order is created in ShopWired.
Event export	Export all completed orders	Export purchase events for all completed orders, regardless of how the order was created or the visitor source.
Data sent	Set content type	Set the content_type field to “product_group” for all exported purchase events.
Data sent	Send order and customer data	Send order ID, date/time, billing email, phone, name, city, postcode, country, customer IP address, browser details, Facebook click and browser IDs, product IDs, order total, currency, and other purchase details to Facebook.
Data sent	Send customer date of birth	Include the customer’s date of birth if the customer is registered and has provided this information.
Data sent	Send order region	Include the billing county or state when available.
Data privacy	Hash personally identifiable information	Hash all personally identifiable information in event data using SHA-256 before sending to Facebook.
Exported events	View exported events	View details of successfully exported purchase events including order reference, pixel ID, Facebook trace ID, and event JSON.
Export errors	View export errors	View details of failed event exports including order reference, event type, pixel ID, event JSON, and error details.
Export errors	Resend failed events	Retry exporting events that previously failed after correcting account or configuration issues.
Export errors	File upload fallback	Export events that cannot be sent via API by uploading a CSV file to Facebook using their file upload feature.

AWIN Conversions API

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Setup & Authentication	Connect AWIN account	Authenticate with AWIN using an API key and advertiser ID to enable server-to-server tracking.
Order Export & Attribution Tracking	Automatic order export	Automatically export order details from ShopWired to AWIN when an order is placed.
Order Export & Attribution Tracking	Pass AWIN click ID (awc)	Capture the awc parameter from affiliate links and include it in order payloads for attribution.
Order Export & Attribution Tracking	Pass channel parameter	Include the last-click referrer channel in the payload for accurate attribution.
Data Mapping & Flags	Commission group mapping	Assign all products in an order to the DEFAULT commission group using the order total.
Data Mapping & Flags	Exclude shipping and tax	Send product totals only, excluding shipping charges and tax from tracked amounts.
Data Mapping & Flags	Voucher mapping	Send applied voucher codes or offer IDs with the order payload.
Data Mapping & Flags	Customer acquisition flag	Mark orders as NEW or RETURNING customers based on ShopWired order history.
Monitoring & Error Handling	Log API requests	View logged requests sent to the AWIN Conversions API within the app interface.
Monitoring & Error Handling	Export error handling	Display and manage export errors when orders fail to send to AWIN.

Lightspeed

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Integration settings	Enable or disable integration	Enable or disable the Lightspeed (Vend) app integration within ShopWired.
Integration settings	OAuth authentication	Connect ShopWired to Vend using OAuth authentication with automatic token refresh.
Integration settings	Select stock and order sync directions	Configure master source and direction for stock and order synchronisation between ShopWired and Vend.
Integration settings	Select Vend outlets for stock sync	Choose which Vend outlets to use for stock synchronisation.
Data mapping	Map Vend product fields to ShopWired	Map Vend product name, SKU, price, brand, categories, images, and variations to corresponding ShopWired fields.
Product import	Import products from Vend	Import products including variants, prices, stock levels, and brand/category mappings from Vend into ShopWired.
Product import	Import product images and variants	Import product images and convert each Vend variant into a ShopWired product variation.
Product import	Create brands during import	Automatically create brands in ShopWired if they do not exist when importing from Vend.
Product import	Manual product import	Manually import products from Vend to ShopWired on demand.
Stock synchronisation	ShopWired as stock master	Update Vend stock levels based on ShopWired stock, pushed to a selected Vend outlet.
Stock synchronisation	Vend as stock master	Update ShopWired stock levels based on inventory summed across selected Vend outlets.
Stock synchronisation	Automatic stock sync via webhooks	Enable automatic stock synchronisation triggered by Vend webhooks.
Stock synchronisation	Manual stock synchronisation	Manually trigger full stock synchronisation in either direction.
Stock synchronisation	SKU matching requirement	Require SKU codes for products and variants to synchronise stock between ShopWired and Vend.
Order synchronisation	ShopWired as order master	Export ShopWired orders as sales into Vend with customer record matching or creation.
Order synchronisation	Vend as order master	Import sales from Vend as orders into ShopWired with mapped order details, line items, customer info, shipping, and payment.
Order synchronisation	Automatic order sync via webhooks	Enable automatic order synchronisation triggered by Vend webhooks.
Order synchronisation	Manual order import/export	Manually export or import orders between ShopWired and Vend via the app interface.
Order synchronisation	SKU matching for order line items	Match order line items by SKU for synchronisation; line items must have matching SKUs to sync.
Order synchronisation	Default customer for unmatched orders	Specify a default customer in ShopWired for orders imported from Vend when no matching customer is found.
Customer synchronisation	Optional customer synchronisation	Synchronise customer records and loyalty points between ShopWired and Vend when ShopWired is the order master and sync is enabled.
Customer synchronisation	Customer matching by email	Match customers primarily by email address during synchronisation.
Customer synchronisation	Create new customers on sync	Automatically create new customer records in the target system if no match is found.
Payment and shipping mapping	Payment method mapping	Map ShopWired payment methods to Vend payment types for accurate order export.
Payment and shipping mapping	Shipping rate mapping	Map ShopWired shipping rates to Vend shipping products for correct shipping information on orders.
Error handling	View and retry export errors	View failed exports and retry synchronisations from the app interface.
Limitations	One-way product import	Products are only imported from Vend to ShopWired.

EposNow

Subcategory	Feature name	Description
Epos Now integration	Connection setup	Connect ShopWired to Epos Now using API key and secret, with a test connection function.
Epos Now integration	Product sync settings	Enable or disable product import, export, and automatic product updates.
Epos Now integration	Stock sync settings	Choose the stock master, enable or disable real-time syncing and nightly audits, and trigger an initial stock sync.
Epos Now integration	Order sync settings	Enable or disable order import from Epos Now and order export from ShopWired.
Epos Now integration	Customer sync settings	Enable or disable two-way customer synchronisation.
Epos Now integration	Import products	Import products from Epos Now into ShopWired, including variants, brands, categories, prices, and images.
Epos Now integration	Export products	Export products from ShopWired to Epos Now with SKU, barcode, and reference code mapping.
Epos Now integration	Auto-create brands and categories	Automatically create missing brands and categories in ShopWired during product import.
Epos Now integration	Product image and variant sync	Synchronise product images and variant options between systems.
Epos Now integration	Stock synchronisation	Synchronise stock levels both ways between Epos Now and ShopWired with a selectable stock master.
Epos Now integration	Real-time stock sync	Update stock in real time when sales or stock events occur.
Epos Now integration	Multi-location mapping	Map a single Epos Now outlet to ShopWired for inventory tracking.
Epos Now integration	Export online orders	Export ShopWired online orders to Epos Now as transactions.
Epos Now integration	Import in-store sales	Import Epos Now in-store transactions into ShopWired as orders.
Epos Now integration	Payment mapping	Map ShopWired payment methods to Epos Now payment types.
Epos Now integration	Shipping mapping	Map ShopWired shipping rates to a single Epos Now product for shipping charges.
Epos Now integration	Customer synchronisation	Synchronise customers both ways, matched by email address.
Epos Now integration	Notifications	Send error and audit notifications to a specified email address.
Epos Now integration	Sync logs and retries	View detailed logs for product, stock, order, and customer syncs and retry failures.
Epos Now integration	Download synced SKUs	Generate a report of all synced SKUs for review and troubleshooting.